Trump Promotes Economic Growth Amid Recession Fears, Touts Domestic Investments and Ukraine Deal

President Donald Trump took center stage at the White House during an ‘Invest in America’ event this afternoon, highlighting his administration’s efforts to boost domestic investment. The event attracted top executives from major corporations, including tech giant Nvidia. Those interested were able to follow the event live through a broadcast link provided on the official platform.

Earlier in the day, Trump convened a Cabinet meeting with his senior leadership team, where he lauded the impact of tariffs on strengthening the American economy. He praised businesses that have committed to investing within the United States, asserting that these actions were signs of a healthy and resilient economy despite recent concerns.

This series of public engagements came on the heels of a troubling new economic report indicating that the U.S. economy contracted at an annual rate of 0.3% during the first quarter of the year. This downturn, attributed to companies stockpiling imports ahead of Trump’s tariffs, marks the first time the economy has shrunk since 2022. The move to accumulate imports was widely seen as a preemptive strategy by firms anticipating cost increases due to upcoming tariff policies.

Despite the contraction, President Trump remained steadfast in his defense of tariffs and dismissed suggestions that his trade policies were to blame. Instead, he shifted the focus to his political opponent, President Joe Biden. “Bad numbers” on Wall Street, Trump claimed, “have nothing to do with tariffs.” His comments suggest an effort to reframe the economic narrative, distancing himself from the contraction and placing blame squarely on the Biden administration.

While Trump’s comments dominated the headlines, another significant development unfolded more quietly in the background. The United States and Ukraine have reached a major economic agreement concerning the development and management of rare earth minerals, a critical area in both geopolitical and technological terms. According to information obtained by the BBC, the two nations have agreed to form an economic partnership designed to support Ukraine’s post-war recovery and bolster U.S. access to strategic resources.

A press release issued by the U.S. Treasury Department confirmed this, stating that both countries would collaborate through the creation of a “Reconstruction Investment Fund.” The purpose of the fund is to ensure that “mutual assets, talents, and capabilities” can be leveraged to expedite Kyiv’s recovery and contribute to long-term regional stability. This fund marks a new chapter in U.S.-Ukraine relations, reinforcing economic ties while addressing strategic concerns about resource dependency.

Meanwhile, Trump used the ‘Invest in America’ platform to make a series of economic claims, particularly about consumer prices under his leadership. One of his key assertions was that gasoline prices have declined since he took office. However, recent fact-checking by BBC Verify found that this claim does not align with current data.

According to the American Automobile Association (AAA), the average national price for regular gasoline now stands at $3.16. This figure actually represents a slight increase from the $3.125 average on the day Trump assumed office. Despite Trump’s repeated claims that gas prices “just hit $1.98 in a lot of states,” BBC Verify was unable to find any evidence supporting this. Data from AAA confirms that no state currently has an average gas price lower than $2.67.

Another economic metric highlighted by Trump was the price of eggs. During his White House remarks, he insisted that egg prices had fallen since he became president. BBC Verify reviewed this statement and, again, found no supporting data.

When Trump entered office in January, the average national retail price for a dozen large Grade A eggs was about $4.95. Since then, the cost has not gone down but instead reached a record high of around $6.23 per dozen in March, based on the most recent available data. This contradicts Trump’s public statements and underscores a disconnect between his messaging and verified consumer price trends.

The White House, in its defense, has pointed to wholesale prices as evidence of improvement in the egg market. According to data from the U.S. Department of Agriculture, wholesale prices for large white eggs have decreased significantly. From a high of $6.55 per dozen in January, prices have dropped by approximately 52%, landing at $3.15 in the past week. This drop, while notable, reflects wholesale trends rather than retail prices experienced directly by consumers.

These contradictions between the president’s statements and independent data have raised questions about the administration’s broader economic messaging strategy. While Trump continues to paint a picture of economic strength, citing falling prices and increasing domestic investment, analysts and fact-checkers warn that the reality is more complex.

Still, Trump’s core message appears focused on long-term growth through protectionist policies and strong international partnerships. By praising businesses that reinvest in American infrastructure and forming economic alliances with key global players like Ukraine, he aims to project confidence in his administration’s economic vision, despite immediate challenges.

Trump’s day at the White House was marked by a dual focus on promoting domestic investment and defending his economic policies in the face of troubling data. He offered strong support for tariffs, insisted consumer prices were improving, and announced a strategic deal with Ukraine. However, some of these claims, especially regarding gas and egg prices, do not stand up to independent verification. The contrast between political rhetoric and economic data continues to be a defining feature of the current discourse, as Trump positions himself for future challenges.

Trump Signals Progress on U.S.-India Trade Deal Talks

President Donald Trump on Tuesday expressed optimism about ongoing trade negotiations with India, stating that discussions were advancing positively and that he expects the two countries to finalize a deal soon.

“I think we’ll have a deal with India,” Trump told reporters during a brief exchange outside the White House. He referred to Indian Prime Minister Narendra Modi’s recent visit, noting, “The prime minister, as you know, was here three weeks ago, and they want to make a deal.” Modi had visited Washington in late February, reinforcing bilateral ties and initiating discussions aimed at resolving trade disputes.

Trump’s remarks come on the heels of an update from Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent, who also conveyed a sense of momentum in trade discussions between the U.S. and India. According to Bessent, the two nations are nearing a consensus. “We’re very close on India,” Bessent stated during a White House press briefing, signaling that key sticking points in the negotiations might soon be resolved.

In addition to India, Bessent mentioned that the U.S. is actively pursuing trade agreements with other major Asian economies. He said the administration has engaged in “substantial talks” with Japan about a potential trade pact. Regarding South Korea, he indicated that “the contours of a deal” were starting to take shape, suggesting that progress in the broader Asia-Pacific trade landscape is underway.

Vice President JD Vance had also engaged with Modi recently, underscoring the high-level commitment both nations are investing in sealing a trade deal. “The two leaders made some very good progress, so I could see some announcements on India,” Bessent remarked, hinting that formal agreements or policy announcements could follow soon. However, he did not specify an exact timeline for when these outcomes might be expected.

Bessent emphasized that negotiating with India offers unique advantages due to its existing tariff structures. “A country like India, which has the posted and ready tariffs, it’s much easier to negotiate with them,” he said, highlighting that India’s transparent and pre-established tariff system facilitates smoother negotiations compared to countries with more ambiguous or fluctuating trade policies.

Meanwhile, economist Raghuram Rajan, a former Reserve Bank of India governor and currently a finance professor at the University of Chicago Booth School of Business, noted the strategic benefits for India in reducing tariffs through a deal with the U.S. “India benefits hugely if it can negotiate tariffs to a much lower level, even while some other countries have it at a higher level,” Rajan explained during an appearance on CNBC.

He further elaborated on the potential impact such a deal could have on India’s global economic appeal. “It may cause a lot of companies to look at India in a new light, especially given the large Indian domestic market,” Rajan added. His comments highlight the potential for India to become a more attractive destination for foreign investment if trade barriers are lowered, particularly in comparison to countries with more restrictive tariff policies.

The Trump administration has intensified efforts to cement trade partnerships in the aftermath of the president’s sweeping tariff announcements. These initiatives include outreach to key global allies and trading partners aimed at renegotiating or creating new agreements that align more closely with American economic interests.

“We have 18 important trading relationships, we will be speaking to all of those partners, or at least 17 of them, over the next few weeks. Many of them have already come to Washington,” Bessent noted. This signals a broad, coordinated effort by the administration to engage in a comprehensive review and realignment of U.S. trade policies with multiple nations, while prioritizing those where mutual agreement appears feasible.

Bessent later clarified that active discussions are currently underway with 17 of those 18 partners, specifically excluding China. “Trading relationships with 17 partners are in motion,” he said, making clear that the administration is focusing its attention elsewhere amid ongoing tensions and complex trade issues with Beijing.

The exclusion of China from these ongoing negotiations further emphasizes the strategic shift in U.S. trade policy under Trump, which has focused on bilateral agreements and reducing dependency on countries with which the U.S. has significant trade deficits or unresolved disputes.

In the case of India, the U.S. has long sought greater market access for American companies, particularly in sectors such as agriculture, technology, and medical devices. On the other hand, India has been eager to preserve certain protections for its domestic industries while improving access to the U.S. market for its exports, especially in the textile and information technology sectors.

Past attempts to resolve trade tensions between the two countries have been impeded by disagreements over tariffs, intellectual property rights, data privacy, and digital commerce regulations. However, recent high-level interactions and positive rhetoric from both sides suggest that the current environment is more conducive to cooperation than in previous years.

While no specific details about the trade agreement under discussion have been released, the tone of the conversations from top U.S. officials indicates that a framework may already be in place. The administration’s coordinated messaging—from the president, treasury secretary, and vice president—reflects a united front and a sense of urgency in finalizing the deal.

The global trade community will be watching closely to see if the U.S. and India can overcome their longstanding trade differences and reach a mutually beneficial agreement. A successful deal could mark a significant turning point in U.S.-India relations and set the stage for greater economic integration between the world’s largest democracy and its largest economy.

Until then, both countries appear committed to keeping up the momentum. As President Trump stated confidently, “I think we’ll have a deal with India,” summarizing the administration’s outlook on what could be one of the more consequential trade developments of his presidency.

Trump’s First 100 Days: A Presidency of Bold Moves and Sharp Divides

On January 20, Donald Trump began his second term as President of the United States, declaring that he would deliver “the most extraordinary first 100 days of any presidency in American history.” For decades, the 100-day benchmark has served as a symbolic moment to evaluate a new administration’s achievements. The early data from Trump’s second term offers insight into the progress he has made on his key promises—ranging from imposing global tariffs and arresting migrants to making deep cuts to federal spending.

One of the most telling indicators of a president’s early performance is the public’s approval rating. Gallup, the U.S. polling firm that has long tracked presidential approval at the 100-day mark, shows Trump faring poorly compared to his predecessors. Trump, now the first post-war president to serve two non-consecutive terms, has seen low ratings in both his presidencies. Historically, presidents such as John F. Kennedy and Ronald Reagan enjoyed strong support with 83% and 67% approval ratings, respectively. Joe Biden and Bill Clinton were also above 50%. In contrast, both of Trump’s terms saw him with under 50% approval at this milestone, making him the only post-war president with this distinction.

However, looking at approval through a partisan lens tells a more complex story. Trump’s second term shows the most extreme polarization to date, with 90% of Republicans supporting him and just 4% of Democrats. This 86-point gap marks the largest partisan split ever recorded at the 100-day point. “The longer the line, the more polarised the support,” Gallup’s polling analysis notes.

The most recent Gallup poll, conducted from April 1–14 during a time of market volatility triggered by Trump’s tariff announcements, recorded his approval at 44%. This figure, drawn from over 1,000 interviews, reflects stable ratings consistent with the first quarter of his term.

Throughout his campaign, Trump promised swift action on top issues. He said he would lower prices, end the war in Ukraine, and pardon individuals tied to the January 6 Capitol attack. While not all promises have been fulfilled, Trump has been extremely active in terms of executive action. He has issued more executive orders in 100 days than any president in the last 100 years. In fact, he has already signed more than half the number of orders from his entire first term and nearly 90% of the total executive orders Joe Biden issued in four years.

Some of these executive orders have been high-impact. On his first day, Trump announced that the U.S. would withdraw from the UN’s Paris Climate Agreement, calling it an unfair burden on Americans. He also declared a national energy emergency to boost domestic oil production. Other actions have been less weighty but symbolic, such as lifting the ban on plastic straws.

Despite this flurry of executive activity, Trump has not shown much interest in working with Congress. He has signed only five bills into law in his first 100 days—a lower number than any new president in 70 years, according to Punchbowl News. His aggressive use of executive authority has also sparked legal backlash. Over 200 of his orders have been challenged in court, and judges have blocked several of them, as reported by the legal publication Just Security.

Economically, Trump’s platform centered on lowering prices and creating jobs. His pro-business rhetoric was initially welcomed by Wall Street, reflected in a spike in S&P 500 stock prices following his election. But as Trump escalated his threats of tariffs, investor confidence waned. The markets dipped sharply on April 2 when Trump imposed sweeping global tariffs. Though he softened some tariffs a week later, global markets remained jittery, and his trade policies were blamed for economic disruptions.

Consumer confidence has also declined. The University of Michigan’s Consumer Sentiment Index, a long-running measure of public economic outlook, dropped for four straight months. April’s score was the second-lowest on record. The lowest came in June 2022 during Biden’s presidency, amid inflation concerns following Russia’s invasion of Ukraine. In April 2025, Americans voiced worries about an impending trade war, reporting deteriorating expectations for inflation, income, and personal finances. Trump hasn’t ruled out a recession but remains confident in the long-term benefits of his policies.

Inflation trends remain uncertain, but the U.S. Federal Reserve has warned that Trump’s tariff strategy could drive prices upward again. On trade, Trump argues that global tariffs will help bring jobs and manufacturing back to the U.S. while reducing the trade deficit. He criticizes America’s long-standing trade imbalance as a sign of other countries “ripping off” the U.S., frequently citing China.

According to data from the U.S. Census Bureau and the Bureau of Economic Analysis, America continued to import more goods and services than it exported through 2024. After Trump’s re-election in November 2024, importers rushed to bring in products before tariffs could take effect. By January 2025, imports hit a record high of $329 billion—the highest monthly total since records began in 1992. Although Trump paused many of his harshest tariffs in early April, reports suggest Americans have been stockpiling goods, fearing price hikes. Tariffs on Chinese imports remain, but Trump has signaled he is open to reducing them if a deal can be made.

On immigration, Trump returned to the presidency vowing large-scale deportations and an end to birthright citizenship. Although he has faced legal blocks on birthright citizenship, one area where he claims success is at the southern border. In March 2025, just over 7,000 arrests were made at the U.S.-Mexico border—down significantly from the 137,000 arrests in March 2024 during Biden’s presidency.

While the number of deportations remains lower than promised and legal challenges persist, Trump points to rising internal detentions and strong cooperation with local law enforcement as evidence of success. ICE raids have increased, with many targeting individuals with criminal records. Trump’s team is also promoting what it calls “unprecedented” collaboration with police departments across the country.

However, with detention facilities nearing capacity, experts warn of potential overcrowding issues. The future of Trump’s immigration policies—and their legality—will likely be shaped by court rulings in the coming months.

Looking ahead, Trump’s broader agenda depends heavily on what unfolds in the next 100 days. Public perception of his actions on the border, trade decisions, and economic outcomes such as food prices will help determine whether Trump maintains his reputation as the most polarizing president in modern history.

PM Modi Grants Armed Forces Full Freedom to Respond After Pahalgam Attack

Reaffirming India’s strong stance against terrorism, Prime Minister Narendra Modi declared that it is the country’s “national resolve to deal a crushing blow to terrorism.” He made it clear that the Indian armed forces enjoy his full confidence and have been granted “complete operational freedom to decide on the mode, targets and timing” of India’s response following last week’s deadly terror attack in Pahalgam that claimed the lives of 26 people.

This decisive statement came during a high-level security meeting at the Prime Minister’s residence on Tuesday. Those present included Defence Minister Rajnath Singh, National Security Advisor Ajit Doval, Chief of Defence Staff General Anil Chauhan, Army Chief General Upendra Dwivedi, Air Force Chief Air Marshal A.P. Singh, and Navy Chief Admiral Dinesh Tripathi. Sources indicated that this gathering took place just one day before the Prime Minister is set to lead a meeting of the Cabinet Committee on Security. This will be the second such meeting convened following the Pahalgam tragedy.

The recent meeting followed a series of diplomatic actions initiated by India in response to the attack. Officials believe that Pakistan played a role in orchestrating the assault. As a result, India announced several measures including the suspension of visa services for Pakistani nationals and a temporary halt to the Indus Water Treaty. The presence of the Defence Minister, NSA, CDS, and the chiefs of all three military services at Tuesday’s meeting strongly signals that military retaliation is being contemplated alongside the diplomatic steps.

“Prime Minister Modi expressed complete faith and confidence in the professional abilities of the Indian Armed Forces,” said a government source. The source further emphasized that Modi had assured the military of their authority to choose how and when to respond. “He added that they [the armed forces] have complete operational freedom to decide on the mode, targets and timing of our response,” the source reiterated.

While preparations are being made at the highest levels of government, military activity on the ground has already intensified. According to defence officials, intelligence-based counter-terror operations are continuing in the Kashmir Valley. These are aimed at preemptively targeting terror networks believed to be operating in the region. At the same time, Cease-Fire Violations (CFVs) by Pakistan have been reported for five consecutive nights along the Line of Control.

“During the night of April 28-29, Pakistan Army resorted to unprovoked small arms firing across the Line of Control in areas opposite Kupwara and Baramulla districts, as well as the Akhnoor sector,” the Army said in a statement. It added that “Indian Army responded in a measured and effective manner to the provocation.”

In addition to military discussions, coordination among internal security forces has also been stepped up. On Tuesday, Union Home Secretary Govind Mohan chaired a security meeting in New Delhi. The meeting was attended by the Director Generals of the Border Security Force (BSF), Assam Rifles, and the National Security Guard (NSG), as well as senior officers from the Central Reserve Police Force (CRPF) and the Central Industrial Security Force (CISF). While the specific agenda of the meeting was not disclosed, a senior government official said that security forces were instructed to remain on high alert, particularly at national borders, and to maintain maximum vigilance.

The broader context of this flurry of high-level activity is India’s strategic and assertive shift in counterterrorism policy. The attack in Pahalgam, widely seen as one of the most brutal assaults in recent times, has galvanized political and military leadership. The targeting of civilians in such a brazen manner has added urgency to India’s response planning. While the immediate diplomatic steps signal India’s disapproval of Pakistan’s alleged involvement, the military dimension is expected to play a crucial role in shaping the country’s response posture.

The fact that Prime Minister Modi has granted operational autonomy to the armed forces reflects a significant level of trust in military leadership. By allowing the services to determine the specifics of any retaliation—whether it be through targeted airstrikes, cross-border operations, or covert measures—the Prime Minister is signaling both flexibility and strength. The message is clear: India will not remain passive in the face of terrorism.

The continued firing incidents along the Line of Control further compound tensions in the region. These nightly exchanges of gunfire not only risk escalation but also jeopardize the lives of both soldiers and civilians living near the border. India’s response to these provocations has so far been “measured and effective,” as described by the Army. However, it remains to be seen how long restraint will prevail, especially if CFVs continue.

Meanwhile, intelligence agencies are working closely with military and paramilitary forces to identify the planners and perpetrators of the Pahalgam attack. Efforts are also being made to dismantle terror infrastructure and cut off logistical support within Kashmir and across the border. Defence sources confirmed that counter-terror operations are targeting identified sleeper cells and hideouts based on real-time intelligence inputs.

The participation of multiple security agencies in the Home Secretary’s meeting suggests an integrated approach to both border management and internal security. By bringing together leaders of paramilitary forces that operate across different terrains—from border outposts to urban centers—the government aims to ensure seamless coordination and readiness in the event of further threats.

Ultimately, the developments following the Pahalgam attack demonstrate a calibrated, multi-pronged approach by India. While diplomatic pressure is being exerted through international and bilateral channels, military preparedness has reached a heightened level. The decisions made in the coming days, including those emerging from the Cabinet Committee on Security, will likely determine the nature and intensity of India’s next steps.

What remains undeniable is the clarity of intent expressed by the Prime Minister. His statement, “complete operational freedom to decide on the mode, targets and timing of our response,” sets a strong precedent and leaves little ambiguity about India’s resolve to strike back. With tensions simmering along the LoC and security forces on high alert across the nation, the coming days will be crucial in defining both the immediate and long-term trajectory of India’s counter-terror strategy.

Canada’s Election Highlights Growing Regional Divides Across the Country

The recent Canadian election has underlined the widening rifts among the country’s different regions, with voting patterns showing stark contrasts in political preference. A shift in support from smaller parties toward the dominant Liberal and Conservative camps has defined the election outcome, suggesting that many voters have consolidated around the major political players amid an increasingly polarized environment.

In Western Canada, the majority of parliamentary seats have turned Conservative blue. The oil-producing provinces of Alberta and Saskatchewan have long harbored feelings of alienation from decision-makers in Ottawa. This sentiment was echoed by many voters in the region, who expressed frustration that the Liberal government appeared more concerned with U.S. affairs than with addressing domestic priorities. This ongoing discontent is so pronounced that it has even led to some voices calling for secession from the rest of Canada. The re-election of a Liberal government, which secured very few seats in these western provinces, could intensify those separatist sentiments.

The New Democratic Party (NDP), which has historical roots in Saskatchewan, has faced a significant electoral setback, marking its worst performance since 1993. Analysts and voters alike point to the party’s continued support for Prime Minister Justin Trudeau’s struggling administration as a key factor in this defeat. Furthermore, some individuals in Western Canada believe that potential NDP voters may have strategically cast their ballots for the Liberals in a bid to block a Conservative victory, thus weakening the NDP’s final tally.

Meanwhile, in Quebec, the long-standing debate over independence remains a potent undercurrent in the province’s political landscape. Despite this, voters in Quebec appear to have largely supported the Liberals, especially in light of hostile rhetoric from U.S. President Donald Trump. Many Quebecois, though traditionally open to discussions around sovereignty, seem to have opted for stability and national unity in the face of perceived external threats.

Émilie Foster, an adjunct professor of politics at Carleton University, told the BBC last week, “We prefer to be part of Canada instead of being part of the United States, if we have to choose.” Her statement reflects the provincial mood of choosing national solidarity over an uncertain future, particularly when considering geopolitical dynamics with the United States.

Despite these significant regional dynamics, the election campaign has done little to shed light on the pressing concerns of Canada’s Indigenous communities, especially those in the northern territories. While the national conversation has been heavily focused on topics related to Donald Trump and Canada’s positioning in the global landscape, northern Indigenous voters are grappling with immediate and longstanding challenges.

For many in Canada’s remote northern areas, the priority issues include access to nutritious food, clean drinking water, reliable transportation, and the development of essential infrastructure. These practical concerns, however, were largely absent from the mainstream election discourse, leaving northern voters uncertain about whether their communities’ needs will be prioritized in the new political term.

Although the major political parties were busy consolidating their power in the larger urban centers and affluent regions, the northern territories—home to many Indigenous populations—were left feeling disconnected from the national political narrative. Residents there continue to experience higher costs for basic goods, poor water quality in several communities, and inadequate infrastructure, such as roads and healthcare facilities.

While the Conservatives gained considerable ground in Western Canada, and the Liberals retained support in parts of Ontario and Quebec, the northern territories remained on the fringes of political engagement. This has led to skepticism among Indigenous leaders, who are now questioning whether the incoming government will finally prioritize meaningful action on these vital local concerns.

To summarize, the Canadian election results tell a story not just of shifting political allegiances but also of deeply entrenched regional disparities. In the west, feelings of exclusion and resentment continue to grow, potentially feeding separatist ideologies. In Quebec, historical calls for independence have been momentarily sidelined in favor of preserving national unity amid turbulent U.S.-Canada relations. Meanwhile, in the north, Indigenous communities remain worried that their everyday struggles will once again be overshadowed by broader political narratives that do not reflect their lived realities.

As Canadians look ahead to a new government, the question remains whether leaders in Ottawa will seriously engage with the country’s diverse regional voices—or continue to overlook them. The outcome of this election has made one thing clear: Canada is not one unified political entity, but a patchwork of regions, each with its own set of priorities, frustrations, and hopes for the future.

Majority of Americans Say Trump’s Policies Have Worsened Economy, CNN Poll Finds

A growing number of Americans believe that  President Donald Trump’s policies have negatively impacted the nation’s economy, according to a new CNN poll conducted by SSRS. The survey reveals that 59% of the public now thinks Trump’s economic approach has worsened conditions in the country, a noticeable increase from 51% in March. This figure matches the lowest approval numbers President Joe Biden received regarding his economic handling during his tenure.

The poll reflects widespread dissatisfaction with the state of the U.S. economy. There is little excitement among Americans for the White House’s sweeping new trade initiatives, with most respondents pessimistic about the direction things are headed. Although many of Trump’s recently announced tariffs are yet to be implemented, 60% of those surveyed already say his policies have raised the cost of living in their communities. Only 12% believe that Trump’s actions have actually helped reduce prices.

The findings further show that 69% of Americans believe an economic recession within the next year is at least somewhat likely. Of that group, 32% think a recession is very likely. In terms of general economic outlook, only 34% of Americans describe themselves as enthusiastic or optimistic, while 29% are pessimistic and 37% say they feel afraid. Among those under the age of 45, 70% express pessimism or fear. This sentiment is shared even more strongly among Americans of color, with 76% reporting similar concerns.

This increasing dissatisfaction marks a notable change for Trump, who during his first term was often credited with strong economic management. In fact, Trump’s 2024 campaign heavily emphasized economic recovery, with the promise to “immediately bring prices down, starting on Day One.” He was particularly successful with voters who ranked economic concerns as their primary motivation, according to CNN’s exit poll data.

One Republican respondent, a 59-year-old from Georgia, expressed his anxiety over the current market turbulence and how it has impacted his retirement plans. “Everything I worked for all my life is rapidly [disappearing],” he wrote. “It will probably take years to recover what I have lost due to what’s going on.”

Despite this, Republican sentiment regarding the economy has improved slightly over the past month. Many within the GOP remain hopeful that the newly announced tariffs will have a long-term positive effect on the economy.

However, most Americans remain skeptical about Trump’s tariff strategy. A 55% majority says his tariff actions so far this term have been poor policy, while just 28% view them positively. Another 17% consider them neither good nor bad. Tariffs imposed specifically on Chinese imports are viewed a bit more favorably, though still mostly negatively: 53% say they are bad policy and 32% consider them good.

The poll was conducted between April 17 and April 24, shortly after the White House first announced a wave of new tariffs targeting dozens of countries, only to pause many of them shortly thereafter. During the survey period, the administration issued multiple contradictory statements about the state of international trade talks and the intended goals of the tariff plan. Overall, 58% of respondents say they do not believe Trump has a clear strategy for introducing and managing tariffs, while 42% believe he does.

Most Americans predict the tariffs will harm the economy in the short term. Specifically, 72% expect negative consequences for the U.S. economy, 60% foresee damage to the country’s global standing, and 59% believe their personal finances will be adversely affected. Fewer than 30% expect the tariffs to help in any of these areas.

Looking at the long-term picture, 53% think the tariffs will ultimately hurt the U.S. economy, compared to 34% who believe they will be beneficial. This view reflects a cautious optimism among some Republicans, who believe the initial damage could eventually lead to gains. Among GOP respondents, 47% think the tariffs will hurt the economy in the near future, but roughly three-quarters anticipate eventual benefits.

John Metcalf, a Democrat from Michigan, expressed concern about the unpredictability of Trump’s tariff policy. “I’m not an economics guy, but I can kind of see with what he’s doing with tariffs,” he said. “It’s just causing confusion. If you are a business owner and you’re thinking about the future, how in the world can you make decisions when he flips back and forth every other day?”

Public perception of the broader economy continues to be bleak. Only 28% describe current economic conditions as good, while 71% say they are poor. These numbers have remained virtually unchanged since fall 2023. Meanwhile, 47% of Americans are satisfied with their personal finances, which also shows little movement over recent years.

Underneath these stable numbers, there is growing partisan division. The percentage of Republicans who call the economy good has increased by 10 points since March, whereas Democratic approval has continued to decline. Republicans are now over ten times more likely than Democrats to say they are enthusiastic or optimistic about the economy.

Nonetheless, signs of discontent are emerging within the GOP. While 94% of Republicans say they trust Trump to manage the economy, only 63% believe his policies have improved conditions, and just 23% credit him with lowering living costs in their communities. Nearly as many Republicans think his tariff policies will hurt their personal finances (28%) as those who believe they will help (33%).

A Republican respondent from New Jersey observed, “The prices for energy, medical services, higher education, repair and maintenance continue to [rise]. I think that Pres. Trump’s program will help once they are given a chance.”

When asked to name their family’s biggest economic challenge, most Americans cite costs and inflation. That includes 28% who specifically mention inflation, 15% the overall cost of living, and 16% food prices. Those figures are largely unchanged from June 2024. However, some newer concerns are emerging: 9% cite tariffs, 7% mention investment or stock market worries, and 4% each say Trump’s policies and general economic uncertainty.

One Democrat from Pennsylvania wrote, “My wife lost her job due to the Trump administration DOGE cuts. We are suddenly down an income with costs rising all around us. My own job is at risk due to NIH grant cuts. Our retirement accounts are plummeting in value. Everything is just so, so much worse than it was before Trump took office.”

Among working Americans, half believe Trump’s tariff plans will hurt their industries, while just 11% say the impact will be beneficial. A respondent from Massachusetts explained, “I make board games and they can’t be made in the US. I have preorders I need to fulfill but can’t afford to with the tariffs. The profit I would have gotten from sales would have allowed my business to grow into a studio, hire people, etc. Now I will lose money.”

Even as the Trump administration promotes tariffs as a strategy to create new manufacturing jobs in the U.S., the public remains unconvinced. By a margin of 73% to 26%, Americans say they would personally prefer an office job to a manufacturing job with equal pay. Men are slightly more inclined toward manufacturing work, with 37% expressing that preference, which rises to 43% among Republican men.

The CNN poll surveyed 1,678 adults nationwide using online and telephone interviews. Conducted between April 17 and 24, the sample was drawn from a mix of probability-based online panels and registration-based sources. Initial contact was made via mail, phone, or email. The margin of error for the full sample is plus or minus 2.9 percentage points.

Padma Awards 2025: Stars Shine as President Honours India’s Leading Artists

The Padma Awards 2025 ceremony took place on Monday at the Rashtrapati Bhavan in New Delhi, where several notable personalities from the fields of arts and music were honoured by President Droupadi Murmu. Among the prominent recipients were actors Nandamuri Balakrishna and Ajith Kumar, filmmaker Shekhar Kapur, singers Arijit Singh and Ricky Kej, and the late ghazal maestro Pankaj Udhas, who was honoured posthumously.

The annual Padma Awards, one of India’s highest civilian honours, recognize exceptional achievements in various fields. The ceremony this year was marked by the presence of celebrities from across India, each receiving their award for their outstanding contribution to their respective domains. These awards are traditionally given in three categories: Padma Vibhushan, Padma Bhushan, and Padma Shri, with Padma Bhushan and Padma Shri recipients taking the spotlight during the 2025 ceremony.

Nandamuri Balakrishna, a veteran actor and politician from Andhra Pradesh, received the Padma Bhushan. He appeared at the ceremony wearing traditional attire representing his home state, showcasing pride in his cultural roots. His recognition by the Indian government acknowledges his long-standing contribution to the Telugu film industry and public life.

Actor Ajith Kumar also received the Padma Bhushan for his contributions to Indian cinema. Known for his work in Tamil films, Ajith made a distinguished appearance at the event dressed in a formal suit. In January, upon the announcement of his award, Ajith shared a heartfelt statement expressing his gratitude. “I am deeply humbled and honoured to receive the esteemed Padma Award by the President of India. I extend my heartfelt gratitude to the Hon’ble President of India, Smt. Droupadi Murmu and the Honourable Prime Minister, Shri Narendra Modi for this prestigious honour. It is a privilege to be recognized at such a level and I am truly grateful for this generous acknowledgment of my contributions to our nation.”

Shekhar Kapur, an internationally acclaimed filmmaker, was another Padma Bhushan awardee. He has directed landmark films such as Bandit Queen and Elizabeth, the latter earning several Academy Award nominations. In response to being selected for the honour, Shekhar had expressed his appreciation on X (formerly Twitter): “What an honour! Am humbled that the Government of India has considered me to be deserving of a #Padmanbhushan. Hopefully this award will make me strive harder to serve the Industry that I am part of, and the beautiful Nation that I am so fortunate to belong to. Thank you also to our film audiences of India, for I am because you are.”

Renowned classical dancer and actress Shobhana also received the Padma Bhushan for her contributions to Indian classical dance and cinema. Her work in promoting Bharatanatyam and Indian performing arts globally was acknowledged through this honour.

A special moment of the evening came when Pankaj Udhas, the iconic ghazal singer who passed away earlier this year, was honoured posthumously. His wife received the award on his behalf, a moving tribute to a man whose music had touched the hearts of millions. Udhas had been a defining voice in Indian music for decades and remains beloved for classics like Chitthi Aayi Hai and Jeeye To Jeeye Kaise.

Meanwhile, the Padma Shri, the fourth-highest civilian award in India, was bestowed upon Arijit Singh and Ricky Kej. Arijit Singh, often regarded as one of the most successful and versatile singers in contemporary Indian music, was recognized for his influence on the Indian playback music scene. His emotive voice and chart-topping songs across multiple Indian languages have made him a household name.

Ricky Kej, a Grammy-winning composer and environmentalist, was also among the Padma Shri recipients. His music often focuses on environmental issues and cross-cultural collaborations. His recognition underlines the increasing appreciation for artists who contribute to both art and global awareness.

The 2025 ceremony was streamed live on YouTube, enabling people across the country and around the world to watch the prestigious event in real time. This inclusion of a broader digital audience added to the accessibility and reach of the event, making it a moment of national pride shared collectively.

In addition to these well-known personalities, the awards were also given to several individuals from various other fields such as sports, medicine, science, literature, social work, and industry. Each year, the Padma Awards aim to honour a diverse group of achievers, and 2025 continued this tradition of inclusivity and excellence.

The ceremony not only celebrated achievements but also served as a reminder of the importance of cultural, artistic, and intellectual contributions in shaping the identity and progress of the nation. President Droupadi Murmu, in her role as the country’s ceremonial head, presented the awards with grace and dignity, upholding the significance of civilian honours in India.

As the recipients walked up to receive their awards, there was a palpable sense of emotion and pride—both from those being honoured and the audience witnessing the recognition of years of dedication. The atmosphere at Rashtrapati Bhavan was one of celebration, reverence, and inspiration.

The event reaffirmed the role of the Padma Awards in recognizing both popular and unsung heroes whose work enriches Indian society. While artists like Arijit Singh and Ajith Kumar are beloved by millions, the inclusion of figures like Ricky Kej and Shekhar Kapur highlighted the growing space for diverse forms of creativity and international acclaim within India’s honour system.

In summary, the Padma Awards 2025 brought together a constellation of celebrated Indian personalities who have contributed significantly to the country’s cultural and artistic landscape. With poignant moments like the posthumous recognition of Pankaj Udhas and the heartfelt responses from recipients like Ajith Kumar and Shekhar Kapur, the ceremony served not only as an awards function but also as a powerful tribute to India’s enduring talent and spirit.

Bill Gates Warns AI Will Replace Jobs but Insists It’s Ultimately a Good Thing

Bill Gates is making it clear: artificial intelligence is going to reshape the job market—and not just for blue-collar workers.

On a recent episode of the People by WTF podcast, the Microsoft co-founder outlined a future where AI tools take over some of the most crucial professions in America, including those in education and healthcare.

However, instead of raising concerns, Gates emphasized that this development will bring positive changes, even though millions of workers may soon face major shifts.

“We’ve always had a shortage of doctors, teachers, of people to work in the factories. Those shortages won’t exist,” Gates told podcast host Nikhil Kamath. “AI will come in and provide medical IQ, and there won’t be a shortage.”

Gates also discussed this transition during an appearance on The Tonight Show with Jimmy Fallon.

“Will we still need humans?” Fallon asked him. Gates responded bluntly, “Not for most things.”

This raises a pressing question: what does this mean for American workers?

When discussing which jobs could be affected, Gates focused on two sectors already facing significant pressure: teaching and healthcare. Both industries have long dealt with staffing shortages, particularly in rural regions across the United States.

Gates believes that AI can either fill these gaps or at least ease some of the strain. In the education sector, AI-powered tutoring tools are already undergoing testing, providing customized support for students in reading and mathematics, according to Government Technology.

In the healthcare arena, companies like Suki, Zephyr AI, and Tennr are helping doctors by generating clinical decision support tools. These technologies assist medical professionals in making quicker and more accurate diagnoses, Business Insider reported.

“Years from now, AI will have changed things enough that just this pure capitalistic framework probably won’t explain much, because as AIs, both as sort of white-collar type work and as blue-collar workers, the robots will get good hands and are able to do the physical things that humans do,” Gates told Kamath. “We will have created, you know, free intelligence.”

And it is not just limited to teachers and doctors. Many other sectors are starting to feel the growing influence of AI.

Apart from the industries Gates mentioned, such as construction, cleaning services, and factory work, AI has already made inroads into customer service and IT support.

For example, AI chatbots—although with mixed results—have largely taken over initial responses for online product support. In some cases, AI acts as a helpful assistant that increases worker productivity. But for others, it could mean complete job replacement. Gates does not deny this possibility. Instead, he argues that the overall trade-off might still be worthwhile.

Gates envisions a future where AI takes on the routine tasks, freeing people up to pursue more leisure activities. He imagines a world where the traditional 40-hour workweek shrinks and people enjoy better work-life balance. Nevertheless, not everyone shares Gates’ optimistic outlook.

A recent United Nations report warned that AI could impact around 40% of jobs globally, bringing heightened fears about automation and mass job loss.

“The benefits of AI-driven automation often favour capital over labour, which could widen inequality and reduce the competitive advantage of low-cost labour in developing economies,” the UN report stated.

While the AI industry is projected to soar to a $4.8 trillion market, the United Nations warns that the economic benefits could be “highly concentrated” among a small group rather than widely shared.

There are other concerns as well. According to UN Women, AI tools have demonstrated tendencies to reproduce racial and gender biases, especially in hiring and healthcare. These biases could deepen existing inequalities rather than alleviate them.

Meanwhile, as consumers hunt for better deals, OfficialCarInsurance.com offers the ability to compare quotes from well-known companies like Progressive, Allstate, and GEICO. Customers can reportedly find lower auto insurance rates by answering a few questions about themselves and their vehicles, sometimes securing offers as low as $29 a month.

Returning to the topic of AI and jobs, the question remains: what should workers do to prepare?

Gates is not alone in predicting the rise of AI. However, he is among the few tech leaders who remain largely hopeful about its impact. If his predictions come true, workers may need to adapt quickly.

This could mean honing skills that complement AI instead of competing with it. Abilities like critical thinking, emotional intelligence, and creativity are areas where human workers currently have the upper hand—at least for the time being.

It is also a crucial time for policymakers to get ahead of the curve. The transition to an AI-driven economy could be turbulent, but with thoughtful regulations and safeguards, it could lead to a more efficient and smarter economic system.

Ultimately, Gates is betting that society will adjust in a way that allows everyone to benefit.

Employment Growth Outpaces Population Increase, Female Workforce Participation Rises: World Bank Report

According to a recent World Bank report, employment in the country has expanded at a quicker rate than the working-age population since the 2021-22 fiscal year. One of the most notable aspects of this development is the increase in the number of women joining the workforce, signaling a positive shift in employment dynamics.

“Employment growth has outpaced the working-age population since 2021-22. Employment rates, especially among women, are rising, and urban unemployment fell to 6.6 per cent in Q1 FY24/25, the lowest since 2017-18,” the World Bank report stated. This surge in employment rates, particularly among women, represents a crucial advancement for the economy, showing both increased job opportunities and better workforce participation among previously underrepresented groups.

The report further pointed out a significant drop in urban unemployment levels. During the first quarter of the 2024-25 fiscal year, the urban unemployment rate fell to 6.6 percent, marking the lowest figure recorded since 2017-18. This decrease in urban unemployment suggests an overall strengthening of the urban job market, with more individuals securing employment compared to previous years.

Another major trend highlighted in the report is the shifting patterns of worker migration. For the first time since the 2018-19 financial year, a noticeable number of men are migrating from rural areas to urban centers in search of better employment opportunities. This shift indicates a growing demand for urban jobs and perhaps better economic prospects in cities compared to rural regions.

Simultaneously, the report observed an increase in rural women taking up employment, particularly within the agriculture sector. More rural women are now entering the workforce through agricultural jobs, pointing to an important change in traditional employment patterns across India. This development could have broad implications for rural economies and gender roles in agricultural work.

Despite these positive trends, the report also flagged some ongoing concerns. Youth unemployment remains a significant challenge, standing at 13.3 percent. The situation is even more concerning for those who have completed higher education, as 29 percent of them are still seeking employment opportunities. This highlights a persistent mismatch between educational attainment and job availability or suitability, creating barriers for young, educated individuals trying to enter the workforce.

The World Bank report stated, “Only 23 per cent of non-farm paid jobs are formal, and most agricultural employment remains informal.” This lack of formal employment opportunities indicates that many workers still do not have access to stable jobs with benefits such as health insurance, pension plans, and job security. Informal employment continues to dominate both the agricultural sector and the non-farm labor market, presenting a major challenge for labor market reforms and the overall economy.

Additionally, the report noted a significant rise in self-employment, particularly among rural workers and women. A growing number of individuals are choosing to become self-employed rather than working in traditional wage-paying jobs. This shift towards self-employment could be seen as a sign of entrepreneurial spirit but might also reflect a scarcity of formal job opportunities, forcing many to create their own means of livelihood.

While the improvement in female workforce participation is encouraging, the report pointed out that substantial gender disparities persist. The female employment rate has now reached 31 percent, a noteworthy milestone. However, there remains a wide gap between men and women in paid employment. As the report emphasized, “Despite a female employment rate of 31 per cent, gender disparities remain, with 234 million more men in paid work.”

This significant gap underscores the challenges still facing women in the labor market, including access to quality jobs, fair wages, and career advancement opportunities. Bridging this divide will require focused policy interventions and societal changes to ensure that women can participate equally in the economy.

Turning its focus to poverty, the World Bank report examined the distribution of extreme poverty across India’s most populous states. In the year 2011-12, five states–Uttar Pradesh, Maharashtra, Bihar, West Bengal, and Madhya Pradesh–accounted for 65 percent of India’s extremely poor population. These states have historically struggled with higher poverty rates due to a combination of factors such as lower industrialization, poor infrastructure, and limited access to quality education and healthcare.

Over time, these states have made notable contributions toward reducing poverty levels. However, the report revealed that as of 2022-23, these same five states still housed a significant portion of the country’s poor population. Specifically, they accounted for 54 percent of India’s extreme poor and 51 percent of the multidimensional poor. Multidimensional poverty considers various factors beyond income, including education, health, and living standards, giving a more comprehensive view of poverty.

These findings indicate that while progress has been made in reducing poverty, major challenges remain, particularly in the most populous regions. The concentration of poverty in a few states suggests the need for targeted poverty alleviation programs and greater investments in human capital development in these areas.

The World Bank report paints a complex picture of India’s labor and poverty landscape. On the one hand, there are clear signs of progress: employment is growing faster than the working-age population, more women are participating in the workforce, urban unemployment has reached a historic low, and migration trends suggest new economic opportunities are emerging. On the other hand, significant obstacles persist, including youth unemployment, high rates of informal employment, stark gender disparities, and the continued concentration of poverty in certain states.

Addressing these challenges will require comprehensive policy efforts focused on creating more formal employment opportunities, especially for young people and women. Initiatives aimed at skill development, education reform, support for entrepreneurship, and gender equality in the workplace could help bridge the existing gaps.

Moreover, efforts to reduce poverty must go beyond short-term welfare schemes and aim for long-term solutions such as improving access to quality education, healthcare, and sustainable livelihood opportunities. Special attention must be given to the most affected states to ensure that progress is both inclusive and widespread.

The findings of the World Bank report highlight that while India has made considerable strides in improving its employment landscape and reducing poverty, there is still much work to be done to ensure equitable growth and opportunity for all citizens. The progress achieved so far lays a strong foundation, but sustained effort and targeted policy interventions are critical to overcoming the remaining barriers and achieving inclusive economic growth.

Stocks Rebound as Tech Giants Lead Rally Amid Tariff Talk Optimism

After opening the week with a steep drop, the stock market staged a strong recovery on Tuesday. The S&P 500 surged by 2.5%, led by solid gains in major technology companies including Apple, Amazon, and Meta. This turnaround helped recoup most of the earlier losses and renewed investor confidence following a turbulent start to the week.

One of the key factors driving Tuesday’s rally was a behind-closed-doors investor summit hosted by J.P. Morgan in Washington, D.C., where Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent addressed attendees. According to a Bloomberg report that broke midday, Bessent indicated optimism about the U.S.-China tariff conflict. He reportedly suggested that he anticipated a de-escalation in the situation, describing the ongoing standoff as “unsustainable.” His remarks struck a hopeful chord with investors who have been rattled by market volatility in recent weeks.

Following the Bloomberg release, investors reacted quickly. Stock prices, which had been gradually rising throughout the morning, spiked after the news, driven by hope that tensions with China might ease and bring stability to global trade.

Meanwhile, the U.S. dollar, which usually sees increased demand during times of uncertainty as investors flee to safer assets, has not performed as expected. Amid President Trump’s ongoing tariff battles, the dollar has actually weakened against other currencies. The shifting and unpredictable nature of U.S. trade policy has caused concern in the markets. While the dollar managed to find some footing on Tuesday thanks to the broader stock market rebound, sentiment remains fragile. According to Bank of America’s most recent Global Fund Manager Survey, 61% of respondents believe the dollar is likely to decline in value over the coming year.

At the same time, alternative assets continued to see strong momentum. Bitcoin, often touted as a hedge against traditional, government-backed financial systems, crossed $90,000 on Tuesday for the first time in more than a month. This marked a significant milestone for the cryptocurrency, and some analysts believe it may be breaking away from traditional equity market patterns. Gold also saw a spike, reflecting continued investor concern about market instability. The precious metal, historically considered a safe haven in times of economic turbulence, briefly climbed above $3,500 an ounce on Tuesday for the first time.

Despite Tuesday’s market rebound, several troubling signals remain. One ongoing concern is President Trump’s continuing threats to remove Federal Reserve Chair Jerome Powell. This has cast a shadow over investor confidence, as any abrupt change in Fed leadership could have far-reaching consequences for monetary policy.

In addition, Bank of America Securities issued a report on Monday revising its global economic growth forecast downward. The firm trimmed its projection by 0.3%, pointing directly to the Trump administration’s erratic tariff policy as a contributing factor. “We expect a significant slowdown but not a recession,” the report stated, estimating the chances of a recession at 35%.

The Trump administration, however, is still promoting a narrative of nearing success in international trade negotiations. Officials have highlighted ongoing discussions with countries like Japan and India as evidence that deals are in the pipeline. Yet, new reporting by Politico casts doubt on the scale of these potential agreements. Rather than comprehensive trade deals, Politico revealed that the resulting documents might be limited to “memorandums of understanding,” with full negotiations stretching out for months to come.

As companies continue to report first-quarter earnings, further volatility in the markets is expected. Tesla, the electric vehicle company headed by Elon Musk, released its quarterly financial results on Tuesday evening. This came after a rough month for the company’s stock, which has fallen by nearly 15%. The results revealed a steep drop in net income, which fell by 71% in the first quarter. Analysts cited increasing competition from foreign automakers and ongoing questions about Musk’s leadership role as contributing factors to the poor financial performance.

Investors remain on edge, grappling with the implications of Trump’s unpredictable economic maneuvers, a potentially weakening dollar, and signs of slowing global growth. Although Tuesday’s market surge provided a welcome break from a stretch of losses, the broader outlook remains clouded by uncertainty and caution.

The response to Treasury Secretary Bessent’s remarks suggests that markets are still highly reactive to any signal of relief from geopolitical and trade-related pressures. His statement, in which he called the trade standoff with China “unsustainable” and said he expected it to ease, was enough to inject optimism and spark a rapid rally. Yet, this optimism rests on fragile ground, as fundamental challenges in global trade and economic policy remain unresolved.

Moreover, while alternative assets such as Bitcoin and gold are gaining traction as hedges, they also highlight a deep unease among investors. The surge in these assets indicates a search for security outside traditional markets, reflecting a growing lack of faith in conventional economic indicators.

The broader implications of Tuesday’s market rebound remain to be seen. It served as a momentary breather from the relentless downward pressure of recent weeks, but most analysts agree that the underlying conditions—geopolitical instability, policy uncertainty, and volatile corporate earnings—are far from resolved.

Adding to the unease is the continued tension surrounding the Federal Reserve. Trump’s persistent criticism of Chair Jerome Powell and suggestions that he may seek his removal have raised alarms in both political and financial circles. Such an action would be unprecedented and could disrupt the Fed’s independence, a cornerstone of its credibility and effectiveness.

Overall, while Tuesday’s events offered a momentary surge in investor sentiment, the market still faces a challenging road ahead. The sharp rise in stock prices, driven by a few encouraging comments and gains in tech stocks, stands in contrast to the broader landscape of economic instability and uncertain policymaking.

With trade talks dragging on and concrete agreements still out of reach, optimism may continue to fluctuate. Meanwhile, companies like Tesla underscore the real-world effects of this uncertainty, with earnings being squeezed by competition and the unpredictability of leadership.

Tuesday’s gains may be a sign that investors are eager for hope—but the fundamentals that sparked the recent selloff are still in play. Until there is more clarity on trade, the economy, and monetary policy, volatility is likely to persist.

Deadliest Kashmir Attack Since 2019 Triggers Political and Military Ripples Across India and Pakistan

The militant assault that left at least 26 tourists dead in Pahalgam on Tuesday has emerged as the bloodiest attack in Indian-administered Kashmir since 2019. Unlike previous attacks primarily aimed at security forces, this one targeted innocent civilians vacationing in one of India’s most scenic regions. The brutality and symbolism of this strike go beyond the death toll—it marks a direct hit on the fragile image of peace and normalcy that India has worked to promote in the disputed territory.

The attack’s timing and location are significant. Pahalgam, known for its tranquil beauty and appeal to tourists, became the scene of a violent ambush that not only killed civilians but also shattered public confidence. For many analysts, the event highlights how volatile the situation remains in Kashmir, a region claimed in full by both India and Pakistan, yet governed in parts by each.

India’s reaction was swift. In a show of political and diplomatic muscle, Delhi responded by shutting down the main border crossing, suspending a crucial water-sharing agreement, and expelling Pakistani diplomats. More importantly, Indian Defence Minister Rajnath Singh assured the nation of a strong response, pledging action against not only the perpetrators but also those orchestrating such “nefarious acts” from behind the scenes.

Analysts largely agree that some form of military retaliation is all but certain. What remains uncertain is the scale, method, and consequences of such a response. “We are likely to see a strong response – one that signals resolve to both domestic audiences and actors in Pakistan. Since 2016 and especially after 2019, the threshold for retaliation has been set at cross-border or air strikes,” said military historian Srinath Raghavan to the BBC. “It’ll be hard for the government to act below that now. Pakistan will likely respond, as it did before. The risk, as always, is miscalculation – on both sides.”

Raghavan was referencing India’s significant retaliatory actions in 2016 and 2019. After 19 Indian soldiers were killed in the 2016 Uri attack, India conducted what it termed “surgical strikes” across the Line of Control (LoC), targeting militant bases in Pakistan-administered Kashmir. In 2019, the deadly Pulwama attack, which killed more than 40 paramilitary personnel, prompted Indian airstrikes on an alleged terrorist training camp in Balakot, marking India’s first air incursion deep into Pakistan since 1971. Pakistan retaliated with air raids, and the two nations briefly engaged in an aerial dogfight, resulting in the capture of an Indian pilot. While both sides demonstrated their military strength, they ultimately avoided a full-scale war.

Following these high-tension moments, a ceasefire agreement along the LoC was reached in 2021, which has largely held despite sporadic militant violence in Indian-administered Kashmir. But the recent attack, given its high casualty count and targeting of civilians, could test that uneasy truce.

Michael Kugelman, a foreign policy expert, stated that this incident could provoke a military response from India, especially if any degree of Pakistani involvement—real or perceived—is found. “The chief advantage of such a reaction for India would be political, as there will be strong public pressure for India to respond forcefully,” Kugelman told the BBC. “Another advantage, if a retaliation successfully takes out terrorist targets, would be restoring deterrence and degrading an anti-India threat. The disadvantage is that a retaliation would risk a serious crisis and even conflict.”

When it comes to India’s options, covert operations provide plausible deniability but may not satisfy the domestic political need to assertively reestablish deterrence, says Christopher Clary of the University at Albany. Clary identifies two primary avenues India could pursue. One is a resumption of cross-border firing, signaling the possible breakdown of the 2021 ceasefire. The other is more dramatic: airstrikes or even cruise missile attacks akin to the 2019 Balakot action.

“No path is without risks. The US is also distracted and may not be willing or be able to assist with crisis management,” Clary told the BBC, pointing to the broader geopolitical implications.

The nuclear dimension of India-Pakistan relations cannot be ignored. Both countries possess nuclear weapons, a factor that exerts a restraining influence on escalation but simultaneously increases the stakes of any miscalculation. “Nuclear weapons are both a danger and a restraint—they force decision-makers on both sides to act with caution. Any response is likely to be presented as precise and targeted. Pakistan may retaliate in kind, then look for an off-ramp,” Raghavan observed.

He drew parallels with recent conflicts such as those between Israel and Iran, where limited strikes were followed by attempts at de-escalation. However, he cautioned that such scenarios are inherently risky. “The risk is always that things won’t go according to script.”

Kugelman, reflecting on the 2019 Pulwama episode, noted, “Each country is comfortable using limited counter retaliation.” But he warned that India must carefully balance the political and strategic gains of a retaliatory move with the possibility of a deeper and more destructive conflict.

Hussain Haqqani, a former Pakistani ambassador to the US, echoed similar thoughts. He suggested that India may consider another round of limited “surgical strikes” similar to those in 2016. “The advantage of such strikes from India’s point of view is they are limited in scope, so Pakistan does not have to respond, and yet they demonstrate to the Indian public that India has acted,” Haqqani said in an interview with the BBC.

However, he also pointed out the risks of such a strategy. “Such strikes can also invite retaliation from Pakistan, which argues that it is being blamed in a knee-jerk reaction, without any investigation or evidence.”

Whatever course India chooses in response to this tragedy, the path forward remains treacherous. Any action may spiral into further violence, pushing the already tenuous peace in the region even farther out of reach. At the same time, India must grapple with internal questions about how such an attack could occur in what is considered one of the most secure and monitored areas.

“That such an attack occurred at the peak of tourist season,” Raghavan noted, “points to a serious lapse—especially in a Union Territory where the federal government directly controls law and order.”

As tension rises and decisions loom, both nations are left navigating a perilous landscape where every move could have profound consequences—not only for regional stability but also for the lives of millions caught in the crossfire.

Terror Attack in Pahalgam Leaves 28 Dead, Mostly Tourists, as India Grapples with Aftermath

Srinagar: In what is being described as one of the most lethal terrorist assaults in Kashmir in recent years, at least 28 civilians, many of whom were tourists, lost their lives and several others were injured when gunmen opened fire indiscriminately in Baisaran Valley near Pahalgam, located in the southern district of Anantnag.

Among those killed in the attack were two foreign nationals and two local residents, according to police sources. However, the identities of the victims have not been officially disclosed as authorities work to confirm the details.

Eyewitnesses at the scene recounted harrowing moments of sudden violence and confusion. According to one witness, “We heard sudden gunshots, and people started screaming and running for cover. It all happened very quickly.” The attackers, reportedly dressed in military-style uniforms, emerged unexpectedly and unleashed automatic gunfire on a group of visiting tourists, creating widespread panic and chaos.

Jammu and Kashmir’s Chief Minister Omar Abdullah characterized the incident as a “gruesome and calculated massacre.” He acknowledged the sheer scale of the assault, stating that it was “much larger than anything we’ve seen directed at civilians in recent years.” While the exact number of casualties is still being verified, the state government has committed to releasing the official figures soon.

The Resistance Front (TRF), an outfit believed to be affiliated with the Pakistan-based terrorist organization Lashkar-e-Taiba (LeT), has reportedly claimed responsibility for the attack. Intelligence officials believe the militants may have crossed over from the Kishtwar region in Jammu and traveled through Kokernag in South Kashmir before reaching Baisaran. The route they took suggests a high level of planning and coordination.

Immediately after the shooting, security forces initiated an extensive search operation in the dense forests surrounding the Baisaran Valley. High-ranking officers from both the police and the army’s counter-terrorism units arrived at the location to lead rescue efforts and oversee the evacuation of survivors.

The attack has struck a particularly sensitive nerve as it occurred just ten weeks ahead of the annual Amarnath Yatra, a major Hindu pilgrimage that attracts thousands of devotees each year. Pahalgam, where the deadly assault took place, functions as one of the key base camps for the pilgrimage. Authorities believe the choice of location and timing—during the spring tourist season—was a strategic move aimed at destabilizing the Kashmir Valley and frightening potential visitors.

In the immediate aftermath, numerous travel agencies reported a spike in cancellations, reflecting the nationwide shock and fear that the attack has generated. The violent incident has sent tremors across the country and renewed concerns over the security situation in Jammu and Kashmir.

Prime Minister Narendra Modi, who is currently on an official visit to Saudi Arabia, condemned the incident in the strongest terms. He promised that the perpetrators would face justice and reaffirmed India’s determination to continue fighting terrorism. “I strongly condemn the terror attack in Pahalgam, Jammu and Kashmir. Condolences to those who have lost their loved ones. I pray that the injured recover at the earliest. All possible assistance is being provided to those affected. Those behind this heinous act will be brought to justice… they will not be spared! Their evil agenda will never succeed. Our resolve to fight terrorism is unshakable, and it will get even stronger,” he posted on X.

Lieutenant Governor Manoj Sinha also expressed outrage over the attack and offered assurances that those responsible would be held accountable. In a message posted on X, he stated, “Spoke to the DGP & Security officials. Army and J&K Police teams have rushed to the area and launched search operations.” His post aimed to reassure the public that swift action was being taken.

People’s Democratic Party (PDP) president and former chief minister Mehbooba Mufti also voiced strong condemnation of the violence. She described the attack as cowardly and unacceptable. “I strongly condemn the cowardly attack on tourists in Pahalgam, which tragically killed one and injured several. Such violence is unacceptable and must be denounced,” she wrote on X.

The broader implications of this attack are likely to resonate for some time. With Kashmir’s tourism industry still recovering from years of conflict and uncertainty, this latest act of violence threatens to undermine those fragile gains. The region, known for its breathtaking landscapes and cultural richness, had recently begun to see a revival in tourism, which many hoped would lead to long-term economic and social stability.

Security analysts note that targeting civilians, especially tourists, is a tactic aimed at achieving maximum psychological impact. By instilling fear and disrupting the normal rhythm of life, terrorist groups attempt to create an environment of instability and insecurity. This assault, they argue, fits within that broader strategy and must be countered with both tactical operations and a strategic overhaul of security planning in sensitive regions.

As the search for the attackers continues, security forces remain on high alert across the Valley, particularly in areas connected to the upcoming Amarnath pilgrimage. Enhanced surveillance, stricter checkpoints, and intelligence coordination are being prioritized to prevent any follow-up attacks.

Meanwhile, grieving families and a shocked nation are left to mourn the loss of innocent lives. The hope among many is that the response to this tragedy will be both swift and effective—not only in apprehending the culprits but in addressing the broader security gaps that allowed such an attack to take place.

Authorities have urged citizens and tourists to remain vigilant but not to succumb to fear. Efforts are underway to restore confidence through visible security presence and ongoing communication from local officials. However, the wounds of this tragedy will take time to heal, and its shadow may linger over the region’s fragile peace for months to come.

Pope Francis’ Legacy Looms Large Over Upcoming Conclave as Cardinals Prepare to Elect New Pontiff

With the passing of Pope Francis on April 21 at the age of 88, over a billion Catholics around the world are grieving the loss of a leader who deeply influenced the Church for over a decade. As mourning continues, cardinals from every corner of the globe are preparing to journey to Rome for the traditional process of selecting a new leader of the Roman Catholic Church.

This upcoming election, which will take place within the sacred halls of the Vatican in the coming weeks, will be significantly shaped by the influence of Pope Francis himself. Despite his passing, Francis is poised to have an unusually strong impact on the conclave’s outcome due to the high number of cardinals he personally appointed during his 12-year tenure.

Unlike some of his predecessors, Francis took care to populate the College of Cardinals with clergy who aligned with his vision for the Church. Specifically, he ensured that the vast majority of cardinals eligible to vote in the conclave — those under the age of 80 — were of his choosing. This became particularly decisive in September 2023, when he officially crossed a key threshold. By that time, Francis had appointed over two-thirds of the conclave’s voting members, the minimum proportion needed to elect a new pope under current ecclesiastical law.

According to data compiled by Religion News Service, as of April 21, there are 135 cardinals who are under 80 and therefore eligible to vote in the papal election. Of those, a staggering 108 — or 80% — were selected by Pope Francis himself. In contrast, 16.3% were appointed by Pope Benedict, while only 3.7% were selected by Pope John Paul II. This overwhelming majority places Francis in a historically powerful position posthumously, with his appointments likely to steer the direction of the next papacy.

To put this in perspective, when Francis was elected to the papacy in 2013, the makeup of the electorate looked quite different. At that time, 57.9% of voting cardinals had been appointed by Pope Benedict, who had just stepped down from the papacy. Meanwhile, 42.1% of the cardinals in that conclave had been appointed by Pope John Paul II. These numbers underscore the extent to which Francis has reshaped the College of Cardinals during his time as pope.

Beyond just the numerical dominance, Francis’ influence is also evident in the evolving demographic and geographic composition of the College of Cardinals. The group set to elect the next pope is more globally representative than ever before. In 2013, Italian cardinals made up almost 25% of the conclave. That share has now dropped to just 12.6%, marking a significant shift away from longstanding Italian dominance in papal elections.

Meanwhile, the representation from Asia has grown significantly. Back in 2013, Asian cardinals accounted for just 8.8% of the conclave. Today, that number has nearly doubled, reaching 17%. The presence of African cardinals has also expanded from 8.8% to 13.3%, reflecting a broader trend of greater inclusion from traditionally underrepresented regions.

Europe’s overall share in the conclave has seen only a slight dip. In 2013, European cardinals made up about 28% of the voting body, and today they comprise roughly 26.7%. North America, on the other hand, has seen its influence wane slightly, with its share falling from 17.5% to 14.1%. South America, the continent from which Pope Francis hailed, has seen a modest increase in its representation, growing from 11.4% to 13.3% over the course of his papacy.

The implications of these demographic changes for the upcoming vote remain uncertain. Pope Francis’ time in office was defined by his commitment to issues such as poverty, the rights of immigrants, and environmental sustainability. He often chose cardinals who shared his pastoral priorities and global outlook. However, predicting how these cardinals will vote is not always straightforward. Cardinals aren’t the same as members of Congress with specific party loyalties, and voting outcomes can sometimes be difficult to predict.

The conclave itself is a deeply spiritual process, carried out in secrecy and guided by centuries of tradition. While Pope Francis’ appointments may lean toward a particular vision of Church leadership, individual cardinals often approach the election with a personal sense of discernment rather than ideological alignment. Furthermore, conclaves have historically been subject to unexpected developments and last-minute shifts, which could still alter the makeup of the electorate slightly before voting begins.

Nevertheless, barring any unforeseen changes, the next pope will be elected by a group of men largely hand-picked by Francis himself. This means that whoever succeeds him is likely to reflect, at least in part, the values and global perspective that he championed during his time as the spiritual leader of the Catholic Church.

Francis’ long-term legacy, therefore, will not only be defined by the reforms and teachings he delivered during his papacy, but also by the mark he has left on the very process of papal succession. His ability to shape the next generation of Church leadership ensures that his influence will endure well beyond his lifetime. As the Church prepares to elect a new Bishop of Rome, it will do so under the watchful shadow of a pope who transformed its leadership landscape.

As the cardinals gather to elect a new leader, one thing is clear: Francis’ imprint is everywhere — in the faces, experiences, and worldviews of those who will cast their votes. Whoever becomes the next pope will be chosen by a group largely hand-selected by Pope Francis himself.

White House Reportedly Exploring Replacement for Hegseth Amid New Leak Controversy

The White House has initiated a quiet search for a potential replacement for Defense Secretary Pete Hegseth, according to a U.S. official familiar with the matter who was not authorized to speak publicly. This development comes in the wake of another controversy involving Hegseth, who is once again under scrutiny for allegedly leaking sensitive military information in a group chat.

According to the source, Hegseth disclosed classified details in a private group conversation using the Signal messaging app on his personal phone. The recipients of this information reportedly included his wife, brother, and legal counsel. The content of the chat allegedly included minute-by-minute updates on U.S. airstrikes targeting Houthi positions in Yemen. This incident is said to have occurred in March, around the same time that Hegseth relayed similar classified information to senior officials at the White House through another Signal group. That group inadvertently included a journalist.

The premature disclosure of strike information could have placed American pilots in harm’s way had it been intercepted by enemy forces. Already, Houthi militants have successfully downed two U.S. Predator drones, raising concerns about potential lapses in operational security.

Despite the allegations, White House Press Secretary Karoline Leavitt denied any effort to replace Hegseth. In a statement posted on X, she declared, “President Trump stands strongly behind him.” President Trump echoed this sentiment during a press interaction at the White House, dismissing the controversy as overblown. “He’s doing a great job — ask the Houthis how he’s doing,” the president remarked.

Hegseth also pushed back against the allegations during a White House Easter event held earlier in the day. “This is what the media does, they take anonymous sources from disgruntled former employees, and then they try to slash and burn people, ruin their reputation. It’s not going to work with me,” Hegseth said in his defense.

The defense secretary’s comments appear to reference the abrupt exits of four high-ranking Pentagon advisers last week. One of them, former Defense Department spokesperson John Ullyot, resigned and subsequently published a strongly-worded opinion article describing recent events at the Pentagon as a “full-blown meltdown” marked by internal disputes that, according to him, are undermining President Trump’s administration.

Three other Pentagon officials—Dan Caldwell, Colin Carroll, and Darin Selnick—were also removed from their positions and escorted out of the building. These individuals were accused of leaking information to the media, although they have denied any wrongdoing. The trio issued a joint statement on X labeling their removal as “unconscionable” and emphasizing that they had not been informed about the specific nature of the alleged leaks.

“All three of us served our country honorably in uniform — for two of us, this included deployments to the wars in Iraq and Afghanistan. And, based on our collective service, we understand the importance of information security and worked every day to protect it,” they wrote in their statement.

Caldwell and Selnick, in particular, have long-standing professional ties with Hegseth, having collaborated with him at Concerned Veterans for America, a conservative advocacy group that has influenced veterans’ policy in recent years.

The unfolding drama has not gone unnoticed by lawmakers. Senator Jeanne Shaheen of New Hampshire, a Democrat and a member of the Senate Armed Services Committee, criticized Hegseth’s actions and pointed to the larger issue of his qualifications for the job. “But we must not forget that ultimate responsibility here lies with President Trump for selecting a former weekend TV host, without any experience successfully leading a large and complex organization, to run our government’s biggest department and make life and death decisions for our military and country,” she stated.

While the White House maintains public support for Hegseth, the internal deliberations about his future suggest a growing concern over the implications of his actions. The fact that the leak could have compromised national security has escalated the urgency of the situation, particularly as tensions continue to rise in the Middle East and the U.S. military maintains a delicate operational presence in the region.

The controversy has also shed light on the potential security vulnerabilities that arise from using personal devices and encrypted messaging apps for sensitive communications. The Signal app, while popular for its end-to-end encryption, is not authorized for the transmission of classified material by U.S. government officials. The revelation that Hegseth may have used it to share top-secret operational data with non-government individuals raises serious questions about protocol adherence and information governance at the highest levels of national defense.

The March leak incident is particularly alarming because of its proximity to real-time operations. Intelligence and defense analysts worry that such breaches, if exploited by foreign actors, could jeopardize not only the safety of military personnel but also the success of U.S. missions abroad. Given that adversaries such as the Houthis have already demonstrated their ability to down advanced American drones, any additional vulnerabilities could be catastrophic.

Although the administration has made no official announcements regarding a search for a new defense secretary, the internal discussions suggest that the controversy surrounding Hegseth has reached a critical point. The situation could develop further depending on whether more details emerge about the extent and impact of the leaks, and whether Congress or the intelligence community demands a formal investigation.

As the Pentagon reels from internal discord and high-level departures, questions remain about morale within the department and the future direction of U.S. military leadership. If more officials continue to speak out, or if further security lapses come to light, the administration could be forced to re-evaluate its stance on Hegseth despite the president’s current support.

In the meantime, the defense secretary remains defiant, attributing the backlash to politically motivated leaks and disgruntled former colleagues. Whether that narrative will hold up under increasing scrutiny is yet to be seen. The situation underscores the complex and high-stakes nature of leadership at the Pentagon, especially during a time of global instability and growing threats.

For now, Hegseth remains in his position, bolstered by public endorsements from President Trump and the White House. However, the growing controversy surrounding his handling of classified information has sparked concerns that may ultimately determine his political and professional future.

Trump’s Renewed Attacks on Fed Chair Shake Markets and Fuel Global Economic Jitters

U.S. financial markets were rocked once again as President Donald Trump escalated his public criticism of Federal Reserve Chair Jerome Powell, branding him “a major loser” over the central bank’s decision not to cut interest rates. The president demanded that Powell take immediate action to lower borrowing costs in a bid to stimulate the American economy.

Using social media as his platform, Trump urged Powell to slash interest rates “pre-emptively,” accusing the Fed chair of being too slow to react to the evolving economic landscape. “There can be a SLOWING of the economy unless Mr. Too Late, a major loser, lowers interest rates, NOW,” the president declared in his online post.

Trump’s latest remarks come amid growing concern that his own economic policies—particularly aggressive tariffs—have contributed to market instability and increased the risk of a recession. His ongoing feud with Powell, whom he appointed during his first term in office, has only deepened the market unease.

As a result of the heightened tensions and economic anxiety, U.S. stock indexes suffered steep losses. The S&P 500, a barometer of 500 of America’s most significant companies, dropped by approximately 2.4% on Monday. Since the beginning of the year, the index has declined by around 12%. The Dow Jones Industrial Average mirrored that performance, also falling 2.4% and registering a year-to-date loss of roughly 10%. Meanwhile, the tech-heavy Nasdaq fared even worse, shedding more than 2.5% and posting a staggering 18% decline since January.

The market jitters weren’t confined to the U.S. On Tuesday, trading remained subdued in most Asia-Pacific markets. Japan’s Nikkei 225 closed slightly lower by about 0.1%, and Australia’s ASX 200 declined by roughly 0.3%. In contrast, Hong Kong’s Hang Seng Index managed a modest gain of about 0.3%.

European markets also reflected the global unease. In early trading, the UK’s FTSE 100 edged down by about 0.05%, while Germany’s DAX index fell by 0.5%. France’s CAC 40 registered a more pronounced drop of 0.6%.

Ordinarily, the U.S. dollar and government bonds are viewed as safe havens during market turmoil. However, even these assets have come under pressure. The dollar index, which gauges the greenback’s strength against a basket of currencies including the euro, fell on Monday to its lowest point since 2022.

In another sign of market unrest, yields on U.S. government bonds climbed on Tuesday, indicating that investors are demanding higher returns to hold onto Treasuries. This trend reflects a lack of confidence in the near-term stability of the U.S. economy.

At the same time, gold prices soared to a record high, breaching the $3,500 per ounce threshold. The surge in the precious metal’s value signals investors’ preference for assets deemed more secure amid uncertain times. Gold is traditionally seen as a safe haven when economic conditions become volatile.

Susannah Streeter, head of money and markets at Hargreaves Lansdown, pointed to multiple global factors boosting gold’s appeal. “No long-term resolution [is] in sight for conflicts around the world, particularly in Ukraine and Gaza,” she noted. “There are also concerns about the risk that geo-political tensions escalate as opportunities in the Arctic are eyed by the US and Russia,” she added.

Meanwhile, tensions are not just limited to economic policies and markets. On the global diplomatic front, China has issued a warning to other nations, urging them not to “appease” the U.S. in trade negotiations. The comments come amid increasing skepticism of American leadership in global economic matters.

Despite the heightened uncertainty, the International Monetary Fund (IMF) recently stated that a global recession remains unlikely, even with the pressures stemming from U.S. tariffs. However, the IMF also warned that its upcoming country-by-country growth forecasts would include “notable markdowns.”

President Trump’s criticisms of Powell are not new. Throughout his first term, he repeatedly expressed dissatisfaction with Powell’s approach to interest rates and even reportedly considered firing him. Following his return to office, Trump has continued to pressure Powell to cut borrowing costs.

This latest attack followed Powell’s remarks cautioning that Trump’s tariff policies could contribute to inflation and impede economic growth. Trump ramped up his criticism last Thursday by publicly calling for Powell’s removal. “Powell’s termination cannot come fast enough,” he wrote on social media.

The idea of dismissing the Fed chair is controversial and could face significant legal hurdles. The Federal Reserve has traditionally operated with a high degree of independence to insulate it from short-term political influence. Powell has previously told reporters that he does not believe the president possesses the legal authority to fire him.

Still, the Trump administration appears to be exploring options. One of Trump’s top economic advisers confirmed that discussions about removing Powell were underway, noting this on Friday—a day when the U.S. stock market was closed.

These developments coincide with the spring meetings of the International Monetary Fund and the World Bank, where top financial policymakers have gathered in Washington. The heightened political pressure on the Fed has become a central topic of concern at the gatherings.

Christopher Meissner, an economics professor at the University of California, Davis, and a former IMF employee, explained to the BBC’s Today programme that political interference in central banking was more common in the past. “However, the past 30 or 40 years what we’ve learned is that central bank independence is the key to financial stability and low inflation. And I think this is a major reversal and we have to watch out for it,” he warned.

Streeter echoed this view, emphasizing the importance of insulating monetary policymakers from political influence. “The independence of central banks is seen as critical to ensure long-term price stability, ringfencing policymakers from short-term political pressures,” she said.

Looking ahead, the IMF will release its latest economic projections shortly. These forecasts are expected to reflect growing concerns about U.S. economic performance and its potential ripple effects worldwide. “They used to say ‘When the US sneezed, the rest of the world caught a cold’. It’ll be really curious to see if that continues,” said Meissner. “However, I think people are expecting a pretty significant downturn in the US in the coming months… and that can’t be good for the rest of the world.”

Streeter noted that Trump’s policy decisions have undermined the global perception of the U.S. as a stable economic leader. “Yields on 10-year US Treasuries have held onto their recent rise above 4.4%. It’s another sign of unease about the direction of the US economy, amid worries that policies playing out could keep inflation higher and slow growth, and flags the anxiety rattling through the markets right now,” she said.

US Vice President JD Vance Begins First India Visit with Spiritual Tour of Akshardham Temple

US Vice President JD Vance, accompanied by his wife Usha Vance and their children—Ewan, Vivek, and Mirabel—commenced his first official visit to India with a spiritual and cultural stop at the Swaminarayan Akshardham temple in New Delhi. The visit served as an expression of the deepening ties between the United States and India and marked the beginning of Vance’s four-day tour across the country, scheduled from April 21 to April 24.

The Vance family embraced Indian traditions during their visit, with Ewan and Vivek donning traditional kurta-pyjamas, and Mirabel appearing in a vibrant anarkali dress. Together, the family explored the intricate design and spiritual grandeur of Akshardham, experiencing firsthand India’s cultural richness and heritage. As noted in an official press statement, the family admired the temple’s message of harmony, the importance of family values, and the timeless wisdom embedded in Indian traditions.

“The visit symbolises the shared values of faith, peace, and unity that continue to strengthen ties between India and the United States,” the official release stated, underscoring the broader diplomatic significance of Vance’s presence at such a spiritually important site.

In the temple’s guest book, Vice President Vance expressed his gratitude and admiration for the monument’s spiritual ambiance and architectural brilliance. He wrote, “Thank you all so much for your hospitality and kindness in welcoming me and my family to this beautiful place. It is a great credit to India that you built a beautiful temple with precision and care. Our kids, in particular, loved it. God bless.”

According to Akshardham temple spokesperson Radhika Shukla, Vance’s family spent nearly an hour exploring the temple complex, deeply engaged with its spiritual essence and artistic magnificence. “The whole family was here for around 55 minutes. Their experience of one hour inside was unforgettable,” Shukla said, as reported by news agency ANI.

She elaborated on the sequence of the visit, highlighting that the family began their temple tour at the Charanarvind, the sacred footprints of Lord Swaminarayan. They then proceeded to the Bharat Upvan, a landscaped garden that left a strong impression on them. Following that, they moved to the Gajendra Peeth, an intricately carved platform adorned with depictions of elephants. “They were very overwhelmed by the carvings,” Shukla noted. The family then made their way to the upper levels of the temple, where they had darshan—spiritual viewing—of the idol of Lord Swaminarayan in the sanctum sanctorum and offered prayers for world peace.

Earlier in the day, Shukla had shared insights into the anticipation surrounding the visit. “The Vice President and the Second Lady are arriving for the Darshan at Akshardham Temple. She has Indian roots… They are coming here directly from the airport… They will first have the darshan of the replica of Lord Swaminarayan and then they will see the architecture of the temple,” she explained.

The Vance family had flown into New Delhi’s Palam Airport and were received with traditional Indian hospitality. Union Minister Ashwini Vaishnaw welcomed them upon arrival, underscoring the diplomatic weight of the trip. The Vice President’s broader itinerary includes stops in Delhi, Jaipur, and Agra—an agenda crafted to deepen and advance the India-US Comprehensive Global Strategic Partnership.

As part of the official reception, Vance was also honored with a ceremonial Guard of Honour, reflecting the importance India places on the relationship with the United States and the respect extended to visiting dignitaries.

Randhir Jaiswal, spokesperson for India’s Ministry of External Affairs, posted a welcome message on the platform X (formerly Twitter), stating: “A very warm welcome to @VP JD Vance, @SLOTUS Mrs. Usha Vance, & the US delegation to India! Received by Minister of Railways and I&B @AshwiniVaishnaw at the airport.” The post also highlighted the purpose of the visit, adding, “The Official Visit (21-24 Apr) spanning Delhi, Jaipur & Agra is expected to further deepen the India-US Comprehensive Global Strategic Partnership.”

In anticipation of the visit, hoardings welcoming Vice President Vance were placed near Palam Airport, visually reflecting the positive diplomatic sentiment around the high-profile arrival. The tour, starting with a spiritual and cultural experience at Akshardham, signals an emphasis on people-to-people connections and shared values between the two democracies.

The Akshardham temple, known for its intricate carvings, cultural exhibits, and serene atmosphere, served as a powerful venue to highlight these shared values. The choice to begin the Vice President’s tour at such a symbolic location underlined a mutual commitment to unity, respect for tradition, and the peaceful coexistence of diverse beliefs.

While Vance’s political engagements will take him to other key Indian cities in the following days, the personal and heartfelt start to the visit at Akshardham allowed for a moment of reflection and connection that transcended official protocols. For Vance and his family, the stop was more than ceremonial—it was a meaningful immersion into the cultural and spiritual essence of India.

As India and the United States continue to build on their global partnership, visits like these emphasize not only political alignment but also a deepening understanding of each other’s values and traditions. Vance’s warm words in the guest book, his children’s traditional attire, and the family’s engagement with the temple’s spiritual offerings all contributed to a powerful image of goodwill and mutual respect.

With three more days of engagements ahead in cities rich with history and diplomatic importance, Vance’s visit aims to solidify key areas of cooperation while also providing moments of personal and cultural bonding. Whether through strategic dialogues or shared spiritual experiences, the India-US partnership continues to evolve as one built on common ideals, cultural respect, and a shared vision for global peace and progress.

Next Pope Likely to Shift Catholic Church Back Toward the Center

The next leader of the Roman Catholic Church could come from Africa, Italy, Sri Lanka, or even the United States. However, experts suggest that no matter where the new pontiff hails from, the person elected to succeed Pope Francis—who died Monday at age 88—will likely steer the Church back toward the ideological center.

Pope Francis, who led the Catholic Church for 12 years and represented 1.4 billion faithful globally, often sparked controversy among traditionalists with his progressive stances. His support for LGBTQ Catholics and decision to restrict the traditional Latin Mass were among the reforms that drew criticism from conservatives within the Church.

Now, with his passing, the College of Cardinals faces the task of choosing a successor who could bring a new tone to Church leadership. “Whoever is elected will be of a centrally conservative disposition; after 12 years of Pope Francis ‘stirring things up,’” said Serenhedd James, editor of Britain’s Catholic Herald magazine. “I think the cardinals will want someone who will take a different, calmer approach.”

Rev. Patrick Mary Briscoe, editor of Our Sunday Visitor magazine, echoed a similar sentiment. He said the next pontiff is likely to bring “a renewed clarity of doctrine” and focus more on internal Church governance than external engagement.

The process of electing a new pope will begin within 20 days of Francis’ death. A conclave of 120 cardinals under the age of 80—out of the 138 who make up the full College of Cardinals—will gather in the Vatican to choose the next spiritual leader of the Church.

The voting process includes four ballots per day until a new pope is chosen. If 30 rounds pass without a result, voting narrows to the top two candidates. One of them must receive a two-thirds majority to be elected.

Francis, during his papacy, significantly reshaped the College of Cardinals by appointing members from diverse backgrounds and perspectives. Briscoe noted that the new members are “extremely familiar with each other” due to this shift in leadership style. He also pointed out that Cardinal Giovanni Battista Re, the 91-year-old dean of the College, may quietly influence the proceedings. Despite his age, Re was kept in his position by Francis and has strong knowledge of both older and newer cardinals.

Several candidates are seen as front-runners to become the next pope. These names have been ranked by Italian Vatican expert Gaetano Masciullo and Vatican analysts Edward Pentin and Diane Montagna of the College of Cardinals Report. The list includes individuals from a range of theological viewpoints, from progressive to conservative.

Cardinal Luis Tagle of the Philippines, aged 67, is often seen as a protégé of Pope Francis. However, his standing may have been weakened after alleged “shortcomings” were uncovered during his leadership of Vatican charity Caritas International. According to Masciullo, Tagle “has expressed very ‘open’ opinions on issues such as Communion for non-sacramentally married couples and homosexuality, suggesting that universal moral principles may ‘not apply in all situations.’”

Cardinal Pietro Parolin, 70, who currently serves as the Vatican’s Secretary of State, is another top contender. An Italian with diplomatic experience, Parolin is considered a moderate figure. Though he has taken some conservative positions, his willingness to cooperate with Communist China has raised eyebrows. Nevertheless, he is seen as having a “high chance” of being elected due to his broad international experience and ties.

From France, Cardinal Jean-Marc Aveline, 66, is reportedly a favorite of Francis. Aveline is described as an intellectual and personable figure. Masciullo, however, labeled him a “dangerous contender” due to his popularity among left-leaning Church circles. He is known for advocating for strong decentralization within the Catholic Church, a position that could prove controversial.

Another notable candidate is Cardinal Willem Jacobus Eijk, 71, from the Netherlands. A trained physician and theologian, Eijk strictly adheres to Catholic doctrine, even when his views are unpopular. He opposes same-sex blessings, gender-transition therapies, and the ordination of women. His firm stances on doctrine are likely to attract support from conservative cardinals. His administrative skills also enhance his credibility as a potential pope.

Cardinal Malcolm Ranjith, 77, serves as the Archbishop of Colombo in Sri Lanka. His election would mark a historic elevation of an Asian leader to the papacy. Known for aligning with both the late Pope Benedict XVI’s theological conservatism and Francis’ advocacy for the poor and environmental issues, Ranjith could represent a unifying figure. Masciullo remarked that many consider Ranjith “as perfectly aligned with Benedict XVI.” His origin from South Asia, a region where Catholicism is rapidly growing, adds to his appeal.

Then there’s Cardinal Robert Sarah, 79, a deeply traditionalist former Vatican official from Guinea. Sarah has vocally opposed Pope Francis’ limitations on the Latin Mass and the Church’s openness to blessings for same-sex couples. These views have made him a favorite among the Church’s conservative factions. If elected, Sarah would become the first African pope since the fifth century.

While these six cardinals are widely viewed as leading candidates, it is technically possible for any baptized male Catholic to be elected pope. Canon law expert Edward Peters noted that if a non-ordained Catholic were chosen, they would need to be ordained and elevated to the role of bishop before their papacy could be formalized.

However, most experts agree that the election of a non-cardinal is nearly impossible. Christopher Bellitto, a history professor at Kean University, bluntly stated, “Odds of someone other than a cardinal being elected … are lower than a snowball’s chance in hell.” He explained that the last time such a choice was made was in 1378, which sparked the Western Schism, a crisis that saw rival claimants to the papacy and was only resolved in 1417.

Bellitto also referenced another instance from 1294, when a hermit named Celestine V was elected pope despite his lack of experience. Celestine later resigned, and the Italian poet Dante placed him “at the doorway of hell” in his literary work Inferno as a symbol of weak leadership.

The upcoming conclave is therefore expected to remain within traditional bounds, with the cardinals choosing one of their own to lead the Catholic Church into its next chapter. Despite the global reach of Catholicism and the potential for surprise, the consensus among Vatican watchers is that the new pope will likely represent a more centrist, stabilizing force after the eventful and reform-minded tenure of Pope Francis.

World Leaders Mourn Pope Francis, Recall His Legacy of Compassion, Dialogue, and Humility

Soon after the passing of Pope Francis on Monday, tributes poured in from leaders across the world who remembered the first Latin American pontiff as a spiritual beacon and a champion of the marginalized. The Pope, who was 88 years old and had been suffering from a prolonged illness, left a lasting impression on political and religious figures worldwide.

Indian Prime Minister Narendra Modi honored Pope Francis by calling him “a beacon of compassion, humility and spiritual courage.” Reflecting on his interactions with the Pope, Modi said, “I fondly recall my meetings with him and was greatly inspired by his commitment to inclusive and all-round development. His affection for the people of India will always be cherished. May his soul find eternal peace in God’s embrace.”

From the United States, President Donald Trump also extended his condolences on his social media platform, Truth Social, stating, “Rest in Peace Pope Francis! May God Bless him and all who loved him!”

Senator J.D. Vance, currently in India on an official visit, shared a heartfelt message, recalling his last encounter with the Pope. “I just learned of the passing of Pope Francis. My heart goes out to the millions of Christians all over the world who loved him. I was happy to see him yesterday, though he was obviously very ill. But I’ll always remember him for the below homily he gave in the very early days of COVID. It was really quite beautiful. May God rest his soul.”

Italian Prime Minister Giorgia Meloni mourned deeply, writing, “The news saddens us deeply, because a great man and a great shepherd has left us.” She added, “I had the privilege of enjoying his friendship, his advice and his teachings, which never failed even in moments of trial and suffering.” She recalled his message during the Via Crucis, where he highlighted “the power of the gift, which makes everything flourish again and is capable of reconciling what in the eyes of man is irreconcilable.” Meloni praised his call for the world “to follow a path that does not destroy, but cultivates, repairs, protects.” Concluding her tribute, she said, “His teaching and his legacy will not be lost. We greet the Holy Father with hearts full of sadness, but we know that he is now in the peace of the Lord.”

Russian President Vladimir Putin also acknowledged Pope Francis’ role in fostering better relations between religious communities. In a message to Cardinal Kevin Joseph Farrell, Camerlengo of the Holy Roman Church, Putin said, “Throughout the years of his pontificate, he actively promoted the development of dialogue between the Russian Orthodox and Roman Catholic Churches, as well as constructive cooperation between Russia and the Holy See.” He added, “In this sad hour, I would like to convey to you and the entire Catholic clergy my words of sympathy and support.”

French President Emmanuel Macron lauded the Pope’s solidarity with the vulnerable, saying, “Throughout his pontificate Pope Francis had always sided with the most vulnerable and the most fragile, and that he did this with a lot of humility. In this time of war and brutality, he had a sense for the other, for the most fragile.”

German Chancellor Friedrich Merz noted the Pope’s global impact, stating, “Francis will be remembered for his tireless commitment to the weakest in society, to justice and reconciliation. Humility and faith in God’s mercy guided him in this.” Merz emphasized how the Pope “touched people worldwide, across denominational boundaries” and extended his thoughts to the faithful worldwide who are mourning.

Israeli President Isaac Herzog expressed his condolences, focusing on the Pope’s interfaith efforts. “I send my deepest condolences to the Christian citizens of Israel, to the Christian communities in the Holy Land, and to the entire Christian world – on the loss of their spiritual father, Pope Francis,” he wrote. Herzog praised the Pope as “a man of immense faith and great mercy,” who prioritized the poor and peace efforts. “He saw great importance in deepening ties with the Jewish world and in promoting interfaith dialogue as a way to achieve mutual understanding and respect,” Herzog said. He concluded by expressing hope that “his prayers for peace in the Middle East and the return of the kidnapped will soon be answered.”

From Argentina, Pope Francis’ homeland, President Javier Milei also shared a heartfelt message: “It is with profound sorrow that I learned this sad morning that Pope Francis, Jorge Bergoglio, passed away today and is now resting in peace.” Milei acknowledged their past disagreements but said, “Despite differences that seem minor today, having been able to know him in his goodness and wisdom was a true honor for me.”

Before his papacy, Francis, born Jorge Mario Bergoglio, served as Archbishop of Buenos Aires. During his youth, he rose through the ranks of the Jesuit order, offering spiritual guidance during Argentina’s politically difficult years, particularly the military dictatorship known as the Dirty War from 1976 to 1983.

King Charles of the United Kingdom offered a touching tribute, emphasizing the Pope’s legacy of unity and empathy. “His Holiness will be remembered for his compassion, his concern for the unity of the Church and for his tireless commitment to the common causes of all people of faith, and to those of goodwill who work for the benefit of others,” he said.

Kenyan President William Ruto praised Francis’ moral clarity and inclusive leadership. “He exemplified servant leadership through his humility, his unwavering commitment to inclusivity and justice, and his deep compassion for the poor and the vulnerable. His strong ethical and moral convictions inspired millions across the world, regardless of faith or background.”

Lebanese President Joseph Aoun reflected on Francis’ longstanding support for Lebanon. “We in Lebanon, the land of diversity, feel the loss of a dear friend and a strong supporter. The late Pope always carried Lebanon in his heart and prayers, and he always called on the world to support Lebanon in its ordeal,” he said. “We will never forget his repeated calls to protect Lebanon and preserve its identity and diversity.”

Ukrainian President Volodymyr Zelenskyy expressed gratitude for the Pope’s prayers and encouragement during challenging times. “He knew how to give hope, ease suffering through prayer, and foster unity. He prayed for peace in Ukraine and for Ukrainians,” Zelenskyy wrote. “We grieve together with Catholics and all Christians who looked to Pope Francis for spiritual support. Eternal memory!”

Philippine President Ferdinand Marcos Jr declared his deep admiration: “I love this pope. The best pope in my lifetime as far as I’m concerned.” Marcos described him as “a man of profound faith and humility,” adding, “Pope Francis led not only with wisdom but with a heart open to all, especially the poor and the forgotten.”

Brazilian President Luiz Inácio Lula da Silva highlighted Francis’ commitment to justice and environmental advocacy. “Pope Francis lived and spread in his daily life the love, tolerance and solidarity that are the basis of Christian teachings,” he wrote. Citing the Pope’s alignment with the ideals of Saint Francis of Assisi, Lula said, “The Argentine, Jorge Bergoglio, tirelessly sought to bring love where there was hatred. Unity where there was discord.” Lula noted how Francis “brought the issue of climate change to the Vatican” and “vigorously criticized the economic models that led humanity to produce so many injustices.” He stressed that the Pope “always stood by those who need it most: the poor, refugees, young people, the elderly and victims of war and all forms of prejudice.” Lula concluded by noting the personal impact Francis had on him and his wife, Janja. “On the occasions when Janja and I were blessed with the opportunity to meet Pope Francis and be received by him with great affection, we were able to share our ideals of peace, equality and justice. Ideals that the world has always needed. And will always need. May God comfort those who today, all over the world, suffer the pain of this enormous loss. In his memory and in honor of his work, I decree seven days of mourning in Brazil.”

Pope Francis’ legacy as a humble servant, a spiritual reformer, and a global voice for peace will continue to resonate far beyond his time.

Pope Francis Dies at 88: A Revolutionary Papacy That Transformed the Church

Pope Francis, the transformative leader of the Catholic Church known for his efforts to modernize its mission and message, has passed away at the age of 88. The Argentine-born pontiff, who made history as the first pope from the Americas and the first Jesuit to ascend to the role, died on Easter Monday. His death was confirmed by Cardinal Kevin Farrell in an official Vatican statement.

“Dearest brothers and sisters, with deep sorrow I must announce the death of our Holy Father Francis,” said Cardinal Farrell. “At 7.35am this morning, the Bishop of Rome, Francis, returned to the house of the Father. His entire life was dedicated to the service of the Lord and His Church. He taught us to live the values of the Gospel with fidelity, courage and universal love, especially in favour of the poorest and most marginalised. With immense gratitude for his example as a true disciple of the Lord Jesus, we commend the soul of Pope Francis to the infinite merciful love of the One and Triune God.”

Francis made history in many ways. He was the first pope born or raised outside Europe in over 1,200 years and assumed the papacy in 2013, leading the Roman Catholic Church’s 1.3 billion followers through an era marked by both internal reform and global challenges. His health had been declining for some time, with the Pope relying on a wheelchair or cane following multiple surgeries, including major abdominal procedures. In February, he was hospitalized with pneumonia in both lungs and spent over a month recovering in Rome’s Gemelli hospital, only being discharged on March 23.

His passing came just a day after he had blessed thousands gathered at St Peter’s Square during Easter Sunday celebrations. Despite his frailty, he made an unexpected appearance in the popemobile, delighting the crowd with a ride through the piazza. He had also met briefly with U.S. Vice President J.D. Vance that day.

As per centuries-old Vatican protocols, the camerlengo — the official responsible for overseeing church property — confirmed the death by calling out Pope Francis’ baptismal name, Jorge Mario Bergoglio, three times without receiving a response. Upon this, he declared the Pope deceased and began notifying Vatican staff and the public.

The Pope’s death sets in motion a traditional nine-day mourning period and the lead-up to a new papal election. The funeral Mass is expected to be held in St Peter’s Square, and Francis will be buried between four and six days following his death, in accordance with the Universi Dominici Gregis, the document guiding the papal transition. While most popes are buried beneath St Peter’s Basilica, Francis had previously expressed his wish for a simple service and burial at the Basilica of Santa Maria in Rome, marking the first time since Pope Leo XIII in 1903 that a pope will be laid to rest outside the Vatican.

Within 15 to 20 days, more than 140 cardinals from around the globe will arrive at the Vatican to begin the conclave, the highly secretive election process to choose the next pope. During the conclave, the cardinals will be sequestered in the Sistine Chapel, cut off from all forms of communication, until a new pontiff is elected by a two-thirds majority. The announcement of the new pope will come in the traditional form: white smoke emerging from the Sistine Chapel chimney.

Born in Buenos Aires in 1936, Francis’ papacy began under unique circumstances. He succeeded Benedict XVI, who resigned in 2013, becoming the first pope to step down in six centuries. The unexpected transition created a period of dual pontiffs living within the Vatican, and despite the unusual arrangement, Francis and Benedict formed a close personal relationship. Benedict passed away at the end of 2022.

As the 266th pope in the Church’s two-millennia history, Francis took leadership during a particularly turbulent time. The Catholic Church was reeling from widespread sexual abuse scandals, suffering from financial disarray, and sharply divided between conservative and liberal factions. While he didn’t alter Church doctrine, Francis radically changed the tone and focus of Vatican leadership. He immediately targeted clericalism, aimed to uplift the laity, promoted women to influential positions in Church bureaucracy (though he stopped short of ordaining them), and spoke out firmly on climate change.

Francis gained a reputation for compassion, especially toward society’s marginalized, but his gentle demeanor did not extend to clergy who failed to address misconduct. He was unafraid to challenge conservative elements within the Church and dismissed bishops who had mishandled sexual abuse cases. His determination to reform Vatican governance led him to create an anti-corruption body that conducted audits of Church-owned institutions.

During the most recent synod, Francis urged Catholics globally to envision a more inclusive Church, advocating for “an ever more symphonic and synodal church.” He described the Church as an orchestra, cautioning that no single section should dominate. Referring to his role as a “conductor,” he emphasized the need for “creative fidelity” in uniting differing voices within the Church.

Despite his many efforts, his attempts to rebalance the Church’s power structure and amplify the voices of laypeople, especially women and those on society’s fringes, met limited success. In one of his early interviews, Francis remarked that the Church should not fixate on issues like abortion, same-sex marriage, and contraception, stating that “everyone knew what the church taught” on these matters.

In a strategic move to shape the future of the Church, Francis appointed 21 new cardinals in late 2024. With this, roughly 80 percent of the current College of Cardinals — the body responsible for electing the next pope — are now his appointees. This shift significantly increased representation from Asia and Africa, a reflection of Francis’ mission to expand the Church’s reach in the developing world. His 2015 visit to the Philippines marked the largest papal event in history, drawing over six million attendees for the final Mass in Manila, surpassing World Youth Day 1995 at the same location.

Yet, Francis’ tenure was not without internal strife. He faced strong opposition from conservative members within the Church, most notably when an essay surfaced in early 2023, widely believed to have been written by the late Cardinal George Pell. The piece labeled Francis’ papacy a “catastrophe” and accused the Vatican under his leadership of being at a political “low ebb.” It also criticized him for “grave failures to support human rights in Venezuela, Hong Kong, mainland China, and now in the Russian invasion.”

Nevertheless, Pope Francis leaves behind a profound legacy. He may not have fundamentally altered Church doctrine, but he reshaped the Church’s image, reoriented its priorities toward justice, inclusion, and humility, and opened doors for global voices long marginalized in the institution’s highest circles. His papacy will be remembered as one that dared to challenge tradition while calling for unity, compassion, and courage in a divided world.

Pope Francis Visits Rome’s Regina Coeli Prison, Offering Presence and Prayer in Holy Week Tradition

On the afternoon of April 17, Pope Francis made a deeply personal visit to Regina Coeli, the historic prison situated along the Tiber River in Rome. The visit, carried out without fanfare or large announcements, was in keeping with the Pope’s established tradition of spending Holy Thursday in solidarity with those on society’s margins. This year, although he was unable to perform the symbolic washing of feet, a hallmark of his previous Holy Week visits to prisons, the Pope made it clear that his intention to connect with the incarcerated remained steadfast. “I like to do each year what Jesus did on Holy Thursday, the washing of feet, in a prison,” he said. “This year I can’t, but I can and want to be near you. I pray for you and for your families.”

The pontiff arrived quietly at the prison at around 3 p.m., avoiding ceremonial protocols. He was received with warmth by prison director Claudia Clementi and members of the penitentiary staff before he made his way to the prison’s central rotunda. There, approximately 70 inmates had gathered in anticipation of his visit. These inmates came from diverse backgrounds and nationalities, all sharing a common commitment to the prison’s faith formation and catechetical programs led by the chaplain. The Pope’s arrival was not treated as a staged event; rather, it was a sincere and intimate encounter rooted in mutual respect and shared humanity.

The Pope’s presence in Regina Coeli carried a message that transcended spoken words. After a brief period of silent prayer, he moved unhurriedly through the rotunda, personally greeting each individual inmate. There were no formal speeches or scripted interactions—just meaningful moments of connection. Often, these encounters took place in silence, with the Pope’s gaze or gesture communicating volumes. These moments were filled with emotion, drawing attention to the deep compassion and humility that have come to define Francis’ papacy.

Despite not delivering a homily or organized address, the Pope did lead the group of inmates in reciting the Lord’s Prayer. Following this shared act of faith, he offered his blessing to all those present. His visit, though brief—lasting only about thirty minutes—left a profound impact. After blessing the inmates and exchanging final greetings, he quietly departed the prison grounds.

As he exited the gates of Regina Coeli, journalists managed to capture a few parting words from the Pope. In his customary humble manner, he offered a poignant reflection on his recurring visits to correctional facilities. “Every time I enter a prison, I ask myself: ‘Why them and not me?’” he said. These words underscored his recognition of the vulnerability and unpredictability that shape every human life. He seemed to reject the notion of moral superiority, emphasizing instead the shared human condition that binds all people—whether free or imprisoned.

When asked by reporters how he experiences Easter personally, the Pope’s response was simple yet telling. “As I can,” he replied. That brief statement carried a weight of humility, honesty, and universality—expressing the idea that faith, especially during the solemn time of Holy Week, is a journey shaped by personal circumstances, limitations, and sincerity.

Pope Francis’ visit to Regina Coeli stands as a testament to his unwavering commitment to minister to those often forgotten or stigmatized by society. Since the beginning of his papacy, he has consistently prioritized pastoral outreach over pomp, choosing to serve and connect with people where they are, especially those who suffer or are marginalized. His repeated visits to prisons during Holy Week reflect a deep theological conviction—an understanding of mercy, redemption, and the importance of presence over pronouncements.

Though he was physically limited this year from performing the traditional act of washing feet—a gesture that symbolizes service, humility, and love—his physical presence among the inmates spoke just as powerfully. His intention was unmistakable: to accompany, to listen, to bless, and to bring the message of Easter hope into the walls of a prison.

The Pope’s actions at Regina Coeli were in line with the values he has continually preached throughout his pontificate: closeness over distance, compassion over judgment, and the power of human dignity over social labels. Rather than standing above the inmates as a religious authority figure, he stood among them as a fellow pilgrim—someone aware of life’s fragility and the ever-present potential for both brokenness and redemption.

This visit marked another chapter in Pope Francis’ evolving legacy of hands-on, relational ministry. In choosing to spend part of Holy Week not in a grand cathedral but inside a prison, he reinforced his belief that the true meaning of Easter lies not only in liturgical celebration but in reaching out to the forgotten, the rejected, and the suffering.

In an era where religious leaders often face criticism for being out of touch with real-world suffering, Pope Francis continues to break the mold. His willingness to engage directly with those behind bars—offering not solutions, but solidarity—echoes the essence of Christ’s message during Holy Week: a message of love that embraces even the most abandoned.

For the inmates of Regina Coeli, the Pope’s visit offered more than just a blessing. It was a moment of recognition and grace, a reminder that they are seen, remembered, and valued. For the world observing from outside the prison walls, it was yet another example of Pope Francis’ unique pastoral approach—one grounded in humility, driven by empathy, and centered on the Gospel’s call to serve.

With his quiet half-hour at Regina Coeli, Pope Francis gave the world a glimpse of what Holy Thursday looks like when lived with authenticity: not as a spectacle, but as a sacred moment of encounter, of broken barriers, and of shared humanity.

Scientists Reconstruct LUCA: The Ancient Microbe That Sparked All Life on Earth

Every leaf on a plant, feather of an eagle, or even a smear of pond scum shares the same underlying code of life, written in just four DNA letters. Ribosomes interpret this genetic script, assembling 20 standard amino acids and powering cells using the universal energy molecule ATP. This remarkable uniformity across all life continues to intrigue scientists, who are chasing an age-old mystery: if the recipe is nearly identical everywhere, who authored the original version?

The answer appears to lie in LUCA, the Last Universal Common Ancestor—a long-extinct organism that existed at the evolutionary crossroads between Bacteria and Archaea.

The astonishing consistency in biology’s language and tools points to a shared origin.Living systems are not fond of coincidence. A single genetic alphabet, the same protein-making machinery, and a universal energy currency add up to more than luck.This raises the question of just how far back the shared biological toolkit extends.

To explore that, researchers led by Dr. Edmund Moody from the University of Bristol examined thousands of genomes. They aimed to trace the common genetic features of life back to their source. “The evolutionary history of genes is complicated by their exchange between lineages,” Moody explained. “We have to use complex evolutionary models to reconcile the evolutionary history of genes with the genealogy of species.”

Instead of applying strict thresholds, the team let the data determine which genes might have belonged to LUCA. Their analysis uncovered roughly 2,600 genes, similar in number to what’s found in many modern bacteria. Dr. Tom Williams, a co-author, emphasized the strength of their approach. “One of the real advantages here is applying the gene-tree species-tree reconciliation approach to such a diverse dataset representing the primary domains of life, Archaea and Bacteria. This allows us to say with some confidence – and assess that level of confidence – in how LUCA lived.”

Previous efforts to identify LUCA’s genetic makeup produced widely varying estimates, ranging from a minimal 80 genes to over 1,500 gene families. This new analysis, however, suggests LUCA was much more than a primitive organism. The 2,600-gene profile reveals a highly capable microbe, complete with membrane pumps, DNA repair systems, and the capacity to synthesize simple lipids.

Significantly, LUCA also had the Wood–Ljungdahl pathway—a set of chemical reactions that link carbon dioxide and hydrogen to produce acetate and energy. This process suggests LUCA could feed and energize itself without external assistance. That challenges earlier theories which imagined early life as simplistic, passively relying on geological activity to evolve.

Instead, LUCA appears to have been a robust and versatile creature, well-suited for the newly cooled Earth where liquid water could persist. Gene-tracing techniques suggest LUCA lived approximately 4.2 billion years ago—just a few hundred million years after the planet’s formation.

“We did not expect LUCA to be so old, within just hundreds of millions of years of Earth formation. However, our results fit with modern views on the habitability of early Earth,” said Dr. Sandra Álvarez-Carretero. During that ancient time, Earth’s surface was chaotic, with frequent asteroid collisions and widespread volcanic eruptions. Yet hydrothermal vents on the seafloor may have provided stable, warm habitats rich in metals like iron, nickel, and sulfur—minerals that could drive the very same chemical reactions found in LUCA’s genome.

LUCA’s reliance on the Wood–Ljungdahl pathway fits perfectly with this setting, where vent chemistry could have been transformed into sustenance and power. But LUCA’s stable existence didn’t last long.

“Our study showed that LUCA was a complex organism, not too different from modern prokaryotes. What is really interesting is that it clearly possessed an early immune system, showing that even by 4.2 billion years ago, our ancestor was already engaged in an arms race with viruses,” noted Professor Davide Pisani.

The presence of genes resembling modern CRISPR systems—a microbial immune defense—implies that viruses were already attacking cells at the dawn of life. These viral invasions didn’t just threaten LUCA; they helped shape it. Viral infections can shuffle genes between hosts, accelerating the development of new enzymes and metabolic processes. This constant threat may have driven early cells to adapt rapidly, passing on their innovations to future generations.

Although LUCA had significant capabilities, it was not alone. It likely coexisted with a diverse community of microbes, each contributing to a shared ecosystem. “Its waste would have been food for other microbes, like methanogens, that would have helped to create a recycling ecosystem,” said Tim Lenton from the University of Exeter.

In modern hydrothermal vent ecosystems, acetate-producing organisms and methane-makers exchange chemical byproducts, stabilizing their environment and creating balanced energy systems. It’s possible a similar arrangement existed billions of years ago, long before photosynthesis evolved.

These early microbial collaborations could have regulated carbon and hydrogen flows, and even smoothed out extreme changes in temperature and pH. Such cooperative systems might have paved the way for more complex evolutionary developments.

Understanding LUCA’s world and abilities isn’t just a historical exercise—it has implications for both science and the search for extraterrestrial life. “The findings and methods employed in this work will also inform future studies that look in more detail into the subsequent evolution of prokaryotes in light of Earth history, including the lesser-studied Archaea with their methanogenic representatives,” explained Professor Anja Spang from the Royal Netherlands Institute for Sea Research.

Professor Philip Donoghue underscored the importance of interdisciplinary collaboration in this research. “This brought together data and techniques from across multiple fields,” he said. By pooling knowledge from genetics, geology, evolutionary biology, and microbiology, the team was able to reconstruct a clearer picture of life’s origins than any single discipline could have achieved on its own.

Donoghue also emphasized how quickly ecosystems formed on early Earth. “This suggests that life may be flourishing on Earth-like biospheres elsewhere in the universe,” he concluded.

The quest to understand LUCA is far from over. Each new genome collected from ocean sediment or desert soil adds more details to the picture. With sequencing technologies becoming faster and more affordable, scientists will continue to identify ancient gene families and search for traces of early viruses in microbial DNA.

Future expeditions that drill into untouched seafloor vents could uncover life forms that echo LUCA’s lifestyle, linking geological processes directly with genetic history. Although many questions remain, one conclusion is clear: life didn’t stumble onto the scene—it arrived fully equipped, ready to face viruses, and eager to reshape its surroundings. Today, every living organism still carries a spark from that ancient ancestor.

Rahul Gandhi Set for Two-Day US Visit, to Speak at Brown University and Engage with Indian Diaspora

Rahul Gandhi, India’s Leader of Opposition, is scheduled to undertake a two-day trip to the United States starting April 21. This visit will include a series of engagements focused on academic interaction and community outreach, especially with the Indian diaspora in the U.S.

During his visit, Gandhi will be heading to Rhode Island, where he will participate in a key event at Brown University. He is expected to take part in a session titled “A Conversation with Rahul Gandhi” at the Watson Institute for International and Public Affairs. This event is being organized by the Saxena Center for Contemporary South Asia and is slated to be held on April 21. As part of this academic exchange, Gandhi will also interact with Brown University’s faculty members and students, providing them with insights into Indian politics and governance from the perspective of the opposition.

Aside from the university session, the Congress leader will also meet with members of the Indian-American community during his U.S. visit. These meetings are expected to include interactions with non-resident Indians as well as representatives of the Indian Overseas Congress, which functions as the international arm of the Indian National Congress party. The Indian Overseas Congress plays an important role in engaging with the global Indian diaspora and promoting the Congress party’s ideology abroad.

Pawan Khera, the chairman of the Congress party’s media and publicity department, confirmed the details of Gandhi’s itinerary through a post on X, formerly known as Twitter. In his post, Khera stated, “Former Congress president Rahul Gandhi will be visiting Brown University, in Rhode Island, United States, on the 21st and 22nd of April. He will be giving a talk and interacting with faculty members and students.”

This upcoming trip marks Gandhi’s second visit to the United States in the span of a few months. His previous U.S. tour took place in September 2024, during which he addressed faculty and students at the University of Texas. That visit also included meetings with various Indian diaspora groups in Texas and the nation’s capital, Washington, D.C. These interactions have become part of Gandhi’s broader efforts to connect with Indians abroad and present his party’s vision on international platforms.

In addition to the University of Texas, Gandhi has delivered speeches and participated in dialogues at several renowned international academic institutions. These include appearances at Harvard University, the University of Cambridge, and Stanford University. Through these engagements, he has sought to present his thoughts on democracy, economic development, and the social challenges facing India. His academic outreach is viewed as part of a broader attempt to rebrand his political persona and expand his influence beyond Indian borders.

Brown University, where Gandhi is scheduled to speak during his upcoming visit, is one of the oldest and most prestigious universities in the United States. Founded in 1764, the Ivy League institution has a long-standing reputation for academic excellence and political engagement. Over the years, it has hosted a variety of global political leaders and public intellectuals, serving as a platform for high-level discussions on international affairs.

The event titled “A Conversation with Rahul Gandhi” is expected to draw significant attention from students, faculty, and members of the South Asian community in the region. With the growing interest in India’s political dynamics ahead of the next general elections, Gandhi’s thoughts on current national issues are likely to be closely followed. His appearance at Brown University is anticipated to provide him an opportunity to articulate his vision for India and present his critique of the current government in a global forum.

This kind of academic interaction is not new for Gandhi, who has made it a point to include such discussions during his international visits. These engagements often allow him to explain the Congress party’s stance on matters ranging from economic policy to social justice, and to underline the importance of democratic institutions in India. They also provide him with a space to address questions and criticisms in a relatively open and intellectually oriented environment.

In addition to addressing academic audiences, Gandhi’s outreach to the Indian-American community has also been a consistent part of his international itinerary. The Indian diaspora in the United States has played an increasingly influential role in shaping political perceptions and promoting bilateral ties between the two nations. Engaging with these communities allows Gandhi to build networks of support and understanding that can be strategically valuable, especially as India continues to play a larger role in global affairs.

The Indian Overseas Congress, which coordinates many of these diaspora engagements, has been instrumental in organizing meetings and forums for Gandhi during his visits. These interactions often serve dual purposes: strengthening the Congress party’s presence among overseas Indians and allowing Gandhi to gauge the concerns and expectations of expatriate communities. Such dialogues can also be an opportunity to correct misconceptions and present the Congress’s political agenda directly to a global Indian audience.

Gandhi’s recent travels to foreign universities and diaspora hubs highlight a broader strategy by the Congress party to rebuild its image and international credibility. In contrast to the more centralized and nationalistic messaging of the ruling Bharatiya Janata Party (BJP), the Congress leader has often emphasized themes of democratic resilience, inclusivity, and global cooperation in his foreign engagements.

While the impact of such visits on domestic electoral politics may be limited, they do contribute to shaping global narratives about India and its leadership. Gandhi’s appearances on international stages are covered widely by both Indian and global media, influencing how Indian politics is perceived abroad.

His choice of Brown University for his next academic appearance fits into this pattern of aligning with reputed institutions that foster open discussion. As he prepares for the event and subsequent interactions, both his supporters and critics will be watching closely to see how effectively he uses the platform to project his political philosophy and connect with younger, globally-minded audiences.

With India set to enter another election cycle in the near future, Gandhi’s overseas engagements, including his forthcoming U.S. visit, are likely to be viewed through both diplomatic and political lenses. They reflect a continuing effort by the Congress leader to maintain visibility, build international rapport, and strengthen ties with communities that can indirectly influence India’s external image and internal discourse.

In summary, Rahul Gandhi’s two-day visit to the United States on April 21 and 22 includes a major speaking engagement at Brown University in Rhode Island, along with meetings with Indian-American community members and Congress party affiliates. As Pawan Khera noted, “Former Congress president Rahul Gandhi will be visiting Brown University, in Rhode Island, United States, on the 21st and 22nd of April. He will be giving a talk and interacting with faculty members and students.” This marks another chapter in Gandhi’s continued effort to blend academic dialogue, community interaction, and international outreach as he seeks to play a leading role in shaping India’s political future.

AACIO Celebrates Dr. Navin C. Nanda’s Legacy with Renaming ACC Distinguished Annual International Service Award as “Navin C. Nanda International Service Award”

Chicago, IL – The Annual Meeting and Scientific Sessions organized by the American Association of Cardiologists of Indian Origin (AACIO), during the annual American College of Cardiology’s (ACC), co-hosted by the Indian American Medical Association-IL and International Society of Cardiovascular Ultrasound (ISCU), was held in Chicago, IL. on March 29, 2025.

2 AACIO Celebrates Dr Navin C Nanda's Legacy with Renaming ACC Distinguished Annual International Service Award as “Navin C Nanda International Service Award”
Recognition of Dr. Nanda at the American College of Cardiology Convention 2025 in Chicago

The medical and scientific event, attended by over 200 medical professionals and leaders from across the United States, featured state-of-the-art lectures and four young investigator awards.

A highlight of the annual was the announcement of the ACC’s Distinguished Award for International Service, named in perpetuity in honor of Dr. Navin C. Nanda, MD, FACC. This is the first time that ACC has named one of their most distinguished and prestigious annual awards not only after an eminent US Cardiologist of Indian Origin, but also for any Cardiologist born outside the USA.

On behalf of the American College of Cardiology, Board of Trustees, Brynne MacCann, Director of ACC Philanthropy, attended the meeting to congratulate Dr. Nanda and expressed her gratitude to AACIO for their support. On behalf of the ACC Board of Trustees, MacCann, in her message said, “The ACC Board of Trustees is thankful to AACIO for nominating and supporting the International Service Award in Dr. Nanda’s name, recognizing his pioneering work in echocardiography and dedication to education and mentorship. This award will continue to inspire future generations of cardiovascular leaders.”

3 AACIO Celebrates Dr Navin C Nanda's Legacy with Renaming ACC Distinguished Annual International Service Award as “Navin C Nanda International Service Award”
Dr. Navin C Nanda, with the leadership of AACIO Dr. Rakesh Sharma, Dr. Gopal Lalmalani, and Dr. Samir Shah at the AACIO Annual Conference in Chicago on March 29, 2025

AACIO President Rakesh Sharma, MD, FACC, said, “We’re proud to recognize ACC’s decision to establish this prestigious award in Dr. Nanda’s name, a testament to his enduring legacy. His groundbreaking work and tireless efforts in mentoring have left a lasting impact.”

Dr. Nanda expressed his gratitude, stating, “The designation of the ACC International Service Award in my name is the most meaningful achievement in my career. I’m grateful to the ACC Board and AACIO Executive Committee, especially Dr. Sharma, for their support.”

Dr. Nanda is recognized worldwide as the “Father of Modern Echocardiography” for his pioneering contributions not only in adult but also pediatric and fetal echocardiography.

Dr. Nanda has made cutting-edge advancements in the field, including three-dimensional, contrast, and both conventional and color Doppler echocardiography.  He received his medical degree from Seth G.S. Medical College and his Doctor of Medicine degree from the University of Mumbai.

ACCIO, founded in 1986, is a foremost organization, which represents the interests of almost 6,000 Cardiologists of Indian Origin practicing in the United States.

The inaugural Navin C. Nanda International Service Award will be presented at ACC’s Annual Scientific Session in 2026 in New Orleans, LA.

Dr Nanda’s interview by the ACC was also simultaneously published in cardiology. Feature | Making A Global Difference: Navin C. Nanda, MD, FACC – American College of Cardiology

4 AACIO Celebrates Dr Navin C Nanda's Legacy with Renaming ACC Distinguished Annual International Service Award as “Navin C Nanda International Service Award”
Presentation of multiorganizational recognition plaque to Dr. Navin Nanda as the Chair of Indo-US Scientific Convention in Hyderabad in January 2025 by the Convention Co-Chair Dr. Vemuri Murthy at the AACIO Annual Conference.

US Vice President J D Vance Set to Visit India from April 21 to 24

United States Vice President J D Vance is scheduled to embark on his first official trip to India from April 21 to April 24, as confirmed by the Indian government. Accompanying him on this significant diplomatic journey will be Second Lady Usha Vance, their children, and key senior officials from the Trump administration. The visit marks a continuation of the strong strategic partnership between India and the United States, following recent high-level exchanges between the two countries.

The Indian government announced in an official statement that Vance will hold a meeting with Prime Minister Narendra Modi on April 21, a central component of his three-day visit. “The Vice President and his delegation will have other engagements in Delhi and are also scheduled to visit Jaipur and Agra before departing for Washington DC on April 24,” the statement noted. The visit is being viewed as a valuable opportunity for both nations to assess the current status of their bilateral relations and evaluate the implementation of the key outcomes outlined in the joint statement released on February 13 during Prime Minister Modi’s trip to the United States.

During his time in India, Vice President Vance is expected to engage in wide-ranging discussions with Indian leaders, covering important regional and global developments. These discussions are aimed at deepening mutual understanding and coordination on issues of shared concern. According to the Indian government, “The visit will provide an opportunity for both sides to review progress in bilateral relations and implementation of the outcomes of the India-US joint statement issued on Feb 13 during Modi’s visit.”

The U.S. side has also issued a formal announcement confirming the visit and underlining its cultural and diplomatic importance. The statement emphasized that Vice President Vance and his family will take part in cultural engagements during their stay in India. “Vance and family will participate in engagements at cultural sites in India,” it noted. These cultural activities are expected to underscore the strong people-to-people ties that form an essential pillar of the India-U.S. relationship.

The choice of cities for the Vice President’s itinerary reflects a mix of political and cultural interests. While the official meetings and diplomatic exchanges will be conducted in New Delhi, the delegation’s visits to Jaipur and Agra will allow them to experience India’s rich cultural heritage firsthand. Jaipur, known as the Pink City, is famous for its architectural marvels and vibrant local culture, while Agra is home to the iconic Taj Mahal, one of the most visited landmarks in the world and a UNESCO World Heritage Site.

The timing of the visit is significant as it comes at a moment when both nations are keen to expand their cooperation across several sectors, including defense, technology, trade, and climate. The February 13 joint statement, which will be a reference point for many of the discussions during Vance’s trip, outlined a comprehensive framework for advancing shared priorities. This includes enhanced defense collaboration, promotion of clean energy initiatives, facilitation of critical and emerging technologies, and bolstering economic exchanges.

Both governments appear eager to maintain the momentum that was established during earlier high-level engagements, and this upcoming visit by Vice President Vance provides a platform to reinforce those commitments. Given the strategic convergence between India and the United States in the Indo-Pacific and beyond, it is expected that the two sides will use the opportunity to exchange views on pressing regional security concerns and align their positions on global matters of mutual interest.

Observers believe that the presence of Second Lady Usha Vance and their children on this trip adds a personal touch to the diplomatic visit and signifies the importance of strengthening interpersonal and cultural dimensions of the bilateral relationship. It is common for leaders and their families to engage in such symbolic gestures, which often resonate positively with the public and media on both sides.

As this is Vance’s inaugural trip to India, it also carries symbolic weight and serves as a message about the priorities of the Trump administration in its approach to foreign policy, particularly in relation to South Asia. His engagement with Indian leaders, cultural figures, and civil society will be closely watched as a measure of how Washington aims to frame its ties with New Delhi in the coming years.

The visit is also likely to involve discussions on major global developments, including geopolitical tensions, economic recovery post-pandemic, and cooperation in international forums. With India playing an increasingly influential role on the world stage, both nations are looking to align their diplomatic efforts and maximize their shared interests through frequent and high-level engagements.

Throughout the three-day visit, Vice President Vance and his delegation are expected to participate in a series of official meetings, policy discussions, and cultural programs. His interactions in New Delhi are likely to include sessions with Indian cabinet ministers and senior officials to deepen collaboration across various sectors. In Jaipur and Agra, the delegation will engage in site visits that not only highlight India’s historical and architectural treasures but also reflect the broader cultural diplomacy goals of the visit.

While specific details about the cultural engagements have not been released, it is expected that the Vance family’s participation will focus on showcasing appreciation for India’s heritage, further enhancing the warmth of the bilateral ties. Such cultural interactions have often been used as a tool to emphasize common values and build lasting goodwill between nations.

The government of India has stated that this visit will help advance the implementation of previously agreed-upon measures and identify new areas of cooperation. By reviewing the deliverables from the February 13 joint statement, both countries hope to chart a forward-looking roadmap for deeper cooperation. The government noted, “The two sides will exchange views on regional and global developments of mutual interest.”

This visit marks yet another chapter in the continuing evolution of India-U.S. ties, which have steadily grown stronger over the past two decades. With regular exchanges at the highest levels, both nations have worked to build a strategic partnership rooted in democratic values, mutual trust, and shared aspirations for peace and prosperity.

As Vice President Vance concludes his trip on April 24, analysts will be watching closely for the outcomes and signals emerging from this diplomatic engagement. The visit not only underscores the importance of the bilateral relationship but also sets the stage for further collaboration as both nations navigate complex global challenges and opportunities together.

Trump Administration Enforces Old Immigration Rule, Mandates Legal Status Proof for All Non-Citizens

Non-citizens residing in the United States, whether they are on H-1B work visas, F-1 student visas, or other legal permits, are now required to carry proof of their legal immigration status at all times. This requirement comes under a new directive from the Donald Trump administration, which became effective on April 11. The directive is part of a broader executive order titled ‘Protecting the American People Against Invasion’ and is intended to intensify immigration enforcement efforts, with the potential for deportation targeting individuals lacking legal status.

This latest move is essentially a stricter application of a pre-existing law. The foundation of the policy lies in the Alien Registration Act of 1940, a law that required immigrants to register with the U.S. government. Although it existed for decades, the rule was not enforced consistently. The new directive revives this old requirement under what is now being called the Alien Registration Requirement (ARR), implementing clearer timelines and harsher penalties for non-compliance.

Under the updated regulation, all non-citizens who are 14 years or older and have been living in the U.S. for over 30 days must register using Form G-325R. For children under 14, parents are responsible for registering them. Additionally, new immigrants must complete registration within 30 days of entering the U.S. Failure to comply could lead to penalties such as fines, jail sentences, or a combination of both. Any change in residential address must be reported to the authorities within 10 days. Furthermore, children who turn 14 must re-register and submit their fingerprints within 30 days.

This rule is particularly significant for Indian nationals and other legal immigrants living in the United States. There are approximately 5.4 million Indians in the country, among whom around 220,000 are believed to be undocumented. Legal residents such as H-1B visa holders and international students are not required to fill out the registration form again since they are already officially registered. However, they are still expected to carry documents that confirm their legal status.

“This measure intends to enhance national security by ensuring that all individuals in the country are properly documented,” said Aurelia Menezes, a partner at King Stubb & Kasiva, Advocates and Attorneys, in a statement to Business Standard. She also noted, “It also seeks to prevent fraudulent activities and improve the enforcement of immigration laws.”

Non-compliance with this rule carries serious consequences. Individuals who fail to carry or produce their immigration documents when required could face a fine or even a jail term of up to six months. Importantly, registration alone does not shield individuals from deportation. If a person’s immigration documents are missing, expired, or otherwise deemed invalid, they may still be subject to removal from the country.

“All non-citizens 18 and older must carry this documentation (registration proof) at all times,” said Kristi Noem, Secretary of the Department of Homeland Security. “The administration has directed the Department of Homeland Security (DHS) to prioritise enforcement. There will be no sanctuary for noncompliance.”

To reduce the risk of legal troubles, Menezes advised Indian immigrants and other non-citizens to take several precautionary steps. These include ensuring that all immigration documents are valid, storing the originals in a safe place, and carrying either clear or notarised copies. She also recommended that if immigration officers attempt to take original documents, individuals should ask for proper identification and request a written explanation detailing who took the documents and why. If necessary, they should ask for a lawyer.

Further guidance on handling encounters with U.S. immigration officers has been provided by Abhisha Parikh, a U.S.-based immigration attorney. In a recent social media post, she listed several key actions for individuals to remember if stopped by immigration enforcement officials:

  1. Remain calm and avoid fleeing the scene.
  2. Inquire whether you are free to leave, and if permitted, walk away.
  3. Request to see a badge, since ICE agents may wear uniforms labeled “police.”
  4. Exercise your right to remain silent.
  5. Do not resist or attempt to grab personal belongings without permission.
  6. Refuse to consent to any searches unless the agents present a valid judicial warrant.
  7. You are not obligated to answer questions about your immigration status.
  8. S. citizens are not required to carry proof of citizenship.
  9. Undocumented immigrants have the right to request a lawyer and decline to answer questions.
  10. Immigration and Customs Enforcement (ICE) agents cannot detain anyone based solely on race or ethnicity.
  11. Create an emergency plan with family members in case of arrest or detention.
  12. Never sign any documents without consulting a legal expert.

In the unfortunate event that an individual is arrested, they should ask for a lawyer immediately. It is vital to remain silent and avoid making any statements until legal counsel is present.

This new enforcement drive reflects the Trump administration’s broader stance on immigration, one that aims to tighten rules and enhance scrutiny of non-citizens living in the U.S. Even though the registration requirements themselves are not new, the emphasis on enforcement and the increased consequences for non-compliance signal a more aggressive approach.

Legal experts believe the directive may add pressure and confusion among immigrant communities, particularly those who have lived in the U.S. for years under valid status. Even individuals who are fully compliant with visa and registration requirements now face the added burden of carrying documentation with them wherever they go.

Despite concerns over the potential for racial profiling and civil liberties violations, administration officials argue that the measure is necessary for national security and law enforcement purposes. While undocumented immigrants remain the primary target, the rule’s broader application means that all non-citizens, including those lawfully present in the country, must be cautious.

In summary, the newly enforced Alien Registration Requirement is a stark reminder that even longstanding immigration laws can be brought back into action under changing political priorities. Legal immigrants are advised to remain vigilant, prepared, and informed to avoid unnecessary complications under the evolving regulatory environment.

Possible Signs of Life Detected on Distant Planet K2-18b, Say Cambridge Scientists

In a development that could reshape our understanding of life beyond Earth, scientists at the University of Cambridge have identified preliminary but compelling evidence suggesting that a distant exoplanet, K2-18b, might harbor life. Using NASA’s powerful James Webb Space Telescope (JWST), the team detected molecular signatures in the planet’s atmosphere that, on Earth, are only produced by living organisms.

K2-18b, located about 700 trillion miles from Earth, is more than twice the size of our planet. It orbits a small, cool red dwarf star, and it has long intrigued scientists due to its position in the so-called habitable zone, where temperatures might support liquid water. What makes this new finding stand out is the apparent presence of two life-related molecules: dimethyl sulphide (DMS) and dimethyl disulphide (DMDS). Both are known on Earth to be byproducts of marine phytoplankton and certain bacteria.

This marks the second time such life-associated chemicals have been identified in the atmosphere of K2-18b by JWST, but the latest detection is considerably more promising, according to the researchers. The Cambridge team, led by Professor Nikku Madhusudhan at the university’s Institute of Astronomy, stresses that further observations are necessary before drawing firm conclusions. Still, Madhusudhan expressed cautious optimism.

“This is the strongest evidence yet there is possibly life out there,” he said. “I can realistically say that we can confirm this signal within one to two years.”

The James Webb Space Telescope, launched in 2021, is capable of analyzing the atmospheric composition of distant worlds by studying starlight that passes through their atmospheres. This allows scientists to identify the presence of various chemicals based on how the light is absorbed or altered.

According to Madhusudhan, the amount of DMS potentially found in K2-18b’s atmosphere during a single observation was unexpectedly high.

“The amount we estimate of this gas in the atmosphere is thousands of times higher than what we have on Earth,” he explained. “So, if the association with life is real, then this planet will be teeming with life.”

He went even further to suggest a broader implication: “If we confirm that there is life on K2-18b, it should basically confirm that life is very common in the galaxy.”

Despite the excitement, the scientific community remains cautious. The detection, while promising, has not yet reached the level of statistical confidence required for a formal discovery. Scientists typically require a five sigma result—equivalent to 99.99999% certainty—to claim a discovery. So far, the K2-18b finding stands at three sigma, or about 99.7% certainty. Although that is a significant improvement over the one sigma result of 68% obtained 18 months ago, it is still short of the rigorous threshold demanded in the field.

Independent experts echo this cautious stance. Professor Catherine Heymans of the University of Edinburgh, who also serves as Scotland’s Astronomer Royal, emphasized the complexity of interpreting such findings.

“Even with that certainty, there is still the question of what is the origin of this gas,” she told BBC News. “On Earth it is produced by microorganisms in the ocean, but even with perfect data we can’t say for sure that this is of a biological origin on an alien world because loads of strange things happen in the Universe and we don’t know what other geological activity could be happening on this planet that might produce the molecules.”

The Cambridge scientists are aligned with this view and are collaborating with other researchers to determine whether DMS and DMDS can be synthesized through non-biological processes in laboratory settings. These experiments aim to explore whether alternative, abiotic pathways could account for the detected molecules.

Some other research teams have already proposed non-biological explanations for the data obtained from JWST. One point of debate involves the absence of ammonia in K2-18b’s atmosphere. Some scientists argue that this suggests the presence of a vast liquid ocean capable of absorbing the ammonia, potentially creating a suitable environment for life. However, an equally plausible explanation is that the planet could have a molten rock ocean, which would be inhospitable to life.

“Everything we know about planets orbiting other stars comes from the tiny amounts of light that glance off their atmospheres,” said Professor Oliver Shorttle, also of Cambridge University. “So it is an incredibly tenuous signal that we are having to read, not only for signs of life, but everything else. With K2-18b part of the scientific debate is still about the structure of the planet.”

Meanwhile, Dr. Nicolas Wogan at NASA’s Ames Research Center has published research that interprets the data differently. According to his study, K2-18b might not be an ocean world at all but rather a mini gas giant with no solid surface, which would make the presence of life even more unlikely.

However, these alternate theories are not without their own challenges. Critics argue that some of the alternative models do not align with the JWST data. This has fueled an ongoing and vibrant scientific debate around the nature of K2-18b, its atmospheric composition, and its potential to support life.

Despite these uncertainties, Professor Madhusudhan remains hopeful and confident in his team’s approach.

“Decades from now, we may look back at this point in time and recognise it was when the living universe came within reach,” he said. “This could be the tipping point, where suddenly the fundamental question of whether we’re alone in the universe is one we’re capable of answering.”

The findings from the Cambridge team have been formally published in The Astrophysical Journal Letters, marking a significant milestone in the search for extraterrestrial life. While definitive proof remains elusive, the data from K2-18b brings scientists a step closer to understanding whether we are truly alone in the cosmos.

Republican Lawmakers Hope Supreme Court Will Address Trump’s Trade War

Republican lawmakers are quietly hoping that the U.S. Supreme Court will intervene in President Trump’s ongoing trade war, which has increasingly become a political burden for the GOP. Even though the president has suspended many of his tariffs, the trade dispute continues to be a contentious issue.

While the Supreme Court has generally ruled in favor of Trump in several cases during his first few months in office, it dealt the administration a setback last week by ruling that it must facilitate the return of a Maryland man who had been wrongfully deported to El Salvador.

Trump’s broad “reciprocal” tariffs, which affect over 180 countries, now face new legal challenges. Several businesses have filed lawsuits against the administration in both the U.S. Court of International Trade and a federal district court in Florida.

At present, most of these tariffs are on hold for a 90-day period to allow affected countries to negotiate with the Trump administration. However, China remains a major exception, with tariffs on many Chinese goods now reaching as high as 145 percent.

Some Republican lawmakers, who privately oppose Trump’s tariffs but are reluctant to publicly criticize the president, are hopeful that the Supreme Court will eventually limit the president’s tariff powers.

“Members would love to have the courts bail them out and basically step in and assert the authority under the Constitution that taxes are supposed to originate in the House of Representatives,” said Brian Darling, a GOP strategist and former Senate GOP aide.

“Senators and House members would like the courts to give them some cover, because I’m sure many of them are nervous about getting reelected if these tariffs last for a long time. They’re looking at the poll numbers and see that tariffs are not popular,” Darling explained.

He added, “They’re not going to be outwardly opposing the president, because that comes with a huge downside.”

Jeffrey M. Schwab, senior counsel for the Liberty Justice Center, which has filed a lawsuit challenging Trump’s “Liberation Day” tariffs on behalf of U.S. businesses that import goods from countries targeted by the tariffs, said the case is likely to reach the Supreme Court unless Trump reverses course.

“IEEPA [the International Emergency Economic Powers Act] just doesn’t authorize this action to impose these tariffs, and even if IEEPA does authorize some tariffs, which is a question that I think is questionable, they certainly authorize worldwide, across-the-board tariffs,” Schwab stated in an interview with The Hill.

Schwab continued by questioning the Trump administration’s rationale for imposing such sweeping tariffs, saying that using trade deficits as a justification for the tariffs does not meet the standards of an unusual or extraordinary emergency.

“The trade deficit is not an emergency. It’s not unusual nor is it extraordinary. Even if you accept that IEEPA could authorize the president’s tariffs as a general rule, it doesn’t authorize them under the justification they gave,” Schwab argued.

Schwab, who is leading the case, emphasized the urgency of moving the case forward due to the potentially wide-reaching consequences of the tariffs.

“It’s certainly the kind of case that the Supreme Court would be interested in because the consequences are so far-reaching and you’d want an authoritative decision on it. You definitely don’t want a circuit split on it,” Schwab said.

“We’re going to try to move it quickly,” he added, explaining that his team plans to seek a preliminary injunction against the “reciprocal” tariffs within the week.

The New Civil Liberties Alliance, a conservative legal group, has also filed a separate lawsuit in Florida to block Trump’s tariffs on China. Andrew Morris, senior litigation counsel for the group, argued that the tariffs are a violation of the Constitution, particularly undermining Congress’s exclusive authority to regulate taxes.

“Trump’s tariffs against China have usurped Congress’s right to control tariffs, and upset the Constitution’s separation of powers,” Morris said.

Senator Rand Paul (R-Ky.) has expressed concerns about the constitutional validity of the tariffs, emphasizing that tariffs are essentially taxes imposed on American consumers. He pointed out that the Constitution explicitly grants Congress, not the executive branch, the power to levy taxes.

“The Constitution says taxes originate to Congress,” Paul stated. “That to me isn’t a pointless argument. It’s an incredibly important argument, whether taxes can be levied under one person.”

Paul also highlighted that the International Emergency Economic Powers Act (IEEPA), which was designed for use in emergencies, makes no reference to tariffs.

“There are many people who believe that the power under IEEPA doesn’t even exist. So Congress needs to grow a spine, and Congress needs to stand up for its prerogatives regardless of party, regardless even of the economic issue,” Paul said.

“The Constitution gives Congress the authority to regulate interstate and foreign commerce,” Paul continued. “Should we be a country ruled by emergency edict or are we going to be a country ruled by the democratic actions and voting of Congress? I think it’s incredibly important.”

In light of these concerns, Paul is co-sponsoring a resolution with Senator Ron Wyden (D-Ore.) to roll back Trump’s “reciprocal” tariffs. The pair plans to bring the resolution to the Senate floor for a vote after the two-week Easter recess.

Some of Trump’s most ardent supporters, such as Senator Ted Cruz (R-Texas), have also expressed reservations about the tariffs, particularly their impact on American consumers. Cruz called tariffs “a tax,” and noted, “I’m not a fan of raising taxes on millions of American consumers.”

Senator Ron Johnson (R-Wis.) questioned the Trump administration’s long-term strategy for the trade war, cautioning that tariffs are “a double-edged sword” and a “pretty blunt instrument.” Johnson, who had previously kept his concerns about the tariffs subdued, expressed skepticism about their effectiveness.

Four Republicans, including Senators Rand Paul, Susan Collins (Maine), Lisa Murkowski (Alaska), and Mitch McConnell (Ky.), voted earlier this month to undo Trump’s 25 percent tariff on Canada. Although the Senate passed the resolution by a 51-48 vote, it is unlikely to be taken up in the House.

“If the courts run interference on any of Trump’s tariffs, that plays well for Republicans on Capitol Hill that don’t agree with them,” said a second Republican strategist who requested anonymity. This strategist explained that many GOP lawmakers believe Trump’s decision to impose hefty tariffs on Mexico and Canada, two of America’s largest trading partners, was too aggressive.

“The concern is pretty broad,” the strategist added, noting that many Republicans are particularly worried about the potential consequences for their reelection prospects if the economy suffers a downturn.

The strategist also predicted that the Supreme Court would likely get involved, with some tariffs potentially being struck down. “Some of them could get struck down when they get to the Supreme Court,” the strategist added.

In response to concerns about the long-term impact of the tariffs, seven Senate Republicans have co-sponsored the Trade Review Act of 2025, spearheaded by Senators Chuck Grassley (R-Iowa) and Maria Cantwell (D-Wash.). This legislation would require that new tariffs or tariff increases expire after 60 days unless Congress passes a joint resolution of approval, allowing Congress to more easily remove tariffs.

“Congress needs to assert its prerogative over tariffs,” Grassley said, underscoring the importance of maintaining a balance of power.

While the Trade Review Act is still in its early stages, it reflects growing Republican discontent with the current state of the trade war. Several Republican senators have voiced their concerns, fearing that Trump’s tariffs could become a permanent fixture unless the courts intervene or Congress takes action.

“There are a lot of people who don’t like the tariffs,” a Senate aide explained. “It’s an issue that splits our party.”

World Bank President Ajay Banga Highlights Jobs-Focused Strategy for 2025 Spring Meetings

Ajay Banga, the President of the World Bank Group, has announced that a “Jobs-Focused Strategy” will be the central theme for the upcoming 2025 Spring Meetings of the World Bank Group (WBG) and the International Monetary Fund (IMF), scheduled to take place from April 21 to 26, 2025, in Washington D.C. Banga stated that this strategy reflects the World Bank’s “urgency and conviction that development must lead to opportunity.”

Speaking at a virtual press conference on April 16, 2025, ahead of the meetings, Banga revealed that the World Bank is ready to expand its efforts in addressing job creation. He emphasized that more information would be shared during the Spring Meetings about the next phase of the private sector lab. “We’re going to expand its membership to include the sectors that we believe are most critical to job creation, and these are energy and infrastructure, agribusiness, healthcare, tourism, and manufacturing,” Banga explained.

The World Bank has also launched the High-Level Advisory Council on Jobs, co-chaired by Tharman Shanmugaratnam, President of the Republic of Singapore, and Michelle Bachelet, former President of the Republic of Chile. This Council, Banga noted, aims to create more employment opportunities and strengthen efforts to address the global jobs crisis.

Job creation, according to Banga, has become the cornerstone of the World Bank’s development agenda. He underscored that over the next decade, 1.2 billion young people are expected to enter the workforce in developing countries. However, current projections show that these economies are only expected to generate 420 million jobs, creating a significant gap in employment opportunities. “And that gap is not just an economic issue. I think it’s a global risk, because without opportunity, the forces of fragility, of illegal migration, of instability, these forces grow stronger,” Banga warned.

In response to questions about the potential impact of reciprocal tariffs under President Donald Trump’s administration, Banga expressed uncertainty. “I don’t know how to predict the timeline, because what I don’t know is how quickly you get to resolution on some of these specific country-by-country negotiations,” he said. Despite the uncertainty, Banga emphasized the importance of sustained dialogue and negotiation. He added that the quicker countries can resolve such issues, the better, and urged nations to continue engaging in regional and bilateral trade agreements with cooperative partners.

Banga acknowledged that the current geopolitical volatility and uncertainty are contributing to a more cautious investment environment. “I think that’s going to affect how governments and businesses make their investment decisions right now. But meanwhile, interestingly, developing economies are playing a far more central role in global trade than they did, say, two decades ago,” he noted.

He explained that countries dependent on export-led growth, especially those relying on commodities or manufactured goods, are particularly vulnerable to disruptions in global trade. However, Banga emphasized that these countries still have policy tools at their disposal to help navigate uncertainty and build long-term resilience. As an example, he pointed out that many developing countries maintain higher tariffs than their advanced counterparts, especially on key imports.

“I think that creates a real risk of reciprocal tariffs and, most importantly, lost competitiveness. So a broad-based liberalization, not just with favorite partners, can help offset these risks and actually expand market access,” Banga said. He also highlighted that trade among developing nations is on the rise, with nearly half of exports from these economies now going to other emerging markets. Banga noted that more efficient border processes, reduced trade costs, clearer rules of origin, and decreased friction can significantly boost trade volumes while fostering stable and diversified growth.

Despite acknowledging the uncertainty surrounding global economic growth, Banga expressed confidence in the World Bank’s ability to respond to challenges. He drew on the institution’s experience during past global crises, such as the COVID-19 pandemic and the 2008-09 financial crisis, to assure that the Bank, in collaboration with the IMF and regional partners, will continue to provide essential technical support, financing, and infrastructure assistance. These efforts, he said, will enhance productivity and promote trade in emerging markets.

Reflecting on the World Bank’s founding purpose, Banga reminded that the institution was established to foster a more stable and prosperous global economy, with the aim of avoiding conflicts. “This was a charity. It was a calculated investment in the global economic architecture, one that I believe has paid off many times over in these 80 years,” he said. He highlighted the significant work of the Bank’s five arms: the International Bank for Reconstruction and Development (IBRD), the International Development Association (IDA), the International Finance Corporation (IFC), the Multilateral Investment Guarantee Agency (MIGA), and the International Centre for Settlement of Investment Disputes (ICSID).

“There’s no other institution that brings all of this together in one place, and that’s what makes the World Bank Group uniquely positioned to support countries and investors across the entire development journey,” Banga emphasized. He went on to assert that the World Bank Group remains a smart investment for governments, taxpayers, and the private sector alike. “We’re on the move. We’re trying to change things here and look to deploy proven tools to unlock growth, to reduce fragility, and generate returns for people, for businesses and for the global economy,” he said.

Reaffirming the World Bank’s commitment to creating meaningful and sustainable employment opportunities, Banga concluded, “The idea is to build a Bank that delivers what is demanded – jobs, because jobs are the best way to drive a nail in the coffin of poverty.”

Trump’s Tariff Fluctuations Leave Tech Industry Reeling Amid Trade War Uncertainty

The Trump administration’s shifting stance on tariffs for technology products has sparked widespread confusion in an industry deeply entangled in global supply chains. While tech companies initially welcomed a temporary reprieve from tariffs, the White House quickly signaled that many of those products might still be targeted, leaving businesses scrambling to adapt.

On Friday, the technology sector appeared to catch a break when the Trump administration announced that electronic goods would be exempt from the “reciprocal” tariffs. However, by Sunday, President Trump indicated that many of these same products could still be affected by the upcoming sector-specific tariffs.

These abrupt changes have created significant instability for technology companies, which now must make critical decisions about manufacturing and logistics under rapidly shifting policy conditions.

“It’s creating an awful lot of chaos at the moment. A lot of uncertainty,” said Rob Handfield, a supply chain management professor at North Carolina State University.

Over the past month, the course of Trump’s trade war has shifted several times, but the last two weeks have brought the most notable changes for tech firms. On a single Wednesday, the administration introduced steep tariff increases on nearly all U.S. trading partners. Later that same day, Trump implemented a 90-day delay on these increases after global market shares took a nosedive, reverting most tariff rates to a baseline of 10 percent.

Yet China, central to the ongoing trade conflict, was excluded from this pause. This exclusion was particularly troubling for tech companies dependent on Chinese factories and materials. As a result, the U.S. imposed a steep 145 percent tariff on Chinese imports, prompting China to retaliate with a 125 percent tariff on U.S. products.

Amid this tit-for-tat escalation, the Customs and Border Protection agency posted new guidance last Friday exempting about 20 tech-related products from tariffs. This list included essential consumer electronics like smartphones, computers, routers, and semiconductor chips. The move was met with applause from tech firms and consumers relieved to avoid higher electronics prices.

However, that optimism was short-lived. Two days later, Commerce Secretary Howard Lutnick clarified that the exemption was not permanent. “This is not like a permanent sort of exemption,” Lutnick said on ABC News’s “This Week.” “[Trump’s] just clarifying that these are not available to be negotiated away by countries. These are things that are national security, that we need to be made in America.”

President Trump echoed this sentiment later on Sunday, revealing plans to introduce tariffs specifically on semiconductors—a category that would likely encompass many of the products temporarily exempted.

When questioned on Monday about whether Apple products might receive exemptions, Trump didn’t offer a clear answer but instead emphasized his adaptable approach to the tariff situation. “Look, I’m a very flexible person. I don’t change my mind, but I’m flexible. And you have to be. You just can’t have a wall, and you’ll only go — no, sometimes you have to go around it, under it or above it,” Trump explained.

He also noted his ongoing discussions with Apple CEO Tim Cook. “There’ll be maybe things coming up. I speak to Tim Cook; I helped Tim Cook recently, and that whole business. I don’t want to hurt anybody,” Trump added.

The White House also confirmed plans to launch a Section 232 investigation into electronics imports, laying the legal groundwork for semiconductor tariffs. A Section 232 probe allows the Commerce Department to evaluate the national security risks posed by imported goods.

Defending the administration’s approach on Monday, White House spokesperson Kush Desai stated, “By implementing a historic 125 percent reciprocal tariff on China while pursuing a Section 232 investigation on electronics imports, President Trump is taking a nuanced, strategic approach to combat China’s unfair trade practices and reshore the high-tech manufacturing that is critical to our national and economic security.”

Desai added that this approach would bolster ongoing efforts to drive domestic investment in electronics and semiconductors. “This approach will build on the hundreds of billions of dollars’ worth of electronics and semiconductor investment commitments that the administration has secured without letting China exploit loopholes to keep undermining American industries and workers,” he said.

For companies caught in the crosshairs of this tariff conflict, the lack of clarity has made planning extremely difficult. “Companies cherish stability, predictability, certainty in the business environment and that applies not just to trade policy, but institutionally, programmatically, regulatorily, etc.,” said Stephen Ezell, vice president for global innovation policy at the Information Technology and Innovation Foundation.

While most firms have remained quiet about their contingency plans, some have made their adjustments public. Nintendo, for instance, moved part of its manufacturing out of China and recently announced a delay in preorders for its upcoming Switch 2 console. The company said it was evaluating “the potential impact of tariffs and evolving market conditions.”

Tesla, Elon Musk’s electric vehicle company, also suspended sales of some models in China following the imposition of retaliatory tariffs, although it did not officially confirm that trade tensions were the cause.

Ezell believes that many companies will proceed cautiously until the final shape of the tariffs and trade deals is clear. “Until there is more clarity on the final contours of the tariffs and trade relationship,” he noted, companies are likely to remain in a holding pattern.

Handfield, who also serves as the executive director of the Supply Chain Resource Cooperative, said that firms are engaging in scenario planning. “What if tariffs go to X? What if they go to Y? What if we move this facility over here?” he said. “So they’re starting to look at the potential impacts, they’re not going to make any major decisions until things stabilize a little bit.”

According to experts, more stable trade negotiations and concrete outcomes would prompt companies to invest again. “Are you going to make an investment until you know what the outcome of the negotiation is? Probably not,” Ezell explained. “The more this is unclear, the more this is open, that this is prone to change, it will have a dampening effect on investment.”

Still, he acknowledged that some artificial intelligence companies may act quickly when opportunities arise. “That said, AI companies are always evaluating the day-to-day environments and if they see a strategic opportunity to make a move, they probably will,” he said.

Chipmaker Nvidia offered a rare example of decisive action in the current climate. On Monday, the company announced plans to produce up to $500 billion worth of AI chips and supercomputers in the U.S. over the next four years. Trump celebrated the move, saying, “without tariffs, they wouldn’t be doing it,” although Ezell pointed out Nvidia’s financial strength made it uniquely positioned to take such a step.

In the broader business world, however, the unpredictability of the administration’s policies has led to open frustration. DHL Group CEO Tobias Meyer remarked during a Bloomberg Television interview, “They don’t know, even if something is announced, whether two days later it’s not changed again. You really see some fatigue of decision makers in manufacturing and also in the distribution sector.”

Kevin O’Leary, an investor and Trump ally known for his role on “Shark Tank,” also criticized the administration’s inconsistent messaging. “It’s a little chaotic from the point of view that you don’t get a consistent message out of the administration. I admit that’s a problem,” O’Leary told Fox Business Network on Monday.

Scientists Investigate India’s Slower Warming Amid Global Heat Surge

At a recent climate change conference in India, scientists presented a striking visual. A global map displayed how 2024 temperatures diverged from historical norms, with deep red hues indicating temperature increases of 1°C to 2°C across many regions. Yet, amid this sea of red, India appeared as a conspicuous pale spot—suggesting significantly less warming.

Despite enduring back-to-back years of blistering heat and record-breaking temperatures, India has experienced a smaller increase in average annual temperatures than much of the world. Since 1901, the country’s mean temperature has risen by less than 0.7°C, which is about half of the global average. This finding may come as a surprise to many Indians bracing for another scorching summer.

The reasons behind this slower rate of warming remain unclear. The climate change conference, jointly hosted by the Indian Ministry of Environment and Harvard University, showcased various hypotheses but underscored that the phenomenon is still not fully understood. Although it’s known that tropical regions generally warm at a slower pace than the poles, other India-specific factors may be at play, such as air pollution and extensive irrigation. “I don’t think this is yet sufficiently settled,” said Peter Huybers, a climate scientist at Harvard. He emphasized that gaining clarity on this issue could greatly benefit India’s future climate planning.

One leading theory centers on air pollution. The Indo-Gangetic Plain, stretching from Pakistan through northern India to Bangladesh, is one of the most densely populated regions in the world. It suffers from severe air pollution due to a combination of industrial activities, traffic emissions, dust, cooking methods, and agricultural fires. This pollution includes aerosols that reflect sunlight, which could be contributing to regional cooling. Worldwide, similar pollution has been credited with partially offsetting the warming effects of greenhouse gases throughout the 20th century.

Recent studies suggest that as pollution levels decline, warming may accelerate. A 2024 study supported this idea, and another found that pollution reduction efforts in China raised average temperatures by 0.1°C between 2013 and 2019. These findings highlight a paradox: while India desperately needs to improve its air quality to prevent the over 1 million pollution-linked deaths annually, such cleanup efforts might inadvertently speed up the pace of warming.

During the conference, American climate experts drew attention when they predicted that India could warm twice as quickly in the coming decades. However, not all scientists are convinced that pollution is the primary factor behind India’s slower warming. Aerosol pollution in India includes high levels of soot, which, unlike other particles that reflect sunlight, actually absorb it and contribute to warming. Raghu Murtugudde, a professor emeritus at the University of Maryland now based in Mumbai, explained that the overall effect of aerosols remains ambiguous. “It’s not yet clear whether the net impact of aerosols is cooling or warming,” he noted. While satellite data point to a net cooling effect, ground-level observations haven’t confirmed this trend.

Moreover, Murtugudde pointed out a seasonal discrepancy that complicates the pollution theory. The winter months in India—when aerosol levels peak—have also witnessed the most significant warming. “Aerosols don’t seem to explain the seasonal pattern,” he said.

Murtugudde suggests that changes in wind patterns may offer another explanation. In a 2023 study, he and colleagues observed that accelerated warming over the Middle East has pulled monsoon winds northward over the Arabian Sea. This shift has been linked to increased rainfall and flooding in regions like Pakistan and northwestern India, which are traditionally dry. He is now exploring whether similar wind changes during other seasons might contribute to India’s relatively muted warming trend.

Another factor that may be influencing India’s climate is the large-scale expansion of irrigation in the northern part of the country. Irrigation increases evapotranspiration—the combined process of water evaporating from soil and transpiring from plants—which absorbs heat and cools the air. A 2016 study co-authored by Huybers found that this mechanism had cooled peak summer temperatures in the U.S. Midwest. A 2020 study reached a similar conclusion globally, emphasizing that irrigation particularly dampened warming over South Asia.

Still, the irrigation hypothesis is not universally accepted. Some Indian scientists argue that estimates based on satellite imagery and global datasets may be exaggerating the amount of water used for irrigation in northern India, particularly during summer when ground-based measurements show lower irrigation levels. This discrepancy raises doubts about whether irrigation can fully explain the observed temperature trends.

Govindasamy Bala, a professor at the Centre for Atmospheric and Oceanic Sciences at the Indian Institute of Science, remains skeptical of all these theories. According to Bala, there is no mystery. He believes India’s slower warming is simply a function of its geographic location in the humid tropics and natural variability within the climate system. While pollution and irrigation might have local effects, he argues, they are not significant at the national scale. “They could also be just noise,” Bala said.

To unravel the underlying causes, more targeted research is needed. “Untangling these factors will require a focused study to understand how they interact and evolve over time,” said Huybers. Murtugudde added that the reason the slower warming seems puzzling is “only because we haven’t paid attention.”

Indeed, scientific efforts have largely concentrated on the extremes of India’s climate—such as the increasingly deadly summer heat waves. Last summer alone, heat waves claimed more than 700 lives, according to one estimate. There is no doubt among experts that future summers will be even more dangerous.

However, better understanding of the historical climate trend in India could lead to more accurate projections and improved preparation. Even if India has warmed less than other nations so far, the trajectory may shift rapidly as environmental policies evolve and natural systems adjust.

In a world grappling with rising temperatures, India’s anomalously slow warming pattern offers both a mystery and a potential guide. By deciphering this phenomenon, scientists hope to equip the country—and perhaps others in similar climatic zones—with the tools to navigate an uncertain future.

Small Businesses Sue Trump Over New Tariffs, Claim Illegal Use of Emergency Powers

Five small businesses from different parts of the United States have filed a lawsuit against President Donald Trump, challenging the legality of the new tariffs he recently imposed on foreign imports. The lawsuit, filed on Monday in the U.S. Court of International Trade, argues that Trump exceeded his presidential authority by declaring an economic emergency based on trade deficits and unilaterally levying tariffs without Congressional approval.

The complaint contends that the administration’s reasoning lacks any constitutional or legislative backing. According to the suit, “Congress has not delegated any such power. The statute the President invokes — the International Emergency Economic Powers Act (‘IEEPA’) — does not authorize the President to unilaterally issue across-the-board worldwide tariffs.” This legal move marks a significant challenge to Trump’s trade policy, which the plaintiffs argue is both economically damaging and legally unsound.

Representing the businesses in the lawsuit is the Liberty Justice Center, a legal advocacy organization that has taken up the case on behalf of the small companies. These businesses, the center claims, are suffering due to the tariffs, which impose at least a 10 percent increase on most foreign imports and even higher rates on products from numerous countries. The Liberty Justice Center emphasizes that the burden of these tariffs falls most heavily on small, owner-operated companies that lack the financial resources to absorb such added costs.

“His claimed emergency is a figment of his own imagination: trade deficits, which have persisted for decades without causing economic harm, are not an emergency,” the lawsuit states. This quote underscores the plaintiffs’ argument that Trump’s justification lacks substance and historical precedent. The suit goes on to explain that the idea of a trade deficit being an “unusual and extraordinary threat” — as required under the IEEPA for such presidential action — simply does not hold up to scrutiny.

Another major point raised in the complaint is the inconsistency of the tariff policy. The plaintiffs note that the Trump administration did not limit the tariffs to countries with which the U.S. runs trade deficits. Instead, they imposed tariffs on nations even where no such deficit exists. This, they argue, further undermines the legitimacy of the emergency claim and the rationale for the tariffs. “The Liberty Justice Center noted that the Trump administration imposed tariffs even on countries with which the United States does not have a trade deficit, ‘further undermining the administration’s justification.’”

According to the plaintiffs, this is not only a policy misstep but a violation of constitutional principles. “This Court should declare the President’s unprecedented power grab illegal, enjoin the operation of the executive actions that purport to impose these tariffs under the IEEPA and reaffirm this country’s core founding principle: there shall be no taxation without representation,” the suit declares. This echoes the foundational American belief that taxing authority rests with elected representatives in Congress, not the executive branch acting alone.

The businesses taking legal action are diverse in nature and located in different states, but all share a common problem: the added financial pressure from the tariffs threatens their viability. Among the plaintiffs is VOS Selections, a New York-based importer and distributor of small-production wines, spirits, and sakes. Also included is FishUSA, a Pennsylvania company that operates a retail and wholesale e-commerce business specializing in sportfishing gear and accessories.

Utah-based Genova Pipe, which manufactures plastic piping and related materials used in plumbing, electrical, and irrigation systems, has also joined the suit. MicroKits LLC, located in Virginia, makes educational electronic kits and musical instruments and claims the tariffs are undercutting their profitability. Finally, Terry Precision Cycling, a Vermont-based producer of women’s cycling apparel, is another plaintiff that has reportedly already felt the sting of Trump’s tariff policy.

The lawsuit provides a detailed account of how these tariffs have affected Terry Precision Cycling financially. “Terry Cycling has already paid $25,000 in unplanned tariffs this year for goods for which Terry was the importer of record, and Terry projects that the tariffs will cost the company approximately $250,000 by the end of 2025,” it states. This figure represents a significant cost for a small business and indicates the scale of disruption that the policy is inflicting.

Looking ahead, the outlook is even more alarming for the company. “Terry Cycling in 2026 expects to face an estimated $1.2 million in tariff costs — an amount that is simply not survivable for a business of its size,” the lawsuit continues. The owners argue that such a financial burden is disproportionate and potentially fatal for a small enterprise, and they are seeking judicial relief to avoid a scenario in which they are forced out of business.

The lawsuit aims to not only reverse the tariffs but also to challenge the broader principle of presidential overreach. The plaintiffs and their legal team assert that Trump’s invocation of emergency powers is unjustified and could set a dangerous precedent if left unchecked. They are calling on the court to invalidate the executive orders and restore the constitutional balance of power between Congress and the president.

As of now, the White House has not commented on the lawsuit. CNBC has reportedly reached out for a statement, but no response has been given. The silence leaves open the question of how the current administration will respond to a legal case that centers on actions taken by Trump during his time in office.

This case could have significant implications for future trade policy and the use of emergency powers by presidents. If the court sides with the plaintiffs, it could place new limits on how far executive authority can go in matters of economic policy. Conversely, a ruling in favor of Trump’s actions could reinforce the expanding role of the presidency in areas traditionally governed by Congress.

In the meantime, the five small businesses continue to struggle with the immediate impact of the tariffs. Their hope is that the legal system will provide the relief they need to survive and that the lawsuit will prompt a broader discussion about the balance of power in American government. Whether or not the court agrees, the outcome of this case is likely to influence the boundaries of executive power for years to come.

Harvard Refuses Federal Demands Despite Threat to Billions in Research Funding

Harvard University has announced it will not comply with new requirements from the Trump administration, even though the decision could cost the school billions in federal grants and contracts used for research in vital scientific and medical fields. Harvard President Alan M. Garber declared the university’s position in a strongly worded letter sent to the campus community on Monday, emphasizing that government overreach threatens academic independence and violates constitutional principles.

Garber made it clear that the university would not accept a proposed agreement from the federal government, which he says imposes regulations on academic freedom and the ideological orientation of Harvard’s faculty, staff, and students. “No government… should dictate what private universities can teach, whom they can admit and hire, and areas of study and inquiry they can pursue,” Garber stated in his letter.

For more than 75 years, Garber said, the U.S. government has partnered with universities like Harvard by awarding grants and contracts to help finance innovative research in various disciplines. This collaboration, combined with internal university investment, has produced groundbreaking advancements in medicine, engineering, and science. “These innovations have made countless people in our country and throughout the world healthier and safer,” he noted.

However, Garber said that in recent weeks, the government has been threatening to withdraw funding from several academic institutions, including Harvard, accusing them of allowing antisemitism to flourish on campus. He called these partnerships “among the most productive and beneficial in American history.”

Garber highlighted the type of research at risk, citing Harvard’s contributions to developing treatments for Alzheimer’s, Parkinson’s disease, and diabetes, along with major progress in artificial intelligence, quantum science, and engineering. He warned that cutting off support would endanger the health of millions and jeopardize national economic and technological strength. “The federal government was risking not just the health and well-being of millions of individuals by retreating from partnerships with Harvard and other universities, but also the economic security and vitality of the country,” he said.

Late last week, the Trump administration issued a revised and expanded list of conditions that Harvard must fulfill to preserve its financial relationship with the federal government. According to Garber, the new list made it clear that the goal was not genuine cooperation to fight antisemitism but rather to control the university’s academic environment. “Although some of the demands outlined by the government are aimed at combating antisemitism, the majority represent direct governmental regulation of the ‘intellectual conditions’ at Harvard,” Garber wrote.

Among the new demands, the administration has asked the university to audit the beliefs and opinions of its student body, staff, and faculty. Additionally, it called for Harvard to reduce the influence of individuals who hold certain ideological positions. Garber found such requests unacceptable and said Harvard had informed the administration through legal counsel that it would not comply.

“We have informed the administration through our legal counsel that we will not accept their proposed agreement,” he declared. “The University will not negotiate over its independence or its constitutional rights.” He further stated that the administration’s demands “go beyond the power of the federal government,” violate First Amendment rights, and surpass the legal authority allowed under Title VI of the Civil Rights Act.

Garber emphasized that Harvard remains committed to combating antisemitism but will do so on its own terms and in a way that upholds its institutional values. He acknowledged the university’s moral responsibility in addressing antisemitism and said the administration’s tactics do not help meet that responsibility. “The administration’s prescription… threatens our values as a private institution devoted to the pursuit, production, and dissemination of knowledge,” he said.

He noted that over the past 15 months, Harvard has implemented various initiatives to address antisemitism on campus and that further actions are planned. Garber stressed the university’s commitment to promoting an environment of open debate and intellectual diversity. This includes respecting freedom of expression and peaceful protest, as long as it does not disrupt academic life. He also expressed a desire to foster a welcoming campus culture that embraces differing perspectives.

“We will continue to nurture a thriving culture of open inquiry on campus and broaden the intellectual and viewpoint diversity within the community,” Garber said. “The university will respect free speech and dissent while also ensuring protest occurs in a time, place and manner that does not interfere with teaching, learning and research.” He added that Harvard would seek legal and appropriate ways to build a community that “exemplifies, respects and embraces differences.”

Garber argued that the responsibility for addressing institutional shortcomings lies within the university, not with federal authorities. “These ends will not be achieved by assertions of power, unmoored from the law, to control teaching and learning at Harvard and to dictate how we operate,” he said. “The work of addressing our shortcomings, fulfilling our commitments, and embodying our values is ours to define and undertake as a community.”

He concluded his message by reaffirming Harvard’s belief in academic freedom and the university’s role in advancing society through independent research and education. “Freedom of thought and inquiry, along with the government’s longstanding commitment to respect and protect it, has enabled universities to contribute in vital ways to a free society and to healthier, more prosperous lives for people everywhere,” Garber wrote. “We proceed now, as always, with the conviction that the fearless and unfettered pursuit of truth liberates humanity—and with faith in the enduring promise that America’s colleges and universities hold for our country and our world.”

The standoff with Harvard comes as the Trump administration escalates its crackdown on antisemitism in higher education. Since October 2023, the administration has suspended federal funding to nearly every Ivy League school, except the University of Pennsylvania and Dartmouth, due to ongoing investigations into anti-Israel demonstrations on campus.

Columbia University was the first to lose federal support, with more than $400 million in funding withdrawn after it was determined that Jewish students did not feel safe on campus. Columbia later complied with administration demands in hopes of having its funding restored.

Earlier this month, a federal task force on antisemitism began reviewing Harvard’s nearly $9 billion in federal grants and contracts as part of an ongoing investigation into how the university has handled antisemitism on campus.

The Trump administration has committed to taking a more aggressive approach to addressing campus antisemitism, criticizing President Joe Biden for what it sees as leniency toward violent campus protests. In addition, the administration has taken steps to identify, detain, and deport foreign students who have been involved in organizing or participating in anti-Israel protests at U.S. universities.

Trump Urges FCC to Punish CBS Over “60 Minutes” Broadcasts Critical of Him

President Donald Trump has expressed a desire that the Federal Communications Commission take action against CBS over what he perceives as biased reporting from the network’s flagship program, “60 Minutes.”

Trump, apparently displeased with the latest episode of “60 Minutes” aired Sunday night, took to Truth Social to air his frustrations. His remarks highlighted his ongoing legal clash with CBS and its parent company, Paramount Global, which is currently waiting for the FCC to approve a planned merger with Skydance Media.

In his social media post, Trump specifically mentioned Brendan Carr, whom he appointed to the FCC and praised as “Highly Respected.” Trump said he hopes Carr “will impose the maximum fines and punishment, which is substantial, for their unlawful and illegal behavior.”

However, there is no indication that CBS has committed any illegal acts. Moreover, Carr has limited power to impose penalties on the network. The most the FCC can currently do is delay the merger’s approval, which has already added a layer of uncertainty for Paramount Global.

This latest post is part of a broader trend in which Trump encourages officials he placed in government roles to take steps against media organizations critical of him. In recent months, Carr has leaned into his pro-Trump stance and has opened FCC probes into several networks Trump has taken issue with, including ABC and NBC. Carr was even seen last week sporting a gold pin that depicted the silhouette of Trump’s head.

Carr has not commented on Trump’s latest post on Truth Social, despite inquiries from CNN.

Trump’s issue with “60 Minutes” goes beyond this week’s broadcast. He used his social media platform to accuse the show of being more of a political tool than a legitimate news program. “They are not a ‘News Show,’ but a dishonest Political Operative simply disguised as ‘News,’ and must be responsible for what they have done, and are doing,” Trump wrote.

He further claimed that CBS “should lose their license” after airing two reports on Sunday—one centered on the war in Ukraine and another focusing on Greenland. Although the FCC does not license national networks like CBS, it does regulate local stations owned by the network. During the 2024 campaign, Trump frequently called for licenses to be revoked from media outlets he disliked.

This isn’t the first time Trump has made such a suggestion since assuming office. In fact, CBS has been a recurring target of his licensing threats.

Trump has had a complicated relationship with “60 Minutes” over the years. Despite being a regular viewer, he has often taken issue with how the show covers him. Last fall, he refused the program’s customary pre-election interview. When Vice President Kamala Harris agreed to appear on the show in his absence, Trump took offense.

Trump and his media allies criticized CBS for what they considered misleading editing of Harris’s interview. Specifically, they were upset that the network aired parts of her answer on different days. CBS defended the decision, saying the interview was edited for length in line with standard news practices. Trump, however, characterized the move as a deliberate attempt to help Harris’s campaign.

In response, Trump filed a lawsuit in Texas, accusing CBS of violating the state’s Deceptive Trade Practices Act, a consumer protection statute. Legal experts widely dismissed the lawsuit as lacking merit, viewing it more as a political maneuver than a serious legal challenge.

Despite the frivolous nature of the case, some executives at Paramount began looking into ways to settle the matter, even as journalists at “60 Minutes” strongly opposed such a move.

CBS complied with the FCC by submitting the raw transcript and video of the Harris interview, clearly demonstrating that the editing followed typical broadcast standards. Nonetheless, Carr kept the investigation ongoing and opened it up for public comment.

While no settlement has yet been reached, some insiders at Paramount reportedly feel it might be in the company’s interest to avoid an extended legal standoff with Trump. The New York Times recently noted that some Paramount officials believe the company’s “broader corporate interests are not served by fighting a protracted legal battle” with a combative president.

As of now, the legal dispute remains unresolved, and CBS continues to contest Trump’s claims in court.

In the meantime, “60 Minutes” has not deviated from its editorial mission, continuing to air interviews and investigative reports. Many of these segments have scrutinized Trump’s policies. Even Trump admitted this on Truth Social, stating the program includes stories about him “almost every week,” which he described as “derogatory and defamatory.”

Brendan Nyhan, a political scientist and co-founder of Bright Line Watch, which tracks risks to American democratic institutions, offered his take on Trump’s rhetoric. “The president openly calls for his loyalist apparatchik at the FCC to use state power to punish media for critical coverage,” he said, summarizing Trump’s Truth Social post.

The pressure from Trump and his allies is keenly felt by journalists at CBS. “60 Minutes” correspondent Lesley Stahl acknowledged this during a recent industry event where she accepted a First Amendment Award.

In her speech, Stahl emphasized the importance of press freedom during such contentious times. “Our precious First Amendment feels vulnerable and when my precious 60 Minutes is fighting, quite frankly, for our life,” she said.

Stahl added that she was proud the program was maintaining its journalistic integrity in the face of mounting external pressures. “I am so proud,” she said, that “60 Minutes” is “standing up and fighting for what is right.”

With Trump remaining vocal about his discontent with the press and his attempts to use regulatory bodies as leverage against critics, the standoff between the president and the media appears far from over. CBS and “60 Minutes” continue to find themselves at the center of this battle, defending both their editorial decisions and the principles of a free press.

America Dominates List of World’s Best Hospitals in 2025 Ranking

American hospitals have earned a prominent place among the world’s top medical institutions, according to the recently published World’s Best Hospitals 2025 ranking by Newsweek in collaboration with Statista, a global data research firm.

This comprehensive list spans more than 2,400 hospitals from 30 different nations. While each country’s ranking is tailored to local data and methodology, Newsweek’s overall Global Top 250 brings together the best hospitals from across all participating countries, creating a definitive list of the world’s top medical centers.

In this elite group, the Mayo Clinic in Minnesota claimed the number one position globally, with the Cleveland Clinic in Ohio following as the second-best. Also featured prominently in the Global Top 10 were the Johns Hopkins Hospital in Maryland and Massachusetts General Hospital in Massachusetts, underscoring the dominance of U.S. healthcare facilities.

Hospitals in this ranking were evaluated using a multi-faceted scoring system that incorporated insights from over 85,000 healthcare professionals through peer surveys. These assessments were combined with patient experience information, institutional performance indicators, and findings from Statista’s Patient-Reported Outcome Measures (PROM) survey. This PROM component evaluates how hospitals use patient feedback to improve their quality of care. Criteria ranged from patient ratings and staff courtesy to accreditation and even the standard of cafeteria food.

Lukas Kwietniewski of Statista emphasized the evolving priorities in modern healthcare when speaking to Newsweek’s Health Care Editor Alexis Kayser in a February interview. “We have a long-term plan that we want to follow the trends that are going on in healthcare, not only nationally, but also internationally,” Kwietniewski said. “There is a shift towards patient-centered care. It has been ongoing now for at least a decade and that is also what leading hospitals are more and more aspiring to deliver – to have that patient centricity.”

The United States stands out in this global evaluation with a staggering 430 hospitals making the rankings—the highest of any country featured. The Top 10 U.S. hospitals, which include several recurring names known for their cutting-edge research and exceptional patient care, are as follows:

Mayo Clinic in Rochester, Minnesota

Cleveland Clinic in Cleveland, Ohio

The Johns Hopkins Hospital in Baltimore, Maryland

Massachusetts General Hospital in Boston, Massachusetts

Ronald Reagan UCLA Medical Center in Los Angeles, California

Stanford Health Care – Stanford Hospital in Stanford, California

The Mount Sinai Hospital in New York, New York

Brigham and Women’s Hospital in Boston, Massachusetts

Cedars-Sinai Medical Center in Los Angeles, California

Northwestern Memorial Hospital in Chicago, Illinois

An accompanying infographic highlights how hospitals are distributed by state, with California leading the nation. The Golden State boasts 41 hospitals on the U.S. list—more than any other state. Texas follows with 29 hospitals, trailed by Pennsylvania at 26, Illinois with 21, and both Ohio and Florida with 20 each.

Unsurprisingly, many of the highest-ranked hospitals in these states are either part of expansive healthcare systems or affiliated with prestigious universities. For example, Ronald Reagan UCLA Medical Center is California’s top-rated institution, while Northwestern Memorial Hospital ranks highest in Illinois. In Pennsylvania, the Hospital of the University of Pennsylvania holds the top spot.

Cleveland Clinic, recognized as the world’s second-best hospital, leads Ohio’s healthcare landscape. Florida’s highest-ranked facility is the Mayo Clinic in Jacksonville, a regional branch of the globally top-ranked institution in Minnesota.

Interestingly, three U.S. states—Nevada, Mississippi, and Vermont—were not assessed and therefore have no hospitals represented in this year’s global ranking.

Each country’s list in the World’s Best Hospitals 2025 ranking was generated based on the best data available within that nation. The elements considered include patient satisfaction, quality of care indicators, and staffing statistics, though the depth and type of available data vary greatly from one country to another. As a result, the methodologies for ranking hospitals differ by country, with the overall goal of making each list as accurate and locally relevant as possible.

In the United States, data was drawn from multiple public sources to ensure a reliable assessment. According to the American Hospital Association, there are currently 6,120 hospitals in the U.S., most of which are categorized as non-federal, short-term general hospitals. These encompass nonprofit organizations, private companies, and institutions managed by state or local governments.

To develop the U.S. ranking, Statista relied heavily on metrics from the Medicare “Hospital Compare” dataset, a tool published by the Centers for Medicare & Medicaid Services (CMS). CMS evaluates hospital performance using a range of indicators including mortality rates, safety of care, readmission rates, patient experience, and the timeliness and effectiveness of treatments.

Patient satisfaction was gauged through responses collected in October 2024 as part of Medicare’s Hospital Consumer Assessment of Healthcare Providers and Systems (HCAHPS) survey. Notably, this year marked the first time the CMS data on Health Equity and Patient Reported Outcomes were incorporated into the World’s Best Hospitals ranking, further enriching the evaluation framework.

American hospitals have once again demonstrated their leadership in global healthcare through a combination of cutting-edge research, patient-centered approaches, and rigorous standards. With institutions like the Mayo Clinic and Cleveland Clinic not only topping U.S. lists but also standing tall on the international stage, the 2025 rankings affirm the strength and excellence of the American healthcare system.

Republicans Warn Trump’s Tariffs Could Backfire Politically in 2026 Elections

Republican lawmakers are increasingly concerned that President Trump’s trade war could politically hurt their party in 2026, as the effects of higher prices and slowing economic growth may overshadow other GOP achievements.

Several GOP senators are pointing to past elections—specifically those in 1932 and 1982—as cautionary examples of how trade wars and inflation have previously cost Republicans at the ballot box. They fear that history may repeat itself.

Many in the Republican Party view tariffs as a de facto tax increase on American consumers. Some lawmakers have observed that in the last two major instances when Congress passed tax increases similar in scope to Trump’s recent tariffs, the president’s party experienced heavy electoral losses.

“In the national elections, you can go back to 1982 when I think it was about 26 congressional seats that were lost [by Republicans],” said Sen. Thom Tillis (R-N.C.), who is expected to be one of the top Democratic targets in the upcoming midterms.

That year marked President Reagan’s first midterm election, and Republicans lost 26 seats in the House, largely due to soaring interest rates and widespread public dissatisfaction with the economy. Republicans also lost one Senate seat in that election cycle.

That same year, Congress passed the Tax Equity and Fiscal Responsibility Act. The law raised corporate and excise taxes and enhanced tax compliance, ultimately increasing federal revenues by close to 1 percent, as noted by the nonpartisan Tax Foundation.

“No doubt, if we’re having the same discussions about tariffs in February of next year, all the indicators would be ‘wrong track,’” Tillis added.

He emphasized that the Trump administration must deliver on its promises of beneficial trade agreements by February of the following year or risk facing significant political consequences.

“They’ve got about 10 months to wrap a bow around this and say, ‘See, I told you so,’ or you’re going to start seeing political headwinds,” Tillis warned.

Another significant election in Republican memory is from 1994, when the GOP made a massive gain—winning 54 seats in the House and eight in the Senate—following President Clinton’s signing of the 1993 Omnibus Budget Reconciliation Act, which raised taxes.

According to a report published Friday by the Tax Foundation, Trump’s current tariffs are expected to raise annual government revenue by 0.56 percent of the gross domestic product, representing the largest jump since Clinton’s 1993 tax hike.

Senators were initially relieved when Trump announced a 90-day suspension on most of the steep reciprocal tariffs he had declared against several countries. However, they note that political risks remain high, especially given Trump’s imposition of a 145 percent tariff on Chinese imports, which prompted a retaliatory 125 percent tariff from China on American goods.

While the stock market surged after Trump’s announcement of the 90-day pause, the rally was short-lived. Markets dropped again sharply on Thursday amid ongoing uncertainty over the U.S. economy. By Friday, some of those losses had been reversed.

Lawmakers expressed alarm over the sell-off in the bond markets, viewing it as a troubling signal for the overall economy. Yields on 10-year and 30-year Treasury bonds climbed significantly during the week, reaching as high as 4.59 percent and 4.88 percent respectively, increasing borrowing costs for businesses and consumers.

The 30-year Treasury yield, which heavily influences mortgage rates, experienced its sharpest weekly rise since 1982, according to Yahoo Finance.

A senior Republican aide in the Senate, who spoke on condition of anonymity, cautioned that Trump could undermine his strongest issue going into the 2024 election: the economy, which was the top priority for voters last year.

A Gallup survey published in October showed Trump enjoying a 9-point lead over then-Vice President Kamala Harris in terms of handling the economy.

However, an Economist/YouGov poll released this week revealed that Trump’s approval rating fell by five points compared to the previous week, largely due to the chaos caused by his tariff measures.

The impact of the tariffs has been particularly concerning in agricultural states.

“It’s not good for my farmers,” said Sen. Mike Rounds (R-S.D.) last week, referring to the volatility in stock, bond, and commodity markets.

Rounds, who is running for reelection next year, added, “We’ve got a lot of people that rely on being able to sell our commodities around the world.”

China, Trump’s primary target for tariffs, imported $1.4 billion worth of goods from South Dakota in 2022, the most recent year for which data is available. That figure represents 28 percent of South Dakota’s total goods production.

Several Republicans are drawing comparisons between tariffs and tax hikes—both politically perilous territory in today’s GOP.

“Tariffs are a tax on consumers, and I’m not a fan of jacking up taxes on American consumers,” said Sen. Ted Cruz (R-Texas) during an interview with Fox Business’s Larry Kudlow.

Sen. Rand Paul (R-Ky.) issued a strong warning to fellow Republicans, saying they risk major electoral defeats in the coming year unless they alter their stance on trade. He also warned that current trade policies could lead to a deep economic downturn.

Paul cited the 1930 Smoot-Hawley Tariff Act as a historical parallel. Its two main architects—Sen. Reed Smoot (R-Utah) and Rep. Willis Hawley (R-Ore.)—were both voted out of office in the 1932 election.

Paul believes the tariffs of that era worsened the Great Depression and significantly damaged the Republican Party’s image for decades.

“We went into the wilderness for a long, long time,” he said. “The depression was multifactorial, but most historians have written that that Smoot-Hawley tariff actually made things worse and the depression longer.

“I don’t think the politics are good,” Paul concluded. “The economics of tariffs are bad; the politics, if anything, are worse.”

Senate Democratic Leader Chuck Schumer (D-N.Y.) has also been critical, arguing that Trump’s tariffs are steering the country toward a recession. He claims that the economic downturn is already affecting political sentiment in swing states.

“We are seeing it move the political needle across the country because people have less and less faith in Donald Trump’s handling of the economic policies of this country, plain and simple. We’re seeing it in just about every state, and the numbers continue to get worse for him,” Schumer stated at a recent press conference.

Sen. Susan Collins (R-Maine), another key target for Democrats in 2026, also criticized Trump’s tariffs on allied nations, particularly the 25 percent tariff imposed on Canadian goods.

She told The Hill she opposes tariffs on Canada due to the negative effects on Maine’s economy.

“I never thought that putting tariffs on friendly countries that are our allies is the way to go,” Collins said.

She recalled discussing the issue with Trump’s trade adviser Peter Navarro during the president’s first term.

“I remember [in] the first administration talking with Peter Navarro about the impact on the lobster industry. There are times when tariffs are appropriate. I think China is an example of that. The Canadian tariffs make no sense,” she said. “This is the position I’ve had for a very long time.”

Apple Assembles $22 Billion Worth of iPhones in India Amid Ongoing Shift from China

Apple Inc. has significantly expanded its manufacturing operations in India, assembling iPhones worth $22 billion in the 12 months ending in March. This marks a 60 percent increase in production from the prior year, signaling a strong push to diversify away from China as a primary manufacturing base.

According to sources familiar with the matter, who spoke on condition of anonymity because the information is not public, Apple now manufactures about 20 percent—or one out of every five—of its globally popular iPhones in India. The $22 billion figure refers to the estimated factory gate value of these devices, not their retail price.

This increased output underscores Apple’s strategy to accelerate its shift to Indian production, a move that began gaining momentum when strict Covid-19 lockdowns disrupted operations at its largest manufacturing site in China. The majority of iPhones produced in India are assembled at Foxconn Technology Group’s facility in the southern part of the country. Additionally, Tata Group has become a critical player in this supply chain, with its electronics manufacturing unit acquiring Wistron Corp. and managing Pegatron Corp.’s operations in India.

Apple declined to comment when contacted outside its regular working hours.

India’s technology minister confirmed on April 8 that out of the total production value, Apple exported iPhones worth 1.5 trillion rupees, or approximately $17.4 billion, in the fiscal year ending March 2025.

People with knowledge of the matter noted that shipments of iPhones from India to the United States surged after President Donald Trump introduced the idea of “reciprocal” tariffs in February. These sources added that Apple saw a steady increase in both production and exports from its Indian operations throughout the fiscal year.

As previously reported by Bloomberg News, Apple is expected to increasingly rely on its India-based supply chain to fulfill iPhone demand in the U.S. market.

In a development late Friday, the Trump administration announced an exemption from the new reciprocal tariffs for electronics products, including smartphones and computers. This development benefits tech giants such as Apple and Nvidia Corp., although the exemption does not cover Trump’s separate 20 percent tariff on Chinese imports, which is part of an effort to push China to curb fentanyl exports.

As a result, iPhones manufactured in India will not currently be subjected to any of these reciprocal tariffs. However, except for the few categories exempted recently, Trump’s total tariff load on Chinese goods remains at 145 percent. This pressure is likely to further drive Apple and other companies to quicken the pace of their supply chain relocation efforts.

Nonetheless, Apple’s transition away from China is complicated by its extensive network of nearly 200 suppliers based in the country. This heavy dependency means a full-scale move to alternative locations could take several years. Despite Trump’s stated intention to see Apple manufacture iPhones in the United States, a shift to domestic production remains unlikely in the near future. Challenges such as insufficient facilities and a lack of skilled labor make large-scale U.S. production of iPhones unfeasible for now.

Apple CEO Tim Cook has consistently acknowledged China’s manufacturing expertise when it comes to producing the company’s premium devices. A 2022 analysis by Bloomberg Intelligence suggested that relocating just 10 percent of Apple’s manufacturing capacity from China would take approximately eight years.

Currently, Apple assembles the entire iPhone lineup in India, which includes its top-tier titanium Pro models. The company’s manufacturing efforts in India have received a major boost from government subsidies that are aligned with Prime Minister Narendra Modi’s broader goal of transforming the country into a global manufacturing center.

In line with these ambitions, Modi’s administration is also aiming to expand India’s electronics component manufacturing sector. To that end, the government has unveiled $2.7 billion in new financial incentives and is also advancing plans to strengthen the country’s semiconductor industry.

Apple, which currently holds close to an 8 percent share in India’s smartphone market, generated nearly $8 billion in sales in the country during the 2024 fiscal year. A significant portion of those revenues came from iPhone sales, highlighting India’s growing importance to the tech giant both as a manufacturing base and a consumer market.

Despite being a relatively small player compared to low-cost Android smartphone makers that dominate the Indian market, Apple has been steadily gaining ground. Its brand appeal, coupled with an expanding middle class, makes India a promising market for premium smartphone sales.

As Apple continues to navigate the geopolitical and logistical challenges of global manufacturing, its investments in India appear to be paying off. The blend of strong local partnerships, government incentives, and rising domestic demand has created a favorable environment for the company’s growth in the region.

India’s appeal as a manufacturing alternative has grown in recent years, particularly as multinationals look to mitigate risk by diversifying away from their overdependence on Chinese production. Apple’s recent scale-up in Indian manufacturing suggests that it is increasingly seeing the country not only as a backup option but as a central piece in its future strategy.

Even with the political uncertainties surrounding trade policy in the United States, Apple’s decision to deepen its roots in India reflects a long-term vision to build a more resilient and geographically diverse supply chain.

With a broader iPhone lineup now being assembled in India—including the high-end Pro variants—the country is playing a more crucial role in Apple’s global operations than ever before. As tensions with China persist and protectionist measures in the U.S. continue to evolve, Apple’s strategy to ramp up production in India could set the tone for other tech companies evaluating their own supply chain vulnerabilities.

While the transition is far from complete, Apple’s progress over the past year is a clear indication that India is no longer just an emerging market for sales, but also a vital hub for production. As one industry observer put it, “Apple’s India push is not just about saving costs. It’s about building resilience.”

That resilience will be tested in the years ahead, especially as the company faces a complex matrix of trade tariffs, manufacturing constraints, and the ever-changing global tech landscape. But for now, Apple appears to be on a solid path toward reducing its dependency on China while expanding its footprint in one of the world’s fastest-growing economies.

Trump Administration Sets April 11 Deadline for Foreign Nationals to Register Under Alien Registration Act

Department of Homeland Security Secretary Kristi Noem issued a firm reminder today that all foreign nationals residing in the United States for more than 30 days are required to register under the Alien Registration Act by April 11, 2025. This federal law, which has long been on the books but seldom enforced, mandates that all noncitizens present in the country for over a month must officially register with the government. Noncompliance with this law is considered a criminal offense and may result in fines, imprisonment, or both.

“President Trump and I have a clear message for those in our country illegally: leave now. If you leave now, you may have the opportunity to return and enjoy our freedom and live the American dream,” said Secretary Noem in a public statement. She emphasized that the Trump administration intends to enforce every aspect of the nation’s immigration laws, saying, “The Trump administration will enforce all our immigration laws—we will not pick and choose which laws we will enforce. We must know who is in our country for the safety and security of our homeland and all Americans.”

This announcement follows the signing of Executive Order 14159 by President Donald J. Trump on January 20, 2025. Titled Protecting the American People Against Invasion, the order tasks the Department of Homeland Security with restoring accountability and order within the immigration system. Among its directives is the revival and rigorous enforcement of the Alien Registration Act, a statute that has remainedlargely dormant in recent decades.

The newly established registration requirements apply to all foreign nationals, regardless of their immigration status. Those who have been present in the U.S. for 30 days or longer as of April 11, 2025, and do not have documentation proving registration, are required to register immediately with U.S. Citizenship and Immigration Services (USCIS).

Furthermore, individuals entering the United States on or after April 11, 2025, must register within 30 days of their arrival if they lack evidence of prior registration. The mandate also extends to minors reaching the age of 14 while residing in the U.S. These individuals must re-register and submit their fingerprints within 30 days of their 14th birthday, even if they were registered previously while underage.

Parents and legal guardians are also held responsible for ensuring that any minor under the age of 14 in their care is registered, provided the child remains in the country for at least 30 consecutive days. Once a noncitizen has completed the registration process and submitted their fingerprints, the Department of Homeland Security will issue official proof of registration.

All foreign nationals aged 18 and above are required to carry this documentation with them at all times. This stipulation is part of a broader push by the current administration to reinforce immigration laws and eliminate gaps in enforcement. Secretary Noem made it clear that DHS will not tolerate any sanctuary for those who fail to meet the requirements of this policy. “There will be no sanctuary for noncompliance,” she stated.

The Trump administration has described the policy as a national security measure, arguing that tracking the presence of all foreign nationals within U.S. borders is essential for ensuring the safety of the American people. The message from the White House and DHS is unambiguous: the rules will be applied uniformly and without exception.

The renewed emphasis on the Alien Registration Act is part of a wider immigration agenda that President Trump has pursued since returning to office. His administration has consistently promoted stricter enforcement of immigration laws, increased deportations, and greater scrutiny of noncitizens residing in the United States. The executive order signed in January further underscores this direction, placing a spotlight on the perceived risks posed by individuals who remain in the country without proper documentation or registration.

For many foreign nationals, particularly those without legal status, the registration requirement is likely to raise concerns about possible detention or removal. However, the administration has framed the policy as an opportunity for those who comply to remain on a lawful path. Secretary Noem’s comments suggested that early compliance could influence future immigration outcomes for some individuals. “If you leave now, you may have the opportunity to return and enjoy our freedom and live the American dream,” she said, reiterating that voluntary departure might be more favorable than facing enforcement action.

The DHS has not released specific data on how many foreign nationals are currently out of compliance with the Alien Registration Act, but officials have indicated that the department is prepared to take enforcement action after the April 11 deadline. With the issuance of proof of registration and the requirement to carry it at all times, authorities expect to have the means to quickly identify those who fail to meet the standard.

The reimplementation of this policy also places added responsibility on immigration attorneys, nonprofit organizations, and advocacy groups that work with immigrant communities. Many will likely need to step up their efforts to inform clients and vulnerable populations about the new requirements, ensuring they understand their obligations and the consequences of inaction.

The administration’s strict timeline means that foreign nationals who fall under the law’s purview must act quickly. The April 11 cutoff is firm, and officials have indicated there will be no extensions. After that date, those who are not registered and cannot provide documentation may face immediate consequences under federal law.

As DHS continues to roll out the enforcement mechanisms associated with this policy, additional guidance is expected from USCIS and other relevant agencies. In the meantime, affected individuals are advised to consult official government websites or qualified legal professionals to ensure they complete the registration process correctly and on time.

Secretary Noem closed her statement by emphasizing the importance of national unity and the rule of law. “We must know who is in our country for the safety and security of our homeland and all Americans,” she said. The Trump administration’s messaging has centered around the principle that the laws on the books should be upheld fully, and that no one—regardless of their country of origin or immigration status—is exempt from accountability.

With less than a month remaining before the registration deadline, DHS is urging all noncitizens who qualify to take action immediately. Compliance with the Alien Registration Act is now a top priority for federal immigration enforcement, and failure to act could have serious legal consequences for those affected.

ITServe Alliance’s Capitol Hill Day Planned for June 11th, 2025

“ITServe Alliance has planned to organize our next in-person Capitol Hill Day in Washington, DC on June 11th, 2025,” said Sateesh Reddy Nagilla, Director of ITServe Alliance Policy Advocacy Committee (PAC) & Immigration. “The conference will have participation by over 150 US Representatives and Senators, including influential committee chairs and members, whose decisions impact our businesses. The daylong event will feature Capitol Hill Meetings and interactive sessions with US Congressmen and Senators.”

Capitol Hill Day is being organized with the objective of showcasing to the lawmakers some of the significant contributions of the ITServe members to the country’s economy through Technology & Innovation, local employment, and STEM education. The event will also highlight key concerns faced by small businesses, including the need for high-skilled immigration reforms.

While having an opportunity to meet with and interact with the lawmakers and their staff, Capitol Hill Day will be an impactful way of making them aware of the significant contributions of the ITServe member companies to the country’s economy through Technology & Innovation, local employment, and STEM education. The event will also address key concerns faced by small businesses, including high-skilled immigration reform.

Sudheer Venkat Chakka, CPAC- Managing Director said, “With significant immigration legislation expected in Congress this year, we urgently request robust support from our ITServe members for CPAC’s strategic initiatives, including policy advocacy and essential fundraising aimed at engaging Members of Congress. We are requesting more members join the ITServe Capitol Hill Day in our nation’s Capital.”

DC Day 2Anju Vallabhaneni, President of ITServe, while emphasizing the importance of Capitol Hill Day,  said, “ITServe Alliance’s Capitol Hill Day will serve as a powerful platform in educating policymakers on the issues that are important to our members and the business community, ensuring our needs and views are reflected in policy debates and outcomes.”

ITServe Alliance has been consistently working to protect the needs of its members. To that end, ITServe Alliance has been collaborating with the lawmakers on behalf of its members on Capitol Hill and within the US Administration.  Capitol Hill Day is the perfect way for ITServe Alliance to use its collective voice to communicate with policymakers on the issues that are important to our members.

Urging ITServe members to be active and work collaboratively in making this important event successful, Raghu Chittimalla, ITServe Governing Board Chair said, “It’s our collective voice. I call upon every member to be part of this important event, advocate for ITServe, and make our voices heard in the corridors of power. Also, if you have a relationship with a member of Congress or their staff, please enter that information too.  Through your help we will be able to accomplish our goals through grassroots and advocacy.”

“In order to achieve the goals that benefit the IT Sector companies, the labor force, and the larger US economy, our process hinges on our 3 fundamental pillars of the ITServe PAC: education, advocacy, and strategic legal initiatives,” Nagilla added.

ITServe supports the HIRE Act (High Skilled Immigration Reform for Employment), introduced in Congress in 2024. Innovation, STEM education, and avoiding brain drain are the highlights of the Bill. It has advocated to have the STEM graduates with U.S master’s Degrees and/or Ph.D. holders from the H1-B CAP quota removed and make it unlimited to retain the top talent & innovation in the Country.

ITServe Alliance comprises of small and medium-sized businesses that fulfill the growing demand for highly skilled professionals in America. Its members play a crucial role in developing and maintaining essential IT systems for corporations, governments, and various organizations.

ITServe’s vision has been to empower local communities by creating, retaining, and fostering employment opportunities within the United States. Moreover, ITServe is committed to corporate social responsibility (CSR) and actively contributes to local communities nationwide, particularly in the realm of STEM (Science, Technology, Engineering, and Math) education.

Siva Moopanar, President-Elect of ITServe, while summarizing the importance of Capitol Hill Day said, “ITServe Alliance is consistently working to protect its members’ needs. To that end, ITServe Alliance, through its PAC team, is advocating on Capitol Hill and with the Administration.  ITServe Alliance will use its collective voice to communicate with policymakers on important issues impacting our members.”

For information on ITServe and its many noble initiatives, please visit www.itserve.org

India and U.S. Set Stage for Initial Bilateral Trade Deal Talks, Targeting Breakthrough in 90 Days

India and the United States have agreed on a framework for launching discussions on the first phase of a bilateral trade agreement, according to a trade official who made the announcement on Friday. The talks, which are set to begin soon, come with an optimistic outlook from both sides and a hope that a mutually beneficial agreement could take shape within the next three months.

Speaking on the condition of anonymity due to the delicate nature of the negotiations, the official said, “We are far ahead in trade talks with the U.S compared to other countries… there are lots of possibilities in 90 days.” This suggests a significant advancement in discussions, indicating that both countries are close to narrowing down common areas of interest and potential compromise.

This development comes at a crucial time as trade between India and the United States continues to grow. The U.S. remains India’s largest trading partner, with bilateral trade exceeding $118 billion in the 2023-24 financial year. This upward trajectory underscores the increasing importance of the relationship between the two economies, especially at a time when both are seeking to recalibrate their global trade strategies.

Just a day before the announcement, Reuters had reported that India was eager to accelerate its push for a trade deal with the United States, particularly in light of a recent policy shift from President Donald Trump. His administration decided to pause reciprocal tariff arrangements for several countries, including India. This move by Trump has opened up a new window of opportunity for New Delhi to seek favorable terms in a direct trade agreement with Washington.

President Trump’s recent tariff policy has created a new urgency in India’s trade diplomacy. Last week, his administration imposed a 26% tariff on Indian goods entering the U.S. market. Despite this, India has opted not to retaliate with its own tariffs on American products, a decision that is likely to keep the environment conducive for dialogue and cooperation.

The trade official noted that ongoing negotiations between the two countries would not be limited to physical meetings. “Trade engagements between the countries will continue virtually and regularly,” the official said, highlighting the commitment to maintaining momentum in the dialogue even in the absence of face-to-face discussions.

India’s decision not to retaliate against the steep U.S. tariffs appears to be a strategic one, aimed at keeping the larger goal of a bilateral trade agreement on track. The choice to avoid immediate countermeasures demonstrates a willingness to prioritize long-term economic partnership over short-term trade tensions.

According to the same official, the finalized terms of reference between the two sides have laid the foundation for substantive discussions. These terms will guide the upcoming engagements and serve as the basis for identifying key issues, sectoral interests, and areas where mutual concessions can be made.

The notion of a “win-win shape and form” to the agreement over the next 90 days reflects optimism that the first segment of the trade deal could yield benefits for both countries. Although specific details of the potential deal were not disclosed, the positive tone suggests that discussions may center around areas of shared interest, including tariffs, market access, regulatory alignment, and trade facilitation.

India and the U.S. have had a complicated trade relationship over the years, with both collaboration and conflict defining their interactions. From disputes at the World Trade Organization to negotiations over digital taxes, agricultural subsidies, and intellectual property, the two countries have seen their share of disagreements. However, the strategic partnership between them continues to strengthen, particularly in areas such as defense, technology, and energy, laying the groundwork for a closer economic relationship as well.

The finalization of the terms of reference and the commitment to regular, virtual trade engagements signal a desire to shift the tone of the relationship from reactive to proactive. Both nations seem to recognize the importance of building stable, predictable trade ties, especially in a global environment marked by economic uncertainty and shifting geopolitical alliances.

India’s willingness to move swiftly is partly driven by its desire to secure preferential market access for its exports while also seeking to reduce dependence on other markets. Meanwhile, the U.S. is likely to see India as a key partner in diversifying its trade portfolio and countering supply chain vulnerabilities, especially in the wake of disruptions caused by the COVID-19 pandemic and ongoing tensions with China.

Although the announcement of the finalized terms marks only the beginning of what could be a complex and lengthy negotiation process, it represents a significant step forward. If both sides manage to stick to the timeline and navigate political and economic sensitivities carefully, the result could be a landmark agreement that reshapes the trade landscape between the world’s largest and fifth-largest economies.

The next three months will be crucial as both governments attempt to hammer out specifics and address sensitive issues without triggering domestic opposition or trade blowback. Given the high stakes involved and the current political context, including the upcoming U.S. presidential elections, the pace and content of negotiations could be influenced by broader strategic considerations.

Still, the readiness to engage, the positive language from officials, and the absence of immediate retaliatory actions are encouraging signs. The coming weeks are likely to witness intensive virtual discussions involving a wide range of stakeholders, including ministries, trade representatives, industry leaders, and policy experts from both countries.

While trade negotiations are never easy, the fact that both India and the U.S. are expressing strong interest in reaching a preliminary deal in the near term is an indication of the importance both attach to this relationship. For India, deeper integration with the U.S. economy could bring in new investments, access to cutting-edge technology, and expanded markets for its goods and services. For the U.S., strengthening economic ties with India offers a strategic counterweight in the Indo-Pacific region and a reliable partner in securing resilient supply chains.

As negotiations continue, much will depend on the ability of both sides to manage expectations, make politically viable compromises, and maintain trust. But if the initial optimism holds and the projected timeline of 90 days is met, the two countries could be on the verge of formalizing a partnership that is as economically significant as it is strategically meaningful.

In the words of the trade official, “There are lots of possibilities in 90 days.” Whether those possibilities translate into a signed agreement remains to be seen, but the foundations have now been laid for what could be one of the most important trade developments in recent years.

Trump Administration Plans to Revoke Social Security Access for Certain Immigrants to Encourage Self-Deportation

The Trump administration is pursuing a strategy designed to prompt certain immigrants without legal status to voluntarily leave the United States. According to an official who spoke to Reuters on condition of anonymity, the government intends to classify these individuals as deceased in federal databases, thereby deactivating their Social Security numbers.

The focus of this effort is on immigrants who were initially granted legal entry under the Biden administration but have since lost their temporary protected status. These individuals would be added to the Social Security Administration’s “death master list,” a federal record typically used to prevent deceased individuals from receiving Social Security payments. “Immigrants who were legally admitted to the U.S. under the Biden administration but have since had their temporary status revoked would be added to the Social Security Administration’s ‘death master list,’” the anonymous official told Reuters.

In the U.S., a Social Security number is essential not just for employment and tax purposes but also for obtaining government benefits and performing routine financial tasks. These numbers serve as tax identifiers and are necessary for opening bank accounts, applying for credit cards, and conducting many other transactions. Without a valid Social Security number, individuals are effectively excluded from both public assistance and the financial system.

The plan was initially revealed by The New York Times, which reviewed internal documents and interviewed six individuals familiar with the proposal. The newspaper reported that the underlying strategy is to create enough financial pressure on the affected immigrants that they will opt to leave the country voluntarily. By invalidating their Social Security numbers, the administration hopes to cut them off from key financial and governmental services. “The goal is to pressure migrants to self-deport by effectively canceling their Social Security numbers and cutting them off from financial services,” the Times reported.

Although the administration has not publicly confirmed the plan in detail, Assistant Press Secretary Liz Huston issued a statement that hinted at the policy’s broader objectives. “President Trump promised mass deportations and by removing the monetary incentive for illegal aliens to come and stay, we will encourage them to self-deport,” Huston stated. However, she did not directly confirm or elaborate on the specifics of the Social Security deactivation plan.

The Times also reported that the government has already added over 6,300 names to a federal blacklist. These names reportedly belong to individuals convicted of crimes or identified as suspected terrorists.The Times, citing documents, reported that the names of more than 6,300 convicted criminals or ‘suspected terrorists’ have been added to the government blacklist.

Using the “death master list” in this way marks a significant expansion of the federal government’s use of sensitive personal data in immigration enforcement. President Trump has repeatedly emphasized his goal of significantly reducing the number of undocumented immigrants living in the U.S., and this effort is seen as another step in that direction.

Further highlighting this approach, the Treasury Department, the Internal Revenue Service (IRS), and the Department of Homeland Security recently finalized an agreement to share taxpayer information with immigration enforcement agencies. This agreement will allow immigration officials access to sensitive tax records that can be used to locate undocumented individuals more efficiently. “On Monday, the Treasury Department, the Internal Revenue Service and the Department of Homeland Security finalized an agreement under which taxpayer data will be provided to federal immigration authorities to help them locate migrants,” Reuters reported.

This move has already triggered internal consequences. Following the finalization of the agreement, the acting head of the IRS, along with several other senior officials, resigned from their positions. Their resignations signal the potential controversy and ethical concerns surrounding the sharing of confidential taxpayer information with immigration authorities.

The administration’s broader immigration enforcement plans also include significant financial penalties for those who defy deportation orders. Reuters reported on Tuesday that migrants who remain in the United States despite being under deportation orders could face daily fines of up to $998. In cases where individuals fail to pay these fines, the government may seize their property. Reuters on Tuesday reported that the Trump administration plans to fine migrants under deportation orders up to $998 a day if they fail to leave the United States and to seize their property if they do not pay.

These combined efforts represent a multi-pronged strategy aimed at deterring unauthorized immigration and encouraging self-deportation by eliminating access to financial and social infrastructure. By cutting off Social Security numbers, imposing heavy financial penalties, and using taxpayer data for enforcement purposes, the administration is making it increasingly difficult for individuals without legal status to remain in the country.

While critics are likely to challenge the legality and ethics of these measures, the administration appears committed to using every tool at its disposal to reduce the undocumented population. The classification of living individuals as deceased for enforcement purposes is particularly controversial and could lead to legal challenges if implemented.

The proposal also raises significant concerns about due process, accuracy, and the potential for mistaken identity. Critics warn that such a plan could result in legal immigrants or even U.S. citizens being wrongly targeted, especially if the data used to compile the lists is flawed or outdated.

Nevertheless, the Trump administration continues to defend its immigration policies as necessary to uphold the rule of law and national security. “By removing the monetary incentive for illegal aliens to come and stay, we will encourage them to self-deport,” said Huston, reaffirming the administration’s belief that economic deterrence is a viable enforcement strategy.

As the 2024 presidential election approaches, immigration policy is expected to remain a key issue for the Trump campaign, with promises of stricter enforcement and reduced immigration taking center stage. The recent steps taken by the administration reflect a growing focus on administrative and bureaucratic tools to achieve policy objectives without requiring new legislation.

In summary, the Trump administration’s latest immigration policy involves adding certain immigrants who have lost their temporary legal status to a list meant for deceased individuals. This effectively renders their Social Security numbers useless and prevents them from accessing essential services, in an effort to drive self-deportation. This initiative, along with new agreements to share tax data with immigration authorities and impose substantial daily fines, underscores the administration’s aggressive approach to curbing unauthorized immigration through both legal and financial pressures.

Indian-Origin Council Member Among Dozens Charged in Illegal Gambling Operation Tied to Lucchese Crime Family

Anand Shah, a council member from Prospect Park, New Jersey, and a local business owner of Indian origin, has been accused of overseeing illegal poker games and operating an online sportsbook in coordination with the notorious Lucchese crime family. The announcement came in a statement issued on Friday by New Jersey Attorney General Matthew Platkin, as reported by PTI.

Shah is one of 39 individuals who now face charges that include racketeering, illegal gambling, money laundering, and various other criminal offenses. These charges follow an extensive law enforcement operation during which search warrants were executed at 12 different sites across northern New Jersey earlier this week.

Also implicated in the case is Samir Nadkarni, another Indian-origin individual. Nadkarni, aged 48 and a resident of Longwood, Florida, is alleged to have acted as a sportsbook sub-agent and poker host as part of the illegal enterprise.

Authorities have described this crackdown as the result of a two-year investigation focused on unlawful gambling operations linked to the Lucchese organized crime family. The operation culminated in coordinated searches on April 9 at multiple poker clubs, including four located in Totowa, Garfield, and Woodland Park. Notably, two of these poker clubs were concealed behind operational restaurants. In addition to these clubs, law enforcement also raided a business site in Paterson where gambling machines were stored, along with seven residences believed to belong to individuals managing the illicit gambling network.

The investigation revealed the existence of additional underground poker clubs and a wide network of people who allegedly hosted and worked at these venues. Authorities also uncovered involvement in managing bettors through an unlawful online sportsbook. These findings indicate the operation had a much broader reach than initially suspected.

It is believed that the higher levels of management within this gambling syndicate not only supervised the activities but also took a cut of the illegal profits. The operation is said to have generated over $3 million in suspected criminal proceeds, according to the investigation’s findings.

To hide the origins of their illicit earnings, members of the organization reportedly used various shell companies and legitimate-looking businesses. These were intended to disguise the source of funds and provide cover for their operations.

Commenting on the significance of this case, Superintendent of the New Jersey State Police Colonel Patrick Callahan stated, “Criminal enterprises like this pose a serious threat to the safety and well-being of our communities, driving illegal gambling, money laundering, and racketeering operations that value profit over people.”

The complaint outlines that the gambling operation relied heavily on social clubs that hosted live poker games and contained gambling machines. Additionally, the operation featured a complex and wide-reaching online sportsbook. This component was facilitated through several websites hosted in foreign countries and allowed bets to be placed from within the United States.

Each poker club reportedly had its own management structure, with high-level overseers assigning day-to-day responsibilities to floor managers who were present during the games. These managers ensured the smooth running of poker sessions and compliance with the group’s internal rules.

The online sportsbook, a key pillar of the criminal enterprise, was operated by individuals known as “agents.” These agents functioned as modern-day equivalents of traditional bookies, setting up user accounts and facilitating bets through the overseas websites. The agents played a central role in enabling illegal sports betting activities across northern New Jersey and possibly even beyond.

Authorities claim that the upper echelon of the group handled major decisions, intervened in disputes, and were involved in using threats and intimidation to recover unpaid gambling debts. According to the charges, these leaders did not hesitate to employ coercive tactics to ensure payment and maintain control over the operations.

The use of the internet and offshore servers significantly expanded the reach of the group’s gambling activities. These websites became the backbone of the operation, enabling traditional organized crime to adapt to modern technology. Despite being based in the digital realm, the crimes committed mirrored the age-old activities of organized crime families.

The official statement described how these websites empowered members and affiliates of traditional organized crime to continue engaging in illicit acts with greater efficiency. “The websites allowed traditional organized crime members and associates to use the internet and current technology to engage in the same criminal acts that traditional organized crime has engaged in since the 19th century,” the statement noted.

While the investigation is still ongoing, the arrests mark a significant blow to illegal gambling networks operating in the region. The authorities believe that dismantling such a vast and deeply entrenched operation will not only help curb unlawful gambling but also reduce the broader impact of organized crime on local communities.

The sweep conducted by law enforcement targeted key areas where the gambling activities were believed to be centered. The poker clubs raided were not openly visible to the public and often disguised themselves as ordinary businesses, such as restaurants or social clubs, to evade detection. This tactic allowed the operation to function under the radar for an extended period.

The complexity of the operation and the use of both physical locations and digital platforms highlight how traditional organized crime groups have evolved. The use of offshore sports betting websites, coupled with old-school poker games hosted in concealed back rooms, demonstrates the hybrid nature of contemporary criminal enterprises.

In total, 39 individuals now face serious charges that could lead to lengthy prison sentences if convicted. These individuals are believed to have played various roles in the network, ranging from direct involvement in hosting games to managing bettors and collecting debts. Each participant contributed to what investigators are calling one of the more sophisticated illegal gambling rings discovered in recent years.

The outcome of this case could have broader implications for how law enforcement addresses organized crime in the digital age. With the increasing use of technology in criminal activities, agencies may need to adapt their strategies and tools to keep pace with such operations.

As for Anand Shah and Samir Nadkarni, their alleged involvement in this criminal scheme has not only brought them into the legal spotlight but also raised questions about how deeply embedded such operations can become in seemingly respectable segments of society.

The charges and investigation underscore the ongoing challenge of combating organized crime, especially when it intersects with both public institutions and the digital world.

China Raises Tariffs in Response to U.S. Hike as Trade War Escalates with No Signs of Resolution

China took retaliatory action on Friday in response to President Donald Trump’s decision to impose higher, country-specific tariffs by significantly increasing its own tariffs on American goods. The Chinese Finance Ministry announced that the new levies would rise to 125 percent from the previous 84 percent. This move marks a sharp escalation in the ongoing trade conflict between the two global economic powers.

In a statement shared by the ministry and translated by CNBC, Chinese officials emphasized that the tariff increases by the United States had reached a point of economic absurdity. “Even if the U.S. continues to impose higher tariffs, it will no longer make economic sense and will become a joke in the history of world economy,” the ministry said. The statement added that American goods had effectively lost their place in the Chinese market due to the current tariff levels. “With tariff rates at the current level, there is no longer a market for U.S. goods imported into China,” the ministry said, warning further that “if the U.S. government continues to increase tariffs on China, Beijing will ignore.”

The Trump administration had confirmed on Thursday, a day before China’s announcement, that the effective tariff rate on Chinese imports into the U.S. now stands at 145 percent. This included the latest executive order that increased tariffs on Chinese goods to 125 percent, which was added on top of a previous 20 percent tariff related to fentanyl imposed earlier in February and March.

According to Zhiwei Zhang, president and chief economist at Pinpoint Asset Management, this move may mark the final stage of tariff hikes between the two nations. “This is the end of the escalation in terms of bilateral tariff rates. Both China and the US have sent clear messages, there is no point of raising tariffs further,” Zhang said. He pointed out that the focus now needs to shift toward assessing how these policies are impacting economic activities in both the U.S. and China. He also noted the absence of any indication that either side was ready to begin negotiations or take steps to prevent further disruption to global supply chains.

Notably, China’s response in this latest round has differed from its previous retaliatory tactics. While the country has raised tariffs, it has stopped short of introducing new export controls or adding American companies to its unreliable entity list—a move that would subject those firms to additional operational restrictions within China.

Despite the mounting tensions, China’s Commerce Ministry maintained that Beijing is still open to dialogue. In a separate statement released on Friday, a ministry spokesperson reaffirmed the country’s willingness to negotiate with the U.S. on equal terms, indicating that diplomatic channels have not been entirely closed off.

However, hopes for any significant breakthrough in U.S.-China trade talks have diminished rapidly. Over the past week, Beijing has responded to Washington’s measures with its own set of retaliatory duties on American imports, along with broad restrictions targeting U.S. companies. These tit-for-tat moves have only further strained relations between the two economic superpowers.

U.S. Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent expressed frustration over what he described as China’s unwillingness to engage in meaningful negotiations. In an interview with Fox Business on Wednesday, Bessent criticized the Chinese approach. “It’s unfortunate that the Chinese actually don’t want to come and negotiate, because they are the worst offenders in the international trading system,” he said. He further accused China of maintaining a severely lopsided economic structure, stating, “They have the most imbalanced economy in the history of the modern world, and I can tell you that this escalation is a loser for them.”

The economic impact of this ongoing trade war is already being felt. Investment bank Goldman Sachs revised its forecast for China’s economic growth, cutting the expected GDP rate to 4 percent. The downgrade is attributed to the intensifying trade tensions with the U.S. and broader concerns over a slowdown in global economic growth. According to Goldman Sachs analysts, Chinese exports to the U.S. contribute roughly 3 percentage points to China’s overall GDP. While this may not appear substantial in percentage terms, it carries significant employment implications. The analysts estimated that between 10 million and 20 million Chinese workers are employed in sectors directly tied to goods destined for the American market.

China’s stance remained firm in its latest statements. The country reiterated its commitment to push back if Washington continues actions perceived as harmful to Chinese interests. “Resolutely counter-attack and fight to the end,” China declared on Friday, vowing continued resistance in the face of what it considers economic aggression from the U.S.

Chinese President Xi Jinping echoed this sentiment during a meeting with Spanish Prime Minister Pedro Sánchez on the same day. According to a government readout translated by CNBC, Xi emphasized the futility of trade conflicts. “There is no winner in a tariff war and going against the world will only isolate itself,” Xi said. The Chinese leader and Sánchez agreed to strengthen their nations’ relationship in a variety of areas, including trade, investment, and technological innovation.

While the international community watches closely, the White House has yet to issue any formal response to these recent developments. CNBC noted that the administration did not immediately respond to a request for comment regarding China’s latest tariff increases and statements.

With tensions now at their highest point in months, the likelihood of a quick or easy resolution seems remote. The global economic ramifications are increasingly apparent as both nations dig in, showing few signs of compromise. Businesses in both countries—and worldwide—are bracing for continued uncertainty, potentially prompting a reevaluation of trade strategies and supply chain structures moving forward.

As both Washington and Beijing double down on their positions, economists warn that further escalation could have lasting consequences far beyond their respective borders. For now, the world’s two largest economies remain locked in a standoff that shows no immediate signs of cooling down.

India Stresses Patience in Trade Talks as US Tariff Pause Sparks Strategic Responses

Following the temporary suspension of tariffs on India by US President Donald Trump, Union Commerce Minister Piyush Goyal emphasized that India would not rush into any decisions and would continue to negotiate in alignment with the nation’s best interests. Goyal underlined that the country’s trade discussions are being steered with a careful and deliberate approach, focused solely on the welfare of its citizens.

Addressing attendees at the Italy-India Business, Science and Technology Forum, Goyal stressed the importance of mutual understanding in trade talks. “Trade talks proceed when both sides are sensitive to each other’s concerns and requirements. All our trade talks are progressing well, in the spirit of India First, and to ensure our pathway to Viksit Bharat @ 2047 in the Amrit Kaal…” he remarked, alluding to India’s long-term developmental goals.

Goyal also made it clear that India would never succumb to external pressure or artificial urgency in any negotiation. “We never negotiate at gunpoint. Favourable time constraints motivate us for quicker talks, but till the time we are not able to secure the interest of our country and our people, we do not hurry,” he stated.

While the Commerce Minister projected a steady and measured approach, External Affairs Minister S. Jaishankar expressed a more proactive stance in response to developments in global trade dynamics, particularly with the United States. Speaking at the Carnegie Global Technology Summit, Jaishankar acknowledged the pressing need to conclude trade agreements swiftly, especially with nations like the US, which he said has undergone a significant shift in how it engages globally.

Jaishankar pointed out that trade negotiations with the US have grown more complex due to heightened expectations and the transformed global environment compared to the previous year. “This time around, we are certainly geared up for a very high degree of urgency. I mean, we see a window. We want to see stuff. So our trade deals are really challenging. And we are really, when I look at the trade deals, I mean it’s not my direct credit, but we have a lot to do with each other. I mean, these are people very much on top of their game, very ambitious about what they want to achieve,” he commented.

The minister further emphasized the importance of having a realistic understanding of the intentions and perceptions of trade partners. According to Jaishankar, both India and the US have long-standing opinions about each other’s trade policies, which have not always aligned seamlessly. “We talked for four years during the first Trump administration. They have their view of us, and frankly, we have our view of them. The bottom line is that they didn’t get that,” he said, referencing the limited progress made during earlier talks.

Drawing a parallel with India’s trade negotiations with the European Union, Jaishankar pointed out that international trade talks often face delays and stagnation. He mentioned that although negotiations with the EU are often cited as spanning three decades, this portrayal isn’t entirely accurate. “So if you look at the EU, often people say we’ve been negotiating for 30 years, which is not entirely true because we had big blocks of time and nobody was even talking to each other. But they have tended to be very protracted processes,” he clarified.

Jaishankar also touched on the broader geopolitical implications of trade and technology, especially concerning the dynamic between the US and China. He highlighted how decisions made by both countries significantly shape global trade and strategic alignments. According to him, the influence wielded by both the US and China in shaping the future of international trade cannot be underestimated.

Even as India balances its trade strategy with the US, tensions escalated between the US and China in the same domain. In a retaliatory move, China announced steep tariff hikes on a wide range of US imports. The decision was made public on Friday, when Beijing revealed plans to increase tariffs on all goods imported from the United States to a staggering 125 percent. This marked a considerable rise from the previous tariff rate of 84 percent.

The announcement, reported by China’s official news agency Xinhua, attributed the decision to the Customs Tariff Commission of the State Council. According to the report, the new tariff structure will be implemented starting April 12, sending a strong signal of Beijing’s unwillingness to back down in the face of American trade measures.

In addition to increasing tariffs, China has also taken formal steps through international legal mechanisms. The Chinese commerce ministry, as reported by Xinhua, disclosed that it had lodged a complaint with the World Trade Organization in response to the latest round of US tariff increases. This legal move underlines Beijing’s intention to contest the US actions on global platforms and to seek redress through established institutions.

These developments come amid rising trade friction worldwide, with countries increasingly asserting their sovereignty and strategic priorities through economic means. India, while affected by the broader shifts in the global order, is positioning itself carefully, using a blend of urgency and caution to navigate the evolving landscape.

The Indian government’s dual approach—combining Goyal’s emphasis on patient and interest-based negotiation with Jaishankar’s sense of urgency—reflects a nuanced response to the rapidly changing global trade environment. On one hand, there is a firm resolve not to be rushed or pressured into unfavorable agreements. On the other, there is a recognition that strategic opportunities must be seized when available, particularly when dealing with major economic powers like the United States.

Both ministers’ remarks highlight the careful balancing act India must perform to maximize its trade benefits without compromising national interests. As global trade dynamics become increasingly influenced by geopolitics, especially with rivalries intensifying between major powers such as the US and China, India is likely to continue pursuing deals that are mutually beneficial but not rushed.

While China’s aggressive countermeasures demonstrate a confrontational stance, India’s response underscores a commitment to thoughtful and calculated policymaking. With the goal of achieving a developed India by 2047, policymakers appear determined to prioritize sustainable and strategic trade partnerships rather than reactive ones.

As negotiations with global partners continue, it remains to be seen how India will shape its agreements amid external pressures and internal developmental ambitions. The coming months are likely to test the Indian leadership’s ability to balance diplomacy, economics, and long-term vision in an increasingly complex world trade order.

Senators Debate Ending Daylight Saving Time Amid Health, Economic Concerns

In 1957, rockabilly artist Bob Ehret sang, “We’ve got to stop the clock, baby; to spend more time with you.” Decades later, that sentiment echoed through the halls of Congress, as senators from both parties gathered at a Senate Commerce Committee hearing to examine the implications of continuing or ending Daylight Saving Time (DST).

Senator Ted Cruz, a Republican from Texas and the committee’s chairman, explained that Daylight Saving Time was originally introduced with good intentions, primarily to cut energy consumption. However, he argued that over time, it has caused more problems than it solved, including a rise in traffic accidents during darker mornings, disruptions in workplace productivity, and resistance from farmers who depend on early-morning sunlight.

“We find ourselves adjusting our clocks… springing forward and falling back in the fall. For many Americans, this biannual ritual is a minor inconvenience… But when we take a closer look at the implications of changing the clocks, its impact on our economy, our health and our everyday lives, we can see that this practice is more than an annoyance,” Cruz said.

He emphasized that the original idea behind DST was straightforward: more daylight in the evening would reduce the need for artificial lighting and heating. “The idea was simple. Fewer hours of darkness meant less electricity consumption for lighting and heating,” Cruz added.

But Cruz pointed out that the energy-saving benefits that may have made sense in the early 1900s are now negligible. As he put it, sunrise and sunset timings today have “de minimis” effects on the current economy, which is far less dependent on daylight than it once was.

During the hearing, Cruz was joined by Dr. Karin Johnson, a neurology expert from Massachusetts. Both highlighted the health consequences of resetting clocks twice a year. Cruz particularly noted the dangers of the spring time change when people lose an hour of sleep. Johnson further elaborated on how these abrupt shifts can negatively impact people’s circadian rhythms, vascular health, and sleep quality.

The panel also heard from an official representing the National Golf Course Owners Association. This testimony highlighted the economic boost provided by later daylight hours, which allow for extended evening recreation such as golf and other tourist-friendly activities. Lawmakers sympathetic to business interests saw these benefits as compelling arguments in favor of maintaining DST.

On the Democratic side, Senator Lisa Blunt-Rochester of Delaware voiced her support for ending the twice-yearly clock changes. She emphasized the need for a “permanent time for our country” and referred to a bill once introduced by Senator Marco Rubio, a Republican from Florida, that proposed eliminating DST. That bill, however, eventually stalled in the House of Representatives.

“This body [then] took a harder look at how time changes work state-by-state,” Blunt-Rochester said. She acknowledged the challenges of creating a uniform time policy that works for every region. “What works in my home state of Delaware may not work in Washington state, but I know I speak for many Americans when I say it’s time. It’s time to figure this out.”

Experts and lawmakers at the hearing acknowledged that southern states like Florida and Texas would likely feel the drawbacks of a permanent DST more than others. These states already experience significant heat and sun exposure, and extending evening daylight could increase health risks and disrupt established routines.

Senator Edward Markey, a Democrat from Massachusetts, discussed his past efforts to modify DST. He shared how he helped extend the daylight period to better accommodate events like Halloween, ensuring children could go trick-or-treating during twilight hours rather than in full darkness. Markey even joked about his long-standing involvement with DST reform. “The Sun King” is the nickname he’s earned for his efforts, he said with a smile.

Senator Blunt-Rochester echoed Markey’s concerns about the harmful consequences of frequent time changes. “We need to stop the clock,” she said. “We know that changing the clock disrupts sleep, which can lead to negative health outcomes. Several studies have noted issues with mood disturbances, increased hospital admissions, and even heart attacks and strokes.”

Scott Yates, founder of the Lock the Clock movement, also testified. He delved into the history of DST and discussed how it was briefly made permanent during the 1970s energy crisis under President Richard Nixon’s administration. Yates recalled how unpopular the change became, particularly because it robbed people of an hour of sleep just as the school year resumed after winter break.

“So you can imagine, the worst Monday of the year already is the one after the holiday break where you have to go back to school and everything — to have an extra hour of sleep robbed away right before that. You can understand why it was so unpopular and why it was repealed,” Yates explained. He noted that the decision to reverse permanent DST came just months before Nixon’s resignation.

Yates added a historical footnote, reminding the committee that the infamous Watergate break-in by the Nixon administration’s so-called “Plumbers” team occurred during nighttime hours. Cruz responded to this anecdote with a quip of his own: “So maybe — if we had more daylight, the Watergate break-in doesn’t happen.”

With input ranging from public health to tourism revenue, and from historical experiments to bipartisan support, the hearing revealed a deepening consensus in Congress: the time may be right to reconsider how the nation keeps time.

Trade War Turmoil: How the U.S.-China Economic Clash Is Shaking Global Tourism

The intensifying trade war between the United States and China has entered a perilous stage, with soaring tariffs leading to widespread economic damage and turbulence in global markets. Among the industries suffering most is international tourism, now caught in the crossfire of policy shifts and aggressive tariff increases. The escalating dispute is not only reshaping trade dynamics but also significantly disrupting air travel, hospitality, and consumer spending linked to global tourism. With the U.S. and China—two of the world’s economic giants—locked in an economic standoff, the broader travel industry is grappling with heightened costs and plummeting demand.

The latest twist in the trade war sees the U.S. threatening to hike tariffs on Chinese imports to a stunning 104%. This move, while aimed at economic leverage, has triggered consequences far beyond trade, affecting airlines, cruise lines, tech firms, and hotels. These industries now face severe uncertainty as supply chains tighten and operating costs rise. The travel ecosystem, heavily reliant on cross-border mobility and stable economic relations, is particularly vulnerable to this conflict.

The travel sector is already witnessing a pullback in global mobility, driven by rising costs and lowered demand. Chinese tourists, among the top international travelers, are beginning to rethink trips to the U.S. as tariffs increase the price of goods and services tied to travel. Major American cities such as New York, Los Angeles, and San Francisco, which rely significantly on Chinese tourism, could see sharp declines in international visitors. Higher costs on items like electronics—popular purchases among tourists—further discourage travel.

“US states including New York, Michigan, California, Nevada, Florida, and more face tourism declines due to Trump’s tariffs,” as industry observers note, highlighting the widespread economic implications.

Meanwhile, American travelers eyeing China are similarly dissuaded by inflated prices on goods and services caused by reciprocal tariffs. As duties on travel-related products like smartphones, luggage, and apparel increase, international travel becomes less appealing. This drop in tourism between the U.S. and China, once one of the most profitable travel routes, could deal a major blow to airlines, hotels, and tour operators.

In response, travel agencies are adjusting their marketing approaches, shifting attention to regions less impacted by trade tensions. Long-haul flights and cruise packages between the U.S. and China, now more expensive, are facing diminished demand.

The airline industry, too, is under pressure. U.S. carriers could see significant hikes in operating costs due to tariffs on Chinese aircraft parts, including avionics and engines. These increased costs are expected to translate into higher ticket prices, affecting consumer demand. Airlines heavily dependent on U.S.-China routes—such as American, Delta, and United—are especially vulnerable, as weakening demand for both business and leisure travel could shrink revenues.

Airfares for international flights are already under strain from inflation and surging fuel prices. Tariffs add a new layer of financial pressure. Budget airlines may attract more cost-conscious travelers, but their own narrow profit margins make survival in this environment difficult.

The technology sector, at the center of the trade war, is also disrupting travel. Tariffs on Chinese electronics mean travelers can expect to pay more for tech gadgets such as smartphones, cameras, and laptops—tools that are essential for modern travel. “The cost of travel-related tech products like smartphones, cameras, laptops, and GPS devices could skyrocket,” experts warn, pointing out that both leisure and business travelers will be hit.

Airlines, cruise companies, and hotels depend on affordable electronics for operations—like digital check-ins, in-flight entertainment, and mobile booking systems. As costs rise, these services may become less accessible or more expensive, directly impacting the travel experience. Chinese tech firms like Huawei, Xiaomi, and Lenovo are central suppliers of such equipment, and higher tariffs could severely strain the hospitality sector’s ability to maintain services.

For the cruise industry, the trade war brings both supply chain issues and escalating costs. Tariffs on Chinese-made materials used in shipbuilding and maintenance can lead to construction delays and pricier cruises. As cruise lines struggle with increased expenses, they’re likely to pass these onto consumers, discouraging bookings and reducing passenger volume. “With fewer deals on cruise vacations, travelers could opt for land-based travel,” a shift that would cut deeply into cruise revenues.

Chinese tourists—a rapidly growing customer base for cruises—may be especially affected. The increased costs and travel deterrents from tariffs make it less likely that they’ll book cruises in North America, further dampening industry prospects.

Hotels are similarly burdened. Rising prices caused by tariffs and a weakening Chinese economy have prompted tourists to reconsider travel plans, especially to major U.S. cities where Chinese visitors usually spend big. At the same time, hotels that rely on Chinese imports for furniture, electronics, and other essentials now face increased costs, pushing room rates higher.

“As more tourism-dependent cities face rising prices for accommodations and diminished demand, the hotel industry will experience a downturn,” market analysts predict.

Across travel, tech, cruise, and hotel sectors, the long-term pain is just beginning. Businesses are being forced to rethink strategies as costs climb and customers pull back. As tariffs alter supply chains and reduce affordability, travel will likely become more expensive and less predictable. The 104% tariff on Chinese imports now being considered threatens to choke off critical supplies—especially electronics—used throughout the travel industry.

Global markets are reeling from the economic uncertainty this trade war has unleashed. Stock markets are down, currencies are fluctuating, and financial forecasts have turned grim. Asian economies, heavily reliant on exports, are particularly exposed, and nations like Vietnam and Cambodia are bracing for additional fallout. As Chinese exports to the U.S. shrink, other countries fear secondary effects on their own tourism sectors.

“The result? Less disposable income for consumers, fewer international tourists, and a prolonged period of economic volatility,” say industry experts. Smartphone prices, for example, are surging, which could reduce the use of travel apps and disrupt digital services that many tourism companies depend on.

The mounting instability is leading investors to back away from tourism-related stocks, anticipating long-term damage. With global travelers hesitant to spend, tourism operators are seeing a sharp decline in bookings, particularly in Asia and Europe.

China’s retaliation—already involving tariffs up to 34%—has further clouded the outlook for U.S. tourism. Chinese tourists, who make up a large portion of foreign spending in the U.S., are now less likely to visit. Major cities that depend on these travelers face significant revenue losses. Additional barriers, such as stricter visa and customs policies, only add to the deterrent.

Tourism professionals are preparing for a new reality where the intersection of geopolitics and economics continues to dictate business outcomes. “With increased tariffs, uncertainty, and economic pain affecting both consumers and businesses alike, the global tourism industry faces a turbulent road ahead,” notes a senior travel strategist.

The conflict between the U.S. and China is more than a trade dispute—it’s a global economic event reshaping tourism. With both countries locked in a power struggle over market share, tourism becomes collateral damage in a fight that shows no signs of ending. The global travel industry must now adapt to survive, with cost pressures mounting, consumer confidence wavering, and long-term stability increasingly out of reach.

For now, the only certainty is that uncertainty will persist—and the travel world may never look quite the same again.

Trump Administration Revokes Visas of Hundreds of International Students, Prompting Backlash and Legal Battles

The Trump administration has taken a controversial step by revoking the visas of hundreds of international students and detaining around a dozen individuals on college campuses across the United States, often without prior notice or the ability to appeal. This sweeping action has triggered widespread concern and unease among the international student community.

Viral videos have captured the moments when plain-clothes officers handcuffed and arrested students near their homes, shocking viewers and sparking fear among students nationwide. The situation has escalated to the point where over 80 universities have reported cases of revoked student visas, as documented by a tracker maintained by Inside Higher Ed. These reports span institutions from coast to coast, impacting students and faculty alike.

U.S. Secretary of State Marco Rubio confirmed last month that over 300 visas have already been revoked. He explained the department’s stance by saying it was targeting individuals whose actions were seen as being contrary to U.S. national interests. “It might be more” than 300 visas, Rubio noted, hinting at the broader scope of the effort. “I don’t know actually if it’s primarily student visas. It’s a combination of visas,” he said.

A significant number of the students affected had participated in pro-Palestinian demonstrations, though some cases involved individuals with prior legal issues. These infractions ranged from criminal records to minor offenses such as speeding or a previous DUI, according to immigration attorneys familiar with the cases. For instance, CBS News reported on a Turkish student from the University of Minnesota who was detained in March after his visa was revoked due to a prior drunk driving offense.

Despite the legal infractions in some cases, immigration experts emphasize that students on visas are entitled to First Amendment rights, including freedom of speech. Deportations over political expression have historically been rare, but the temporary nature of student visas makes these individuals more vulnerable.

Many students have filed lawsuits against the federal government, arguing that their visas were suddenly revoked without any warning or an avenue for appeal or correction. Rubio has justified the government’s position by stating that student visas are intended for education, and that they will be revoked if foreign students are perceived to be engaging in actions that could “destabilize” the country.

Students and advocates have questioned the legality and fairness of these measures. “No president should be allowed to set an ideological litmus test and exclude or remove people from our country who they disagree with,” the American Civil Liberties Union (ACLU) stated in a public response. The White House, meanwhile, has defended its actions by invoking a 1952 law that gives the Secretary of State broad authority to expel foreigners who might pose “potentially serious adverse foreign policy consequences” for the U.S.

The crackdown has touched a wide range of educational institutions. Inside Higher Ed has listed more than 80 universities where international students or recent graduates have experienced changes to their legal status. These include large public universities such as Texas A&M University, University of Florida, University of Oregon, and University of Colorado, as well as elite private institutions like Harvard University, Yale University, Stanford University, Columbia University, and Dartmouth College.

Specific numbers reveal the scale of the action. At least eight students from Arizona State University and six individuals from the University of California, Berkeley have had their visas revoked, according to the Washington Post. The Wall Street Journal reports that 57 visas were withdrawn across the entire University of California system, and another seven from Ohio State University. In total, the U.S. is home to approximately 1.1 million international student visa holders.

Beyond the revocation of visas, several students and faculty have been detained, including individuals who hold permanent legal residency in the U.S. After being taken into custody, they are sent to detention centers while awaiting deportation proceedings.

Video evidence has shown plain-clothes Immigration and Customs Enforcement (ICE) officers apprehending startled and distressed students, often placing them into unmarked vehicles. Some of those detained claim they were never given a reason for their arrest and maintain that they committed no crime.

One of the most high-profile cases is that of Mahmoud Khalil, a Columbia University graduate and legal permanent resident. He was arrested in his university-owned home in March. Another prominent case involves Rumeysa Ozturk, a Turkish national and student at Tufts University. In widely circulated footage, she is seen trembling with fear while being surrounded by six plain-clothes ICE agents wearing masks. She was intercepted while on her way to a Ramadan celebration.

Another case that drew attention was the deportation of Rasha Alawieh, a professor at Brown University and a kidney transplant specialist. U.S. officials claimed they found “photos and videos” on her phone that expressed sympathies toward Hezbollah.

Some students who faced the revocation of their visas have fled to Canada to avoid deportation. These include Momodou Taal and Ranjani Srinivasan, both of whom were reportedly affected by the visa cancellations.

The situation has prompted legal challenges from students and civil rights organizations. Several lawsuits have been filed against the federal government, accusing it of detaining individuals without explanation or legal basis—potentially violating their civil rights. The legal efforts aim to delay or block deportations and seek redress for what plaintiffs say are unjust and unlawful actions.

One of the key legal battles involves Xiaotian Liu, a 26-year-old doctoral student from China studying at Dartmouth College. Liu is suing the government with the support of the ACLU of New Hampshire. The lawsuit claims his visa was revoked “without any notice and sufficient explanation.” According to court filings, Liu has not committed any crimes nor has he participated in any protests.

As the number of affected students continues to grow, so does the concern among academic institutions and human rights groups. Faculty members across the country have raised alarms about the implications this crackdown could have on academic freedom and the right of students to engage in political discourse.

The Trump administration’s actions have reignited debates about immigration policy, free speech, and the rights of non-citizens within U.S. borders. With lawsuits moving forward and public outcry building, the future remains uncertain for many international students who had come to the U.S. to study—only to find themselves facing detention, deportation, or the sudden loss of legal status.

US-China Trade War Escalates, Raising Fears of Global Economic Fallout

The prospect of a full-scale trade war between the United States and China has intensified after President Donald Trump imposed tariffs exceeding 100% on imports from China. In response, China has vowed to retaliate rather than yield to what it perceives as U.S. intimidation. It has announced a significant increase in tariffs on American products, raising them from 34% to 84%.

Beijing’s firm stance was reflected in its declaration that it would “fight to the end,” dismissing any notion of surrender in the face of pressure from Washington.

The key question now looming over global markets and policymakers is: what does this deepening trade conflict between the world’s two largest economies mean for the broader international economy?

In 2024, the trade volume in goods between the U.S. and China reached an estimated $585 billion. However, the trade was heavily skewed in China’s favor, with the U.S. importing approximately $440 billion worth of goods from China, while China imported only $145 billion from the U.S. This disparity resulted in a U.S. trade deficit with China of $295 billion—roughly 1% of the American economy. While this is substantial, it is far less than the $1 trillion deficit figure that Trump has repeatedly cited in public appearances.

Tariffs on Chinese goods are not new. During his first term, Trump imposed sweeping tariffs on China, which were largely maintained and even expanded under President Joe Biden. These trade measures contributed to a sharp drop in the proportion of Chinese imports into the U.S.—from 21% of total American imports in 2016 to just 13% in 2023. This data suggests a reduced dependency on Chinese imports, but experts argue that the shift might be more superficial than structural.

Analysts have observed that many Chinese exports have merely been redirected through other Asian nations to avoid U.S. tariffs. A notable example comes from the solar energy industry. In 2018, Trump imposed a 30% tariff on Chinese-made solar panels. However, by 2023, the U.S. Commerce Department discovered that Chinese manufacturers were circumventing these tariffs by assembling solar panels in countries like Malaysia, Vietnam, Thailand, and Cambodia, before shipping them to the U.S. as if they were locally produced.

The Trump administration’s new round of “reciprocal” tariffs now targets goods originating from these countries, meaning that many items ultimately manufactured in China will become even more expensive for U.S. consumers.

The trade relationship involves a wide range of products. On the American side, top exports to China in 2024 included soybeans, a vital food source for China’s estimated 440 million pigs. The U.S. also exported pharmaceuticals and petroleum to China.

Conversely, Chinese exports to the U.S. predominantly included electronics, toys, computers, and a significant number of batteries essential to electric vehicles. Smartphones represented the largest category, accounting for 9% of total U.S. imports from China. Many of these devices are manufactured in China for U.S.-based firms such as Apple.

The heavy U.S. tariffs on China have contributed to a sharp drop in Apple’s market valuation. Over the past month alone, the company’s stock price has declined by 20%. This is attributed to the growing cost burden of producing and importing Chinese-manufactured electronics, including Apple’s flagship iPhones.

Previously, the Trump administration had already imposed a 20% tariff on a broad range of Chinese imports. But with the latest hike to 104%, the financial impact on U.S. consumers and businesses could be as much as five times higher. Likewise, China’s counter-tariffs on American imports will lead to price hikes for Chinese consumers, potentially hurting domestic purchasing power.

However, tariffs are just one tool in this escalating economic rivalry. Both nations possess other means to undermine each other’s strategic industries. China, for instance, plays a dominant role in refining essential industrial metals like copper, lithium, and rare earth elements. It could hinder U.S. access to these materials, which are critical for sectors ranging from electronics to defense.

Beijing has already begun implementing such measures. It has restricted exports of germanium and gallium, two rare materials used in thermal imaging and radar systems—a move widely interpreted as a response to U.S. pressure.

Meanwhile, the U.S. may look to escalate its ongoing technological embargo on China. Initiated during Biden’s presidency, this policy restricts Chinese access to cutting-edge microchips used in artificial intelligence and other advanced applications. China still lacks the ability to manufacture these chips domestically, making it vulnerable to such export restrictions.

Adding to the potential conflict, Trump’s trade advisor, Peter Navarro, recently suggested that the U.S. could pressure other countries like Mexico, Vietnam, and Cambodia to limit their trade with China if they wish to retain access to the American market.

These developments have major implications for the rest of the world. The U.S. and China together account for an estimated 43% of global economic output in 2024, according to the International Monetary Fund. A severe trade war that dampens growth in either country—or plunges them into recession—could significantly slow the pace of global economic development.

International investment may also take a hit as uncertainty grows over supply chains and market access. But the consequences extend even further.

China’s domestic consumption remains far below its industrial output. With an annual goods surplus nearing $1 trillion, China is exporting far more than it imports. Much of this surplus is supported by state subsidies and financial assistance to favored firms, allowing them to produce goods—like steel—at below-market costs.

Should Chinese products be blocked from entering the U.S. due to high tariffs, Chinese companies may try to dump excess inventory into other markets, undercutting local producers. While this could benefit consumers in some countries through lower prices, it would pose a significant threat to domestic manufacturing industries and employment in other regions.

In the UK, the lobby group UK Steel has voiced concerns over this possibility. They fear that excess Chinese steel could flood the British market, potentially harming local industries and threatening thousands of jobs.

In the broader picture, most economists believe that a comprehensive U.S.-China trade war would deliver a severe blow to the global economy. The combination of higher prices, disrupted supply chains, and falling investment could push several economies toward slower growth—or worse.

As the world watches the unfolding trade standoff between Washington and Beijing, the hope is that cooler heads will prevail. But for now, both sides appear entrenched, and the rest of the world may end up paying the price.

Legal Cases Spotlight Constitutional Rights of Green Card Holders

Two recent legal battles involving the potential deportation of legal permanent residents, commonly known as green card holders, have reignited discussions around their constitutional protections.

On March 26, a federal judge temporarily halted the arrest and deportation of Yunseo Chung, a 21-year-old student at Columbia University. The Department of Homeland Security was moving to deport Chung for her involvement in a protest connected to the university’s disciplinary actions against students participating in pro-Palestinian demonstrations.

U.S. District Judge Naomi Reice Buchwald issued a temporary restraining order that prevented federal authorities from detaining Chung while her immigration proceedings continued. Just two days earlier, Chung had filed a lawsuit against President Donald Trump and several administration officials. Her legal complaint contended that, as a green card holder, her constitutional rights—especially those under the First Amendment—had been infringed upon.

According to Chung’s lawsuit, she had taken part in a campus protest on March 5 and was subsequently cited by New York City police for obstructing governmental administration. On March 8, her legal team was informed by a federal law enforcement officer that her permanent resident status was being rescinded.

Chung’s lawyers highlighted a similar case involving Mahmoud Khalil, another Columbia University student with legal permanent residency, who was removed from campus housing and sent to a detention facility in Louisiana. Federal agents allegedly informed Khalil that his green card had been revoked by the State Department.

In legal documents, the government argued that Secretary of State Marco Rubio had the authority to revoke Khalil’s permanent residency based on concerns that his “presence or activities in the United States would have potentially serious adverse foreign policy consequences for the United States,” citing a section of the Immigration and Naturalization Act of 1952.

Khalil’s legal status is now under review in a federal court in New Jersey. The government maintains that Khalil failed todisclose critical information in his green card application, which could justify the revocation of his permanent resident status.

Green card holders, according to U.S. Citizenship and Immigration Services, possess a set of fundamental rights and obligations. These include the right to live indefinitely in the U.S., as long as they do not engage in conduct that renders them deportable under immigration law. They are also entitled to seek employment in their field and receive protection under federal, state, and local laws.

However, green card holders must also meet specific responsibilities. They are required to obey all U.S. laws, file income tax returns with both federal and state tax authorities, and, for males between 18 and 25, register with the Selective Service. They are also expected to support democratic governance, though this does not grant them voting rights in federal, state, or local elections.

The U.S. Supreme Court has consistently ruled that legal permanent residents enjoy most constitutional protections granted to U.S. citizens. In the 1945 case Bridges v. Wixon, the Court determined that Harry Bridges, an Australian who had resided in the United States since 1920, could not be deported solely for his political affiliations with the Communist Party.

Justice Frank Murphy, in his concurring opinion, emphasized that “once an alien lawfully enters and resides in this country, he becomes invested with the rights guaranteed by the Constitution to all people within our borders.” He further elaborated, “Such rights include those protected by the First and Fifth Amendments and by the due process clause of the Fourteenth Amendment. None of these provisions acknowledges any distinctions between citizens and resident aliens. They extend their inalienable privileges to all ‘persons’ and guard against any encroachment of those rights by federal or state authority.”

A subsequent ruling in Kwong Hai Chew v. Colding (1953) involved a merchant sailor and legal permanent resident who was denied reentry into the U.S. after a four-month trip abroad on the grounds that his return posed a risk to public interest. The government detained Chew and did not disclose the allegations against him. Justice Harold Burton stated, “It is well established that, if an alien is a lawful permanent resident of the United States and remains physically present there, he is a person within the protection of the Fifth Amendment. He may not be deprived of his life, liberty or property without due process of law.”

In the 1976 case Mathews v. Diaz, Justice John Paul Stevens further clarified that constitutional protections apply broadly: “There are literally millions of aliens within the jurisdiction of the United States. The Fifth Amendment, as well as the Fourteenth Amendment, protects every one of these persons from deprivation of life, liberty, or property without due process of law.”

Among the most vital constitutional rights afforded to green card holders is the right to apply for U.S. citizenship through naturalization, typically after five years of continuous residence. To qualify, applicants must show “good moral character,” demonstrate a commitment to the Constitution, read and write basic English, and possess a general understanding of U.S. history and government. They must also take an Oath of Allegiance to the country.

Naturalized citizens are largely shielded from legal vulnerabilities that could result in deportation for green card holders—unless it is later discovered that they used false information during the naturalization process.

Nonetheless, the general rule remains that green card holders must adhere to all laws at the federal, state, and local levels. If found to have broken the law, they may face deportation through the immigration court system, managed by the Executive Office for Immigration Review under the U.S. Department of Justice. The government is required to provide compelling evidence to strip a person of their permanent residency.

Should an immigration judge order removal, the green card holder has the right to appeal to the Board of Immigration Appeals and, if necessary, escalate the case to a Federal Court of Appeals.

The legal battles involving Chung and Khalil are emblematic of the broader tension between national security, free speech, and immigrant rights. As these cases unfold in the courts, they may help to clarify the extent to which constitutional protections apply to green card holders, especially in the politically sensitive context of protests and foreign policy concerns.

India to Launch New Naval Base for Nuclear Submarines in Andhra Pradesh by 2026

India is set to commission a strategically vital new naval base on the eastern coast of Andhra Pradesh next year, aimed at countering China’s growing naval presence in the Indian Ocean Region (IOR). This new facility will be used to house nuclear submarines and other warships, adding a critical layer to India’s maritime defense strategy.

The base is being constructed near Rambilli, a small coastal village approximately 50 kilometers south of the Eastern Naval Command’s headquarters in Visakhapatnam. Known internally as Project Varsha, this base includes underground pens and an intricate tunnel network to discreetly accommodate nuclear submarines. These tunnels will allow submarines to deploy quietly into the Bay of Bengal, staying out of sight from surveillance satellites, and proceed rapidly towards strategic areas such as the Malacca Strait and beyond to conduct deterrent patrols.

According to a defense source, “The first phase of the Rambilli base under Project Varsha is almost complete. After commissioning in 2026, it can be expanded and upgraded in phases, much like what is under way at the Karwar base under Project Seabird.”

The construction of this nuclear submarine base has been a complex process, taking over a decade to reach its current state. Developers had to navigate a variety of technological and environmental hurdles, in addition to other logistical challenges, to move forward with the project. Despite these difficulties, the base is nearing readiness and will become a pivotal asset in India’s naval capabilities.

Simultaneously, India continues to upgrade its western coastal defense infrastructure through Project Seabird at the Karwar base in Karnataka. This development complements the strategic expansion in the east, collectively strengthening India’s maritime reach and preparedness on both fronts. Karwar, which already houses over a dozen frontline warships, is undergoing significant enhancements that will soon enable it to berth 32 major warships and submarines, along with 23 yard-craft.

“The inner harbour is ready. Work on the outer harbour, with the requisite breakwaters and jetties, is in progress,” the same source confirmed regarding Karwar’s development.

India is not only building infrastructure but is also adding firepower to its underwater nuclear arsenal. This year, the country will commission its third nuclear-powered submarine equipped with nuclear-tipped ballistic missiles, known in naval terms as an SSBN. The submarine, named INS Aridhaman, is larger than its predecessors, INS Arihant and INS Arighaat, with a displacement of 7,000 tonnes. The increased size allows it to carry more K-4 missiles, which have a strike range of 3,500 kilometers.

This development significantly boosts India’s nuclear triad, which comprises land-based missiles, airborne weapons, and submarine-launched ballistic missiles. These submarines serve as the most survivable leg of the triad, capable of providing second-strike capability even in the event of a surprise nuclear attack.

In addition to INS Aridhaman, a fourth submarine is currently under construction under the classified Advanced Technology Vessel (ATV) project. This project, valued at over ₹90,000 crore, is India’s most secretive and ambitious initiative in nuclear submarine development. The plan eventually includes constructing larger 13,500-tonne SSBNs powered by more advanced 190 MW pressurized light-water reactors, in contrast to the 83 MW reactors used in the existing submarines. These improvements will significantly increase range, endurance, and operational capacity of India’s nuclear submarines.

In October last year, the Prime Minister-led Cabinet Committee on Security gave the green light for constructing two 9,800-tonne nuclear-powered attack submarines, or SSNs, at a cost of ₹40,000 crore. Unlike SSBNs, SSNs are designed for conventional warfare and are equipped with non-nuclear missiles and other tactical weaponry. Eventually, India plans to build a fleet of six SSNs, enhancing its ability to project power and safeguard its maritime interests.

As India strengthens its naval posture in the east, it is simultaneously reinforcing its western defenses. On Saturday, Defense Minister Rajnath Singh inaugurated new operational, repair, and logistical facilities valued at over ₹2,000 crore at the Karwar naval base. These upgrades are part of Project Seabird’s ongoing Phase-IIA and are designed to provide the Navy with enhanced strategic depth and flexibility, especially in relation to potential threats from Pakistan.

The expanded Karwar base will also feature a dual-use naval air station, a full-service naval dockyard, four covered dry berths, and logistics infrastructure to support both ships and aircraft. This expansion will play a crucial role in easing the burden on the heavily congested Mumbai harbour, one of the country’s primary maritime hubs.

The eventual Phase-IIB of Project Seabird, currently in the planning phase, will extend the base’s capacity even further. Once completed, Karwar will be capable of hosting 50 warships and submarines, as well as 40 auxiliary craft. Spread across a 25-kilometer stretch, this facility will stand as one of the largest and most advanced naval installations in the region.

These developments underscore India’s long-term vision of transforming into a blue-water navy capable of operating across vast oceanic distances. The focus on nuclear-powered submarines and expansive bases reflects the country’s strategic priorities in an increasingly contested Indo-Pacific landscape.

India’s naval modernization efforts are taking place against the backdrop of China’s expanding maritime influence. The Chinese Navy has been steadily increasing its presence in the Indian Ocean Region, often conducting patrols, setting up bases, and deploying submarines under the guise of anti-piracy missions. In response, India is making calculated moves to ensure it remains prepared and competitive in the strategic theatre that spans from the Strait of Hormuz to the South China Sea.

By focusing on stealthy submarine deployments, bolstering infrastructure on both coasts, and investing in next-generation nuclear-powered vessels, India is sending a clear message about its commitment to maritime security and regional stability. The commissioning of the Rambilli base in 2026 will mark a significant milestone in this strategic journey. As Project Varsha and Project Seabird advance in parallel, India is positioning itself as a formidable maritime power prepared to meet the evolving security challenges of the 21st century.

Indian Americans Reflect on U.S.-India Relations Amid Major Elections in 2024

The year 2024 earned the distinction of being dubbed the “year of elections,” as over 1.5 billion people around the world participated in choosing new governments across seventy-three nations. Among these, two particularly significant elections took place in India and the United States, both of which could have far-reaching global implications.

In India, the June 2024 general election saw Prime Minister Narendra Modi secure a third term in office. While his Bharatiya Janata Party (BJP) failed to achieve an outright majority in parliament, Modi’s personal popularity and political influence remained intact. Despite the initial perception of a political setback, the BJP quickly regained momentum by clinching major victories in a series of state elections held in the aftermath. Meanwhile, in the United States, the November election resulted in the re-election of Republican President Donald Trump. This outcome denied then Vice President Kamala Harris the chance to succeed Democratic President Joe Biden.

These landmark elections unfolded amid a growing U.S.-India strategic partnership—one that has shown both promise and tension. Several issues emerged ahead of the U.S. election that strained bilateral ties. Among them were policy differences concerning the Bangladesh government under Sheikh Hasina, a U.S. federal indictment involving Indian tycoon Gautam Adani on corruption charges, and the high-profile allegation that an Indian official had orchestrated a “murder-for-hire” plot aimed at assassinating a pro-Khalistan separatist, a U.S. citizen, on American soil.

These developments naturally prompted questions about the Indian American community’s outlook on foreign policy. With over 5 million people of Indian descent now living in the United States, their perspectives carry increasing weight. Key questions included: How did Indian Americans view the Biden administration’s handling of ties with India? Did they believe Trump would strengthen relations with India? And how did they assess India’s own political direction, especially following the 2024 election?

To answer these questions, the Carnegie Endowment for International Peace, in collaboration with research firm YouGov, conducted a nationally representative online poll of 1,206 Indian American adults between September 18 and October 15, 2024. The Indian American Attitudes Survey (IAAS) carries a margin of error of plus or minus 3 percent.

The survey found that Indian Americans largely approved of the Biden administration’s performance in managing U.S.-India relations over the past four years. At the same time, their expectations for the renewed Trump administration were more reserved and mixed. Regarding India, Indian Americans expressed increased confidence in the country’s direction compared to the 2020 period. A significant number voiced approval for Modi’s leadership, though some expressed unease about rising Hindu majoritarianism within India.

This survey constitutes the second installment in a three-part series exploring Indian Americans’ attitudes on social, political, and foreign policy matters, based on the 2024 IAAS. Below is a summary of the major findings from the study.

First, Indian Americans evaluated the Biden administration’s approach to India in a generally positive light. About 50 percent of those surveyed expressed approval of how the Biden White House handled relations with India. Around four in ten participants felt that the Biden administration offered an appropriately balanced level of support to India. Nonetheless, opinions varied when it came to how effectively the administration balanced American values with strategic interests.

On the other hand, the return of Donald Trump to the presidency was met with some concern among Indian Americans. Respondents rated Biden’s record on India somewhat more favorably than Trump’s first term. Additionally, many believed that the U.S.-India relationship would have fared better under a Kamala Harris administration than under a second Trump term.

Another issue explored in the survey was the “murder-for-hire” controversy, which had the potential to strain diplomatic ties. The data revealed that only about half of the respondents were even aware of the allegations involving India’s role in the attempted assassination of a U.S. citizen. A narrow majority felt that such actions could not be justified by any country, and they indicated they would feel similarly if the roles were reversed, with the U.S. targeting someone on Indian soil.

The survey also shed light on Indian Americans’ divided opinions about the Israeli-Palestinian conflict. Rather than reflecting a unified view, respondents displayed a broad range of opinions shaped significantly by political affiliations. Democrats were generally more sympathetic to the Palestinian cause, while Republicans showed greater support for Israel. Interestingly, 40 percent of all respondents believed the Biden administration had shown excessive favoritism toward Israel during the ongoing crisis.

When compared to the 2020 survey, Indian Americans in 2024 demonstrated a more optimistic perspective regarding India’s trajectory. Forty-seven percent said they believe India is heading in the right direction, which is a 10-point jump from four years earlier. The same proportion of respondents—47 percent—also voiced approval of Prime Minister Modi’s performance. In addition, four in ten respondents believed that the 2024 election had made India more democratic.

Despite Modi’s reduced parliamentary majority, the diaspora’s outlook on India’s internal affairs appears more confident than in the past. Still, concerns about religious nationalism continue to persist, suggesting that Indian Americans are watching closely as Modi enters his third term.

As for foreign relations, the community’s views reflect both satisfaction with past diplomatic management and skepticism about the road ahead. The Biden administration earned credit for its steadiness and for prioritizing India as a key global partner. However, the return of Trump brought more hesitation than enthusiasm among survey participants. Indian Americans seemed to favor continuity, with some having preferred a Harris presidency to carry forward Biden’s approach.

The 2024 elections have underscored not only the changing political landscape in two of the world’s largest democracies but also the growing significance of the Indian American community in shaping perspectives on global diplomacy. With roots in India and deep connections in the U.S., this community continues to serve as a vital bridge in navigating one of the most important bilateral relationships of the 21st century.

As this series of surveys continues, more insights are expected to emerge on the evolving political identity and influence of Indian Americans, both in domestic American politics and in matters that touch upon their ancestral homeland.

Zoho’s Sridhar Vembu Warns of Looming Global Financial Collapse Rooted in US Debt

Zoho Corporation’s chief scientist Sridhar Vembu has raised alarm bells over the current state of the global financial system, likening it to a fragile “house of cards” sustained by America’s growing debt. In a lengthy post on Sunday, Vembu explained that the financial system underpinning international trade for the past five decades is fundamentally flawed and now approaching a potential collapse.

“To understand the present crisis, it is useful to understand how the global system has ‘worked’ for the last 50 years,” Vembu wrote on social media platform X. According to him, the core mechanism involved the United States consistently importing more than it exported, issuing dollars to finance those imports. These dollars, in turn, were amplified in the international banking framework, which allowed them to serve as the backbone for nearly all global trade and investment between countries.

Vembu highlighted the inherent flaw in such a system: it required the US to perpetually go into debt in order to fund global trade. This dynamic, he warned, came at a significant cost to the American industrial sector. “That is what happens when you have to keep importing more than you export for a long time,” he wrote, implying that the erosion of domestic manufacturing strength was a long-term consequence of this trade model.

Looking back to the 1980s, Vembu referenced the 1985 Plaza Accord as a critical moment when the US attempted to correct its trade imbalances. At the time, Japan and Germany played roles similar to what China plays today—nations with large trade surpluses against the US. “Even as of 1985 (Japan/Germany then playing the role of China now) the system suffered from huge friction due to US manufacturers being outcompeted by lower priced imports…Japan also agreed to ‘voluntarily’ curb its exports to the US,” Vembu recalled. That episode, he suggested, revealed cracks in the system even decades ago.

Vembu was unequivocal in his assessment of the system’s foundations. He stated bluntly, “The system was never sound,” and added that, in his view, “the system has now reached its breaking point.” His comments come at a time of heightened economic strain and escalating geopolitical tensions, particularly between the United States and China.

As these tensions rise—fueled by tit-for-tat tariffs, curbs on rare earth exports, and sanctions on companies tied to defense sectors—Vembu emphasized the urgent need to rethink the basis of global trade. “What we need is a better foundation for the global trading system,” he argued. In his view, returning to precious metals as a global standard could offer more stability. “I believe Gold/Silver have to make a comeback as the settlement currency among nations (pay for imports with gold),” he suggested.

Vembu contended that such a shift would naturally limit the potential for long-term trade imbalances. “This will massively reduce imbalances, because the prospect of running out of gold is a real limit on imports,” he explained. Unlike the current system, where digital claims can be endlessly layered upon debt, a gold-based trade framework would introduce a tangible restraint, according to him.

Nonetheless, Vembu acknowledged that transitioning away from the status quo would not be easy. “The system has massive paper (digital) claims piled up on top of claims, finally rooted in claims on US debt. That house of cards is the global financial system. We may be facing a structural collapse,” he warned. His stark assessment suggests that the world’s financial infrastructure may be far more vulnerable than most realize.

His statements came in response to a comment by Zeitcore founder Kelly Smith, who expressed skepticism about a return to gold or silver-based trade. Vembu posed a rhetorical question in reply: “What would be the ‘something else’? Bitcoin as the global settlement currency? Commodity backed crypto?” While acknowledging the possibility of alternative systems, he expressed doubt about their practicality and emphasized the unique value of gold. “We clearly need a system that does not depend on the US running bigger and bigger deficits. Gold has one virtue that even non-cooperating nations can trade at arms length!” he asserted.

Vembu’s warnings come at a volatile moment in global markets. The recent imposition of sweeping tariffs by US President Donald Trump has stoked fears of an impending recession. These new tariffs, aimed at imports from a range of countries, have already had a dramatic impact on investor sentiment. The US stock market has responded with its worst week since the COVID-19 crisis. The Dow Jones Industrial Average dropped by 7.5%, the S&P 500 fell 9.1%, and the Nasdaq tumbled by a steep 10%.

The market turmoil reflects growing concerns over the direction of global trade and the durability of existing economic structures. Economists, including those from JPMorgan, have increased the probability of a US recession to 60%, directly attributing the shift to the economic consequences of the tariffs. Meanwhile, China has responded in kind, announcing an additional 34% tariff on all US goods. The retaliatory move has only intensified fears of a full-scale trade war and contributed further to financial instability.

Vembu’s concerns go beyond just tariffs and trade battles. At the heart of his critique is a deeper structural issue: the reliance on debt-financed consumption by the world’s largest economy to support global trade. He suggests that this model is now dangerously overstretched and that the time has come for a fundamental rethinking of how countries conduct economic exchange.

While some may consider his proposals idealistic or outdated, his broader message is a call for realism in global finance. The decades-long reliance on the US dollar as the de facto international currency, he argues, has allowed for unchecked deficits and unsustainable debt accumulation. His belief that gold or another tangible asset should serve as a universal medium of exchange is rooted in the idea that it would force nations to live within their means, thereby fostering a more balanced and less volatile global system.

Whether or not his prediction of a structural collapse materializes, Vembu’s message taps into a growing unease about the fragility of the existing financial architecture. As trade tensions mount and economic indicators flash warning signs, his call for a reset in how the world handles trade and finance is likely to resonate with those seeking alternatives to the current order.

India, US Push for Swift Bilateral Trade Agreement Amid Tariff Tensions

India’s External Affairs Minister S. Jaishankar and US Secretary of State Marco Rubio have emphasized the urgent need to finalize an India-US Bilateral Trade Agreement (BTA) during a phone conversation on April 7. The discussion comes amid escalating tensions following recent US tariff hikes on Indian goods, which have added pressure on both sides to expedite the deal.

The conversation between Jaishankar and Rubio marks a critical moment in the evolving trade relationship between the two nations. It reflects a shared understanding that the BTA must be concluded without further delay to safeguard mutual economic interests and address growing trade challenges.

In a social media post following the call, Jaishankar shared, “Good to speak with @SecRubio today. Exchanged perspectives on the Indo-Pacific, the Indian Sub-continent, Europe, Middle East/West Asia and the Caribbean. Agreed on the importance of the early conclusion of the Bilateral Trade Agreement. Look forward to remaining in touch.” The quote highlights the wide-ranging scope of the discussion, while underscoring the central focus on trade cooperation.

This high-level exchange followed the recent visit of Brendan Lynch, the US Assistant Trade Representative for South and Central Asia, who led a delegation to India from March 25 to 29 for bilateral trade talks. Lynch’s visit was aimed at pushing forward the long-pending BTA, with the two sides discussing ways to enhance market access and reduce both tariff and non-tariff barriers. These hurdles have been long-standing points of contention in India-US trade negotiations.

A key motivation behind the renewed push for the agreement is the US government’s recent move to increase tariffs on Indian exports. On April 2, President Donald Trump announced a 27 percent reciprocal tariff on Indian goods. This tariff hike is part of a broader protectionist measure that also targets imports from China and the European Union. The sharp increase in duties has caused concern within Indian policy circles and among exporters, who now face reduced competitiveness in the American market.

While Washington has described these tariff measures as reciprocal and justified by trade imbalances, New Delhi views them as a signal to accelerate dialogue rather than retreat into trade confrontation. The Modi government is keen to avoid a repeat of the 2018-2019 trade friction, when the US removed India from its Generalized System of Preferences (GSP) list, triggering retaliatory tariffs from India and straining diplomatic ties.

Despite the new trade pressure, Indian officials have publicly projected a calm and confident outlook on the country’s economic trajectory. The Indian government continues to estimate GDP growth between 6.3 and 6.8 percent for the fiscal year 2025–26, assuming international oil prices remain stable. The economic optimism reflects India’s growing resilience and its attempt to maintain investor confidence amid external shocks.

However, some private sector economists have expressed a more cautious view. The imposition of steep tariffs by the US has prompted several research firms and financial analysts to revise their growth forecasts downward. Their concern centers around potential disruptions in India’s export sector, particularly in key industries such as textiles, pharmaceuticals, and machinery, which are highly dependent on access to the American market.

The proposed Bilateral Trade Agreement is expected to be a comprehensive deal covering not only goods but also services, intellectual property rights, digital trade, and investment. Negotiators from both sides have long grappled with sensitive areas such as agricultural market access, e-commerce regulations, and data localization policies. Yet, there is increasing recognition in both Washington and New Delhi that failure to strike a deal could harm strategic ties at a time when both countries are seeking to counterbalance China’s growing economic influence.

The India-US trade relationship has expanded significantly in recent years, with bilateral goods and services trade crossing $190 billion in 2023. However, issues like divergent regulatory standards, visa restrictions, and protectionist tendencies have prevented a more balanced and seamless flow of commerce. Indian officials have been calling for greater US openness toward Indian services and technology exports, while American negotiators have pressed India to open up its agricultural and retail sectors.

During Brendan Lynch’s visit, officials from both countries reiterated their commitment to resolving these issues through sustained engagement. The Indian Ministry of Commerce and Industry stated that talks were “constructive and forward-looking,” and that both sides had agreed to continue working toward a framework that encourages mutual growth and investment.

While the imposition of the new tariffs has introduced an element of urgency, it has also provided an opportunity for both governments to prioritize trade reform. The economic impact of the COVID-19 pandemic and shifting global supply chains have further emphasized the need for trusted partnerships. For India, aligning more closely with the US economically could bring new investment, technology transfer, and improved access to critical markets.

For the United States, strengthening trade with India offers a chance to diversify supply chains away from China, access a vast consumer base, and deepen ties with a democratic partner in the Indo-Pacific region. Secretary of State Marco Rubio, who recently assumed office, has echoed this strategic view in his public statements, emphasizing the value of expanding economic cooperation with India as part of a broader regional strategy.

The April 7 call between Jaishankar and Rubio signals a new phase in these efforts. The ministers’ shared commitment to an early conclusion of the BTA indicates that high-level political will exists to overcome longstanding differences. Whether this will translate into an actual agreement in the coming months remains to be seen, but momentum appears to be building.

The coming weeks are likely to see intensified negotiations, including more technical-level discussions and possible ministerial meetings. Trade experts believe that progress will depend on how flexibly both sides approach sticking points, and whether political leadership can translate goodwill into binding commitments.

For now, the agreement between Jaishankar and Rubio on the need for swift action has set a constructive tone. As Jaishankar noted, “Agreed on the importance of the early conclusion of the Bilateral Trade Agreement. Look forward to remaining in touch.” With the clock ticking and economic stakes rising, both sides may be entering one of the most decisive phases in India-US trade relations.

Lok Sabha Passes Waqf Amendment Bill Amid Fierce Opposition, Concerns Over Minority Rights

India’s lower house of Parliament has passed a contentious piece of legislation that aims to overhaul the governance of waqf properties—assets worth billions of dollars donated over centuries by Indian Muslims for charitable and religious purposes. The Waqf (Amendment) Bill, 2024, introduces a series of changes to the existing law and was cleared by the Lok Sabha late Wednesday night following a marathon 12-hour debate marked by intense exchanges.

According to the government, the bill is designed to bring greater transparency to the administration of waqf properties. However, opposition parties and various Muslim organizations view the bill as a calculated attempt to erode the constitutional protections granted to India’s Muslim community, the country’s largest religious minority.

The bill passed in the Lok Sabha with 288 Members of Parliament supporting it and 232 opposing it, barely crossing the halfway threshold of 272 required for approval. The legislation now moves to the Rajya Sabha, the upper house, for further discussion and potential passage. Should it clear that chamber, it will then be forwarded to President Droupadi Murmu for her signature to officially become law.

Initially introduced in Parliament in August last year, the bill was sent to a Joint Parliamentary Committee (JPC) amid strong protests from opposition lawmakers. The version that was eventually passed includes several revisions recommended by the committee. However, opposition members claim that the JPC, dominated by the ruling Bharatiya Janata Party (BJP) and its allies, only approved amendments that aligned with the government’s interests and ignored all proposals put forward by non-BJP members.

Mallikarjun Kharge, the Congress leader in the Rajya Sabha and leader of the opposition, criticized the bill harshly, stating, “The opposition is united and will work to defeat the unconstitutional and divisive agenda of the Modi government on the Waqf Amendment Bill.” Despite this vow, the numbers in the upper house may not favor the opposition, making the bill’s ultimate defeat uncertain.

Muslim advocacy groups have voiced strong opposition to the bill, suggesting that it undermines established waqf laws and could lead to the systematic seizure and potential destruction of properties currently protected under the waqf system. In their view, the legislation represents a significant threat to religious and charitable institutions within the Muslim community.

Congress MP Gaurav Gogoi echoed these concerns during the Lok Sabha debate. “This bill will dilute the Constitution, defame minority communities, divide Indian society, and disenfranchise minorities,” he warned. Gogoi’s remarks highlighted the broader apprehension that the bill is not just a technical or administrative update but part of a political strategy that marginalizes minorities.

Defending the bill, Federal Home Minister Amit Shah argued that the opposition was misleading the public. “The opposition is scaring minorities by creating an illusion that this bill would interfere in the religious activities of Muslim brothers and in their donated property,” Shah said. He emphasized that the goal was not to infringe upon religious freedoms but to introduce order and transparency into the waqf system, which has long been criticized for mismanagement and encroachment.

Waqf properties include an array of assets such as mosques, madrassas (Islamic schools), orphanages, and large tracts of land that have been donated by Muslims for community use. Some properties remain unused or vacant, while others have been illegally occupied or disputed. By Islamic custom, waqf refers to a charitable or religious endowment whose purpose is to serve the public good. These assets are considered the property of God and are not to be sold or diverted for other uses.

The Indian government notes that waqf boards are among the largest landowners in the country. Official records indicate there are at least 872,351 registered waqf properties throughout India, collectively covering more than 940,000 acres. The estimated value of these assets stands at approximately 1.2 trillion rupees, equivalent to $14.22 billion or £11.26 billion.

One of the most controversial aspects of the bill is its provision granting the government more control over the regulation and classification of waqf assets. Critics argue this represents an overreach of state power and threatens the independence of waqf boards, which are supposed to function autonomously to manage these religious and charitable properties.

Additionally, the bill includes a clause calling for the appointment of two non-Muslim members to waqf boards. This move has sparked further outrage among critics, who note that similar inclusivity is not mandated for the governance of religious institutions belonging to other faiths. Most non-Muslim religious bodies in India do not permit individuals of different religions to participate in their internal administration.

Opposition parties argue that this requirement is discriminatory and inconsistent, especially given that waqf institutions are religious in nature and have traditionally been managed by members of the Muslim community. They contend that such a provision could interfere with the faith-based administration of these endowments and erode the community’s ability to manage its own charitable resources.

For now, the bill’s fate rests with the Rajya Sabha, where the ruling party may face a more difficult path due to a less favorable distribution of seats. However, even if opposition parties mount a strong resistance in the upper house, the BJP-led government has often relied on support from regional allies to push legislation through.

The broader implications of the bill continue to stir concern across political and religious lines. For many, the legislation symbolizes more than just administrative reform—it is seen as a test of India’s commitment to pluralism, minority rights, and constitutional values.

As the debate shifts to the Rajya Sabha, both supporters and opponents of the bill are likely to intensify their efforts. The final outcome will not only determine the future of the waqf properties but may also shape the trajectory of minority rights discourse in India for years to come.

Protesters Rally Nationwide Against Trump’s Policies and Influence

Across the United States, demonstrators gathered on Saturday to denounce what progressive groups described as Donald Trump’s “authoritarian overreach and billionaire-backed agenda.” The protests, organized by a coalition of left-leaning organizations, were held in various states including Washington DC and Florida, with organizers estimating participation by over half a million people.

In Washington DC, thousands from across the country converged on the National Mall, standing beneath the towering Washington Monument to express their opposition to Trump’s leadership. Protesters, some having traveled from distant states like New Hampshire and Pennsylvania, carried placards voicing discontent with the administration’s policies. Some also carried Ukrainian flags, signaling their objection to the administration’s friendly posture toward Russia, even as the country continues its invasion of Ukraine.

This large gathering marked the first significant protest in the capital since Trump assumed office. Demonstrators hoped it would set a precedent and encourage more Americans to voice their dissent. Diane Kolifrath, a 63-year-old from New Hampshire, attended with around 100 members from New Hampshire Forward, a civic group. “The aim is, get people to rise up,” she said. She added, “Many people are scared to protest against Trump because he has reacted aggressively and violently to those who have stood up. The goal of this protest is to let the rest of Americans who aren’t participating see that we are standing up and hopefully when they see our strength, that will give them the courage to also stand up.”

The coordinated day of demonstrations, called “Hands Off,” was spearheaded by MoveOn and supported by more than a thousand protests held across the country, including many outside state capitols. Numerous progressive groups—ranging from labor unions to environmental and civil rights organizations—joined forces to mobilize support.

Leah Greenberg, executive director of Indivisible, emphasized the protests’ broader message. “We want to send a signal to all people and institutions that have been showing anticipatory obedience to Trump and showing they are willing to bend the knee that there is, in fact, a mass public movement that’s willing to rise up and stop this,” she said. “If our political leaders stand up, we will have their backs. We want them to stand up and protect the norms of democracy and want them to see that there are people out there who are willing to do that. The goal of this is building a message.”

The largest of the day’s protests took place in Washington, DC, where tens of thousands assembled. Several Democratic lawmakers, including Jamie Raskin from Maryland, Maxwell Frost from Florida, and Ilhan Omar from Minnesota, addressed the crowd. Raskin, a senior Democrat on the House Judiciary Committee, warned against threats to the democratic process. “They believe democracy is doomed and they believe regime change is upon us if only they can seize our payments system,” he said. He added, “If they think they are going to overthrow the foundations of democracy, they don’t know who they are dealing with.”

Kelley Robinson, president of the Human Rights Campaign, spoke about the administration’s attacks on the LGBTQ+ community. At the National Mall rally, she told the crowd, “The attacks that we’re seeing, they’re not just political. They are personal, y’all. They’re trying to ban our books, they’re slashing HIV-prevention funding, they’re criminalizing our doctors, our teachers, our families and our lives.” She concluded with a call for a more inclusive future: “We don’t want this America, y’all. We want the America we deserve, where dignity, safety and freedom belong not to some of us, but to all of us.”

In Hollywood, Florida, about an hour from Trump’s Mar-a-Lago residence, protesters made their views known through chants and creative signs. Many criticized billionaire advisor Elon Musk and his influence on government decisions. A crowd of mostly white demonstrators chanted, “Hey, hey, ho, ho, Trump and Musk have got to go.” They voiced their disapproval to passing drivers in Tesla Cybertrucks, products of Musk’s electric vehicle company.

Protest signs in Florida reflected widespread anger. One read, “Prosecute and jail the Turd Reich.” Another sign targeted Musk directly, stating, “I did not elect Elon Musk.” Others focused on defending democratic norms, such as “Hands off democracy” and “Stop being Putin’s puppet,” the latter referencing the Russian leader.

Many passing motorists expressed support, honking and giving thumbs-up gestures. The demonstration occurred in Broward County, one of just six counties in Florida that supported Kamala Harris during the November election, where she beat Trump by a 16-point margin. Broward also hosts one of the nation’s most active LGBTQ+ communities.

Jennifer Heit, a 64-year-old editor from Plantation, was among the protesters. Holding a sign that read “USA: No to King or Oligarchy,” she voiced her concern over the current political climate. “This is an assault on our democracy, on our economy, on our civil rights,” she said. “Everything is looking so bad that I feel we have to do all we can while we can, and just having all this noise is unsettling to everyone.”

Heit, who had previously protested outside a Tesla dealership in Fort Lauderdale, said she was alarmed by Trump’s disregard for the legal system and due process, particularly concerning immigrants. “We’re supposed to be a nation of laws and due process,” she said.

Another protester, Donna Greene, a 62-year-old public health researcher, came dressed as Marie Antoinette, the beheaded French queen. She carried a sign that read: “Musk and Trump Say Let Them Eat Cake.” Greene, whose father Sam Ragland flew 65 missions during World War II, reflected on the nation’s transformation. “Everything my father fought for and everything we hold dear as a country is being dismantled,” she said. “I am beyond incredulous at how quickly our country’s institutions have been dismantled with no pushback from the Republicans who are currently in charge.”

In Ventura, California, Sandy Friedman joined the protest with her eight-year-old granddaughter, Harlow Rose Rega. Concerned about her financial future, Friedman said, “I worked my whole life and so did my husband. Now I’m afraid Trump will take it away.” Harlow held up a handmade sign that read: “Save my future.”

These demonstrations followed a week of economic turmoil, with the stock market plunging after Trump’s announcement on April 1 of new tariffs. Despite the economic shockwaves, Trump remained firm, saying on Friday, “My policies will never change.”

Public dissatisfaction with his leadership appeared to be growing. According to a Reuters poll released this week, Trump’s approval rating dropped to 43 percent—its lowest point since he took office.

As the crowds dispersed after a day of protest, organizers and participants alike emphasized the same goal: to stand up against what they view as a dangerous shift in American governance and to inspire others to act before it’s too late.

Pope Francis Makes First Public Appearance After Hospitalization, Appears in Better Health

Pope Francis surprised the public with an unexpected appearance on Sunday, marking his first time being seen in public since his discharge from the hospital two weeks ago. The leader of the Catholic Church appeared in Vatican City, greeting worshippers and showing signs of improvement after a serious illness that had kept him hospitalized for over a month.

The pope, now 88 years old, was seen in a wheelchair and appeared to be using a nasal cannula to assist with his breathing. Despite this, he looked cheerful and engaged warmly with the crowd that had gathered at the Vatican.

Francis had spent five weeks at Gemelli Hospital in Rome due to a bout of pneumonia that developed following a severe respiratory infection. His condition had become so serious that his medical team said his life was at risk at one point during the illness. “There were two very critical episodes in which the Holy Father’s life was in danger,” his doctors told reporters during a press conference.

The pontiff’s most recent public sighting before Sunday took place two weeks earlier, shortly before his release from the hospital. At that time, he was noticeably frail—he struggled to speak and had difficulty raising his arms. However, even then, he managed to offer a wave and gave a thumbs-up to the people from a balcony.

In contrast, during Sunday’s brief appearance, Francis appeared to be in better form. While his voice remained weak, it was noticeably stronger than before, and he moved his arms with greater ease than during his previous appearance.

The event was unannounced, taking many by surprise. Worshippers had gathered at St. Peter’s Square in the Vatican for a mass focused on the sick, unaware that the pope would be making an appearance afterward. When the smiling pope was wheeled into view, the crowd erupted into cheers, showing their excitement and affection.

According to the Vatican, the pope had earlier gone to confession inside St. Peter’s Basilica on Sunday morning before stepping outside to greet pilgrims and faithful gathered in the square. His visit to the mass and his time with the people afterward demonstrated his commitment to his role despite recent health challenges.

The pope’s health ordeal began on February 14 when he was first admitted to Gemelli Hospital. He was initially diagnosed with a severe respiratory infection, but his condition later worsened. Doctors identified it as a polymicrobial infection, which eventually turned into pneumonia in both of his lungs.

After being discharged on March 23, Pope Francis returned to his residence at Casa Santa Marta within the Vatican. At the time, his doctors stressed that he would need a lengthy recovery period. “He would need to recuperate for at least two months to allow his body time to fully heal,” they said.

The 38-day hospital stay has been described as the most serious health crisis Francis has faced since assuming the papacy in 2013. Though he has dealt with other health concerns in the past, this recent episode highlighted the vulnerability of the aging pope and raised concerns about his future ability to perform his duties.

Nevertheless, his surprise appearance on Sunday has been interpreted by many as a hopeful sign. Although still clearly in recovery, the pope’s public engagement suggested that he is on the path to regaining strength and may be gradually returning to his regular responsibilities.

During the appearance, he did not deliver a full speech or sermon, but his presence alone was enough to energize and uplift the gathered crowd. His ability to offer simple gestures, such as smiling, waving, and making eye contact, provided a sense of continuity and reassurance to those present.

Francis’s resilience has long been a defining trait of his papacy. Throughout his tenure, he has faced a number of challenges—both within the Church and in terms of his personal health. Despite these hurdles, he has maintained a consistent presence in the lives of millions of Catholics worldwide, and his willingness to appear publicly even during recovery reflects his dedication.

The Vatican has not offered a detailed schedule for the pope’s return to full duties, and it remains unclear when he will resume leading masses or traveling. For now, his team appears to be taking a cautious approach, ensuring that he does not exert himself too much during this crucial recovery phase.

Though brief, Sunday’s appearance served as an emotional moment for many Catholics who had been closely following news of the pope’s health struggles. It was also a reminder of the importance of spiritual leadership, especially during difficult times.

One Vatican official, speaking anonymously, said the visit had been arranged at the last minute. “He wanted to be there. It was important to him,” the official said. The decision, while unexpected, was greeted with joy by the faithful and demonstrated the pope’s enduring commitment to his flock.

In the coming weeks, observers will likely be watching closely for further signs of the pope’s recovery. Whether or not he returns to a full public schedule, his recent health ordeal has already added a new chapter to his papacy—one marked by vulnerability, courage, and a deeply personal connection with those who look to him for guidance.

Pope Francis has often spoken about suffering and the importance of caring for the sick, and his actions on Sunday reinforced those values. By making an appearance shortly after a mass dedicated to the ill, he subtly underscored his solidarity with those facing health challenges.

While questions remain about his long-term health, one thing was clear from the scene in St. Peter’s Square: the pope’s presence, even in a weakened state, continues to inspire deep emotion and unwavering devotion among his followers.

His journey through illness and recovery is far from over, but Sunday’s moment was one of connection and hope—a quiet reminder that even amid frailty, the spirit of leadership and compassion can shine through.

Mohanlal Breaks His Own Record Again with Empuraan, Setting a New Benchmark for Mollywood

Mohanlal has once again proven why he remains a dominant force in Malayalam cinema. After a nine-year wait, the veteran actor, who earlier set the benchmark for industry hits in Mollywood, has broken his own record with the release of Empuraan. This political action-thriller, directed by Prithviraj Sukumaran and serving as the sequel to Lucifer, is now officially the highest-grossing Malayalam film ever, surpassing the lifetime collection of the previously reigning box office hit, Manjummel Boys.

Despite facing controversies and a mixed critical reception, Empuraan has managed to pull off a remarkable feat at the box office. The film’s script was penned by Murali Gopy, and it was released worldwide on March 27 to record-breaking numbers. The success of this film marks a significant moment for Mohanlal’s fans, who had been awaiting such a breakthrough. After several years without a monumental box office win, they are now celebrating what they consider a triumphant return for their beloved star.

Even though Empuraan received mixed reviews and struggled in dubbed versions across other languages, the original Malayalam version has been dominating the box office. Within just ten days of its release, the film collected a staggering Rs 250 crore. This box office performance has made it the biggest Mollywood grosser ever.

Sharing his excitement with fans, Mohanlal took to social media to express his gratitude. “#L2E #Empuraan now reigns as the highest-grossing film in Malayalam cinema history,” he wrote.

This new accomplishment adds to Mohanlal’s already impressive list of industry hits. Since the year 2000, five out of the ten top-grossing Mollywood films have featured Mohanlal. These include Narasimham (2000), Twenty20 (2008), which also starred Mammootty and Suresh Gopi, Drishyam (2013), Pulimurugan (2016), and now Empuraan. Each of these films set new records during their respective releases and reaffirmed Mohanlal’s status as a box office heavyweight.

Mohanlal’s track record of delivering massive hits dates back even further, with eleven projects from 1980 onwards achieving massive success. Among these early hits are Irupatham Nootandu (1987), Chithram (1988), Kilukkam (1991), Manichithrathazhu (1993), and Aaram Thampuran (1997). His ability to consistently attract audiences to theaters has helped shape the trajectory of Malayalam cinema over the past several decades.

A significant reason behind Empuraan‘s phenomenal success is its grand scale and production value. The movie was made on a massive budget of Rs 180 crore, positioning it among the most expensive productions in Malayalam cinema history. Impressively, it recovered more than its entire budget and reached Rs 250 crore in earnings even before completing two full weekends in Indian theaters.

The film’s success isn’t limited to India alone. The Malayalam version has been performing well in Gulf countries and several other international markets. The global appeal and reach of the movie have contributed significantly to its overall box office figures.

The production journey of Empuraan itself was ambitious. It was conceived during the COVID-19 pandemic and filmed in numerous locations across the globe. The crew shot scenes in Indian cities such as Kerala, Chennai, Mumbai, Hyderabad, Faridabad, Haryana, Shimla, and Ladakh, as well as international locations including New York, New Mexico, Louisiana, Atlanta, the United Kingdom, and the United Arab Emirates. With such an expansive shooting schedule, Empuraan holds the distinction of being the first Malayalam film to be shot across so many different places on multiple continents.

Remarkably, the film’s shooting was wrapped up in just 145 days—28 days ahead of the originally scheduled timeline. Adding to the uniqueness of this production, both director Prithviraj Sukumaran and lead actor Mohanlal did not take any remuneration for their work. Instead, they opted for a profit-sharing model, ensuring that every rupee spent went into making the film itself.

Empuraan picks up five years after the events of Lucifer, exploring the aftermath of the Khureshi-Ab’Raam nexus. The world is once again plunged into a socio-political crisis that promises to be transformational. This gripping premise sets the stage for yet another high-stakes confrontation, blending action and political intrigue.

The film features a star-studded cast led by Mohanlal. Prithviraj Sukumaran reprises his role as Zayed Masood, while Tovino Thomas plays Jathin Ramdas. Other prominent actors in the film include Manju Warrier as Priyadarshini Ramdas, Abhimanyu Singh as Balraj, Indrajith Sukumaran as Govardhan, and international stars like Jerome Flynn as Boris Oliver and Eriq Ebouaney as Kabuga.

The ensemble also includes Kishore as Karthik, Andrea Tivadar as Michele Menuhin, Suraj Venjaramoodu as Sajanachandran, Saikumar as Mahesha Varma, Baiju Santhosh as Murugan, Fazil as Father Nedumpally, Sachin Khedekar as PK Ramdas, and Saniya Iyappan as Jhanvi. The film also features Nyla Usha, Giju John, Nandhu, Shivaji Guruvayoor, Manikuttan, Aneesh G. Menon, Sshivada, Alexx O’Nell, Satyajit Sharma, Shubhangi Latkar, Nikhat Khan, and Jaise Jose in various key roles.

Behind the scenes, the film boasts an equally talented crew. The cinematography was handled by Sujith Vaassudev, whose visuals bring the large-scale vision to life. Editing was done by Akhilesh Mohan, ensuring the complex narrative was tightly woven. The music and background score, which play a crucial role in intensifying the film’s atmosphere, were composed by Deepak Dev. As with the previous installment, Murali Gopy provided both the story and screenplay.

With its compelling storyline, remarkable cast, and visionary production, Empuraan has not only lived up to expectations but exceeded them. The film’s critical and commercial success further cements Mohanlal’s legacy as a central figure in Malayalam cinema. It also establishes Empuraan as a cultural phenomenon, resonating with audiences far beyond Kerala.

As the film continues to rake in impressive numbers, fans and industry watchers alike are waiting to see how far it will go. For now, it’s safe to say that Empuraan has achieved legendary status, adding another glorious chapter to the legacy of Mohanlal.

India Ranks Second Globally in New Unicorns as Tech Startups See Major Revival in 2024

India recorded the second highest number of newly minted unicorns globally in 2024, adding six new companies to the elite group, according to a recent report. This brought the cumulative valuation of all Indian unicorns to over $220 billion, highlighting the country’s growing clout in the global startup arena. The report, jointly prepared by Nasscom and consulting firm Zinnov, was released alongside the ‘Startup Mahakumbh’ event.

The study found that unicorns—startups valued at over $1 billion—accounted for 33 percent of the total funding raised by Indian startups in 2024, signifying their strong influence on overall investment trends.

India’s tech startup ecosystem experienced a notable revival in 2024, marked by a 23 percent year-on-year increase in total funding, which rose to $7.4 billion. Deal activity also picked up considerably, with a 27 percent increase in the number of deals compared to 2023. This resurgence was mirrored in the formation of new startups—there was a 2.1 times increase in the number of newly established tech startups during the year, bringing the overall number of Indian tech startups to an estimated 32,000 to 35,000.

Rajesh Nambiar, President of Nasscom, commented on the evolving landscape, stating, “The growth across mature and emerging sectors, specifically in DeepTech and AI, outlines the Indian tech startup ecosystem’s growing maturity, evolving from being just a hub of opportunities to becoming a strategic force driving India’s digital economy.”

He emphasized the importance of DeepTech startups in India’s innovation-driven future, noting, “DeepTech startups play an increasingly crucial role in shaping India’s innovation landscape. Our focus now must be on strengthening the foundational pillars of this growth, from enhancing capital access to building robust innovation infrastructure, ensuring our startups can compete globally while solving uniquely Indian challenges.”

When examining funding trends based on company maturity levels, seed-stage startups witnessed the most significant growth in funding share, increasing by 29 percent over 2023. Early-stage startups followed closely with a 25 percent rise, while late-stage companies recorded a 21 percent growth in funding share. This shift signals a broader investor interest in nurturing newer businesses and untested ideas.

A major chunk of tech startup funding—around 67 percent—was directed towards mature sectors. These are industries with high aggregate funding volumes and a considerable share of overall deals, showing that investor confidence remained strong in sectors that had already demonstrated market potential.

One of the standout developments in the Indian tech space in 2024 was the surge in DeepTech investments. Funding in DeepTech, which includes areas such as artificial intelligence, machine learning, robotics, and advanced analytics, soared by 78 percent to reach $1.6 billion. This leap reflects a growing interest in frontier technologies and their transformative impact across sectors.

Pari Natarajan, CEO of Zinnov, underscored India’s expanding role as an innovation powerhouse. “At the heart of India’s growth, startups are fueling innovation and economic transformation. India is not just a consumer of cutting-edge technology but a creator, a leader and an architect of innovation,” he said.

The positive sentiment among founders and investors looks set to carry into the next year. According to the report, close to 75 percent of Indian tech startups are optimistic about funding prospects in 2025. Furthermore, nearly 98 percent of respondents expect their revenues to grow next year, suggesting that both financial and operational outlooks are on a promising trajectory.

In addition to financial optimism, the report hints at the growing resilience and adaptability of Indian startups. The significant uptick in newly founded startups and investment activity suggests a sector that has rebounded from past funding slumps and is actively seeking long-term growth.

Experts attribute this momentum to several structural shifts. These include a supportive policy environment, improved access to global capital, and a surge in entrepreneurial talent across Tier 1 and Tier 2 cities. The growing emphasis on DeepTech and AI further strengthens India’s position as not just a technology adopter but also a front-runner in developing solutions for global markets.

This evolution also signals a maturing ecosystem where entrepreneurs are no longer focused solely on short-term gains or exit strategies. Instead, they are building companies that address complex, large-scale challenges—from fintech to healthtech, and from climate technology to enterprise software.

However, sustaining this growth will require strategic efforts from all stakeholders. Nambiar stressed the need for a collaborative approach to fortify the ecosystem. He said it would be essential to “enhance capital access” and “build robust innovation infrastructure” to maintain the upward trajectory and ensure startups are globally competitive while addressing local issues effectively.

The rise in funding for seed and early-stage startups is especially promising as it indicates a shift towards fostering innovation at the ground level. Encouraging new entrepreneurs to take the leap, coupled with strong mentorship and financial backing, could be key to producing the next generation of unicorns.

Moreover, with a significant rise in DeepTech funding, India is increasingly poised to play a vital role in emerging technologies. The continued focus on sectors like AI and advanced engineering reflects the long-term commitment to develop intellectual property and cutting-edge solutions in-house, rather than relying solely on imports or collaborations.

Looking forward, both investors and startup founders appear confident that the momentum will sustain. As long as regulatory and infrastructural support keeps pace with innovation, India is likely to continue its upward climb on the global startup leaderboard.

In conclusion, the year 2024 has marked a significant turning point for Indian tech startups. The addition of six new unicorns, a sharp increase in overall funding and deal activity, and a renewed emphasis on DeepTech innovation signal not just a recovery, but a strategic evolution of the ecosystem. As startups continue to drive technological and economic transformation, India is cementing its role as both a global innovation leader and a domestic problem-solver.

Trump Administration Introduces Stricter Green Card Rules for Married Couples

The Trump administration has implemented notable changes to the green card application process for married couples, including revised forms, mandatory interviews, and expanded financial disclosures. These updates reflect the administration’s broader approach to tightening immigration enforcement.

President Donald Trump, who had promised sweeping immigration reforms during his campaign, has prioritized tougher policies throughout his presidency. Within the first few months of taking office, his administration deported approximately 100,000 undocumented immigrants. Among those detained and deported were individuals who were legal residents but had no ties to crime or gangs.

The administration has made clear that it is taking a hardline stance on immigration violations, targeting not only those who crossed the U.S.-Mexico border illegally but also others who breach immigration rules in various ways.

Even legal permanent residents have encountered obstacles under the new regime. One such example is Mahmoud Khalil, a Columbia University graduate student and Palestinian activist, who is currently facing removal proceedings despite holding a green card.

The modifications to the marriage-based green card process suggest that immigration policy may continue to shift in coming weeks, potentially affecting multiple aspects of the immigration system.

According to the United States Citizenship and Immigration Services (USCIS), lawful permanent residents have the right to live permanently in the country as long as they refrain from any actions that could render them deportable under immigration law. Such actions include legal violations and failure to file taxes.

Among the pathways to obtaining a green card is marriage to a U.S. citizen or another green card holder. In such cases, the U.S.-based spouse sponsors the foreign-born partner for permanent residency.

Though some of the recent changes may appear technical, they carry significant implications for applicants. One of the primary revisions is the introduction of a new version of Form I-485, known as the “Application to Register Permanent Residence or Adjust Status,” which became mandatory as of January 20. This updated form must now be used by all individuals seeking lawful permanent residency.

The revised form introduces several updates, including new gender identity options and the return of the word “alien.” These linguistic adjustments mirror similar terminology updates made to other immigration forms.

Immigration attorney Rachel Einbund told Newsweek during a phone conversation that a major addition to the updated form is a “public charge” section. This section requires applicants to “disclose their entire household income, their assets, their debts or liabilities, as well as if they have received any public assistance in the U.S.”

Another significant addition is found in Part 9 of the form, which pertains to general eligibility and inadmissibility. It now includes questions regarding the highest educational degree the applicant has earned, along with any certifications, licenses, or skills.

Einbund criticized these additions, saying they could dissuade lower-income applicants from applying. She described it as “more of a scare tactic to try and scare people who maybe don’t have a lot of income or don’t have continued education into not applying.”

An equally important change is the reimplementation of mandatory interviews for marriage-based green card applicants. Under President Biden’s administration in 2022, many of these interviews were waived if no warning signs were present in the application. According to Einbund, this was an effective method for the USCIS to reduce case backlogs and optimize the use of immigration officers’ time.

Einbund stated she had spoken with a USCIS officer who confirmed that interviews are once again required as part of a new internal policy. While no executive order has been issued, Trump has advocated for “enhanced vetting” in immigration matters, which this initiative likely aligns with.

Her advice to applicants is to “disclose everything,” emphasizing the importance of providing varied and substantial proof of a genuine relationship. “Proving that your marriage is real is the foundation of these cases,” she told Newsweek.

Newsweek also contacted USCIS via email on Thursday to confirm these changes and for additional comments.

In response, a USCIS spokesperson said in an email to Newsweek: “U.S. Citizenship and Immigration Services is committed to implementing policies and procedures that strengthen fraud detection, prevent identity theft, and support the enforcement of rigorous screening and vetting measures to the fullest extent possible. These efforts ensure that those seeking immigration benefits to live and work in the United States do not threaten public safety, undermine national security, or promote harmful anti-American ideologies.”

Amol Sinha, executive director of the ACLU of New Jersey, commented outside a courthouse on Friday about Khalil’s legal situation. “As we await the court’s ruling, what I am reminded of is the egregious nature of what the government has done. It is anti-democratic, un-American, illegal and unconstitutional to suppress speech, censor somebody, detain them and attempt to deport them and revoke their green card for speaking their mind.”

Attorney Colleen Kerwick, speaking to Newsweek in March, offered a different view. “A green card is a privilege, not a right. That privilege can be revoked if Mahmoud Khalil perpetrated a crime or wrong,” she said. Kerwick explained that Khalil had been accused of organizing an event that glorified Hamas’ October 7 attack. The United States classifies Hamas as a terrorist organization. She added, “The gravamen [most serious part] of his alleged wrong was social media posts, not yet traced to him.”

As of April 3, applicants must now use the newly revised Form I-485 for green card applications. Khalil, the Palestinian student and green card holder, is scheduled to appear before an immigration judge on April 8 for his removal hearing.

Einbund pointed out that immigration attorneys are bracing for further developments in policy. Many in the legal community anticipate that upcoming immigration forms will likely require applicants to disclose their social media handles, reflecting a growing emphasis on background scrutiny.

These ongoing changes reinforce the Trump administration’s determination to reshape the immigration process, not only through increased enforcement but also via procedural modifications designed to intensify scrutiny and discourage fraudulent or incomplete applications.

Ronnie Screwvala: Bollywood’s Only Billionaire on Forbes’ 2025 List

Forbes released its 2025 Billionaire List on Wednesday morning, highlighting the 3,028 dollar billionaires worldwide. Among them, 205 hail from India, spanning various industries, including entertainment and media. Notably, Bollywood has only one billionaire, an entrepreneur who once manufactured toothbrushes and has now amassed more wealth than the biggest superstars of the industry.

Bollywood’s Wealthiest Individual

According to Forbes, the only person from the Hindi film industry to surpass the billion-dollar mark is media mogul and entrepreneur Ronnie Screwvala. His net worth stands at $1.5 billion, making him richer than any superstar in Bollywood. In fact, his wealth exceeds the combined net worth of the industry’s biggest names. Shah Rukh Khan, valued at $770 million, Salman Khan at $390 million, and Aamir Khan at $220 million, collectively have a net worth of $1.38 billion—still short of Screwvala’s staggering fortune. Additionally, he surpasses other wealthy figures in Bollywood, including Gulshan Kumar, whose net worth is approximately $900 million, and Aditya Chopra, valued at $800 million.

Ronnie Screwvala’s Journey in Bollywood

Born in Bombay in 1956, Screwvala embarked on his entrepreneurial career in the late 1970s by manufacturing toothbrushes. When color television arrived in India in the early 1980s, fueled by the Asian Games, he seized the opportunity and pioneered cable TV across Indian metropolitan areas. This venture opened doors for him in the entertainment industry.

In 1990, Screwvala founded UTV, which later evolved into UTV Motion Pictures. Over the next two decades, the company produced several iconic films, including Swades, Rang De Basanti, Khosla Ka Ghosla, Jodhaa Akbar, Fashion, Delhi Belly, and Barfi!. It also delivered popular television shows such as Shanti, Hip Hip Hurray, Shaka Laka Boom Boom, Khichdi, and Shararat.

A major turning point came in 2012 when Screwvala sold UTV to Disney in a billion-dollar deal, exiting the company. However, his involvement in the entertainment world did not end there. Five years later, he returned to the industry by establishing RSVP Movies. Under this banner, he produced films such as Kedarnath, Uri, The Sky Is Pink, and Sam Bahadur. In 2024, he expanded his presence in the media by making his screen debut as one of the investors, or “sharks,” on Shark Tank India.

The Billionaire’s Multiple Ventures

Screwvala’s wealth is not solely derived from his film ventures. The 68-year-old has diversified his investments, playing a key role in founding and expanding multiple successful startups. Notably, he has stakes in UpGrad, Unilazer, and USports. These business ventures, coupled with his continued presence in the film industry, have enabled him to build his extraordinary fortune.

Trump Imposes Reciprocal Tariffs on India and Other Trade Surplus Nations

Early Thursday morning, U.S. President Donald Trump announced a broad set of reciprocal tariffs on multiple nations with trade surpluses against the United States, including India. Under the new policy, these countries will be subjected to tariffs equal to half of what they impose on U.S. goods. As a result, India will now face a 26% tariff on all its exports to the U.S.

Following two weeks of mounting tensions in the global economy, Trump implemented these tariffs on both allies and rivals. With the new measure in place, Indian goods entering the U.S. will now be taxed at a rate of 26%.

Trump’s Chart

During his speech at the White House, Trump presented a chart that outlined various countries’ tariff rates on U.S. products and the corresponding levies they would now incur. These additional charges will be imposed on top of the existing 10% baseline tariff applicable to all imports entering the United States.

“India, very, very tough. Prime Minister (Narendra Modi) just left. He’s a great friend of mine. But I said, ‘You’re a friend of mine, but you’re not treating us right.’ They charge us 52 percent, but we charged them almost nothing for years—decades. And it was only seven years ago that I came in,” Trump stated.

India Faces a Lesser Impact Compared to Others

Despite the new tariffs, India is not among the countries hit hardest by Trump’s latest trade move. Several nations will be subjected to even higher tariff rates:

  • Cambodia: 49%
  • Sri Lanka: 44%
  • Bangladesh: 37%
  • Thailand: 36%
  • China: 34%
  • Taiwan: 32%
  • Indonesia: 32%
  • Switzerland: 31%
  • South Africa: 30%
  • Pakistan: 29%

Meanwhile, Canada and Mexico, the U.S.’s two largest trading partners, are already facing a 25% tariff on various goods.

Making America Wealthy Again?

During an event held at the White House under the theme “Make America Wealthy Again,” Trump described the decision as “our declaration of independence.” He asserted, “Taxpayers have been ripped off for more than 50 years. But it’s not going to happen anymore.”

By imposing these reciprocal tariffs on trading partners, Trump fulfilled one of his key campaign pledges. He bypassed congressional approval by leveraging the 1977 International Emergency Economic Powers Act to enforce the new trade measures.

Trump declared that the tariffs, which he introduced on what he referred to as “Liberation Day,” aim to strengthen U.S. manufacturing and penalize nations that he claims have long engaged in unfair trade practices.

The White House confirmed that the new tariffs would take effect immediately following Trump’s announcement.

Tesla Sales Drop to Three-Year Low Amid Musk Controversy

Tesla’s sales have fallen to their lowest point in three years, coinciding with growing backlash against CEO Elon Musk.

The electric vehicle manufacturer delivered nearly 337,000 cars in the first quarter of 2025, marking a 13% decline compared to the previous year. The disappointing figures led to a sharp drop in Tesla’s stock price during early trading on Wednesday.

While Tesla faces mounting competition from Chinese automaker BYD, analysts suggest that Musk’s controversial role in the Trump administration has also played a significant role in the company’s struggles.

The company has attributed the decline in deliveries to the transition to a new version of its most popular model. However, some experts believe Musk’s leadership is a contributing factor.

“These numbers suck,” remarked Ross Gerber, an early Tesla investor and CEO of Gerber Kawasaki Wealth and Investment Management, in a post on X. He further stated, “The brand is broken and may not be fixable.” Gerber, once a strong Musk supporter, has recently called for Tesla’s board to remove him as CEO.

Growing Backlash Against Musk

Musk’s outspoken political involvement has sparked protests and boycotts globally. He currently leads President Donald Trump’s Department of Government Efficiency (DOGE) initiative, aimed at cutting federal spending and reducing the government workforce.

On Wednesday, Politico reported that Trump had informed his inner circle that Musk would soon step back from the administration. Following this news, Tesla’s stock price briefly rebounded.

However, the White House dismissed the report as “garbage,” clarifying that Musk is a special government employee and, by law, can only serve 130 days per year in the administration, making a June departure more likely.

Musk, the world’s richest person, contributed over $250 million to support Trump’s re-election in November. Recently, he also invested millions in a Wisconsin Supreme Court race, backing former Republican Attorney General Brad Schimel, who suffered a resounding defeat on Tuesday.

The backlash against Musk has led to “Tesla Takedown” protests at dealerships across the U.S. and Europe. Reports of vandalism against Tesla vehicles have surfaced, prompting Trump to declare that individuals defacing Teslas would be charged with “domestic terrorism.”

Following an arson attack at a Tesla outlet in Rome that destroyed 17 vehicles, the Italian government advised police to increase security at Tesla dealerships.

Musk’s Struggles as Tesla’s CEO

Concerns about Musk’s ability to effectively manage his businesses, including Tesla, have intensified. In a recent interview, he acknowledged facing difficulties, saying, “Frankly, I can’t believe I’m here doing this.”

Tesla’s stock has lost more than 25% of its value since the start of 2025, with shares continuing to struggle as of 13:51 EDT (18:51 BST) on Wednesday.

Wedbush analyst Dan Ives did not mince words, stating, “We are not going to look at these numbers with rose-colored glasses… they were a disaster on every metric.” He added, “The more political [Musk] gets with DOGE, the more the brand suffers. There is no debate.”

Tesla declined to comment when approached by the BBC but acknowledged in a filing with the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission that the reported sales figures “represent only two measures” of the company’s overall performance and “should not be relied on as an indicator of quarterly financial results.”

The company plans to release its full earnings report on April 22, detailing key factors such as average selling prices, cost of sales, and foreign exchange movements. Additionally, Tesla noted that it had temporarily halted production of its Model Y SUVs in January.

Concerns from Investors and Pension Funds

Tesla’s poor performance has raised concerns among major investors. Randi Weingarten, president of the American Federation of Teachers—one of the most powerful labor unions in the U.S.—warned public pension funds about Tesla’s troubling sales figures.

She described the numbers as “shaping up to be abysmal” and urged pension funds to scrutinize their Tesla holdings, questioning whether money managers were doing enough to “safeguard retirement assets.”

“These declines seem in part to be driven by Musk spending his time pursuing political activities, some of which appear to be in conflict with Tesla’s brand and business interests, rather than managing Tesla,” Weingarten wrote.

New York City’s comptroller has already announced plans to sue Tesla on behalf of the city’s massive pension funds, which have reportedly lost more than $300 million in the past three months due to the company’s declining stock price.

“Elon Musk is so distracted that he’s driving Tesla off a financial cliff,” Comptroller Brad Lander stated.

As Tesla struggles with declining sales and mounting criticism of its CEO, investors and analysts alike are closely watching whether Musk’s political entanglements will continue to weigh on the company’s future.

Trump Imposes New Tariffs, Raising Costs on Cars, Alcohol, and More

US President Donald Trump has implemented a series of tariffs—import taxes—on billions of dollars’ worth of goods entering the country.

On Wednesday, Trump declared a national economic emergency, announcing that all imported goods would face a minimum tariff of 10%. For nations he considers the “worst offenders,” the tariffs could be as high as 50%. The 10% tariffs are set to take effect on April 5, while the higher rates will be implemented on April 9.

Currently, Canada and Mexico are exempt from these tariffs, though both nations—along with China—were already subject to certain trade restrictions. Additionally, the Trump administration has expanded existing tariffs on steel and aluminum to include beer and empty cans, which could significantly impact Canada and Mexico.

Furthermore, beginning Thursday, a 25% tariff on imported automobiles will be enforced, while tariffs on specific car parts will roll out in May or later.

Economists have cautioned that these tariffs, along with retaliatory measures from other countries, could lead to higher prices for American consumers. The reason is that the tax is levied on the domestic company importing the goods. These businesses may choose to pass the costs onto customers or reduce imports, leading to lower availability of products.

Potential Price Hikes

Automobiles

The US imported approximately eight million vehicles last year, amounting to around $240 billion in trade.

Experts predict that these new tariffs could raise the price of new cars by several thousand dollars. In December, the average price of a new car in the US reached a record $49,738, according to Cox Automotive. Increased demand for used cars may also push their prices up.

Even vehicles manufactured in the US are expected to become more expensive. Many American automakers operate plants in Canada and Mexico, taking advantage of longstanding free trade agreements. Car parts often cross borders multiple times before a vehicle is fully assembled.

Although tariffs on car parts from Canada and Mexico are currently exempt, US customs and border patrol officials are working on a system to assess these duties.

According to the Anderson Economic Group, tariffs on car components from Canada and Mexico alone could raise costs by approximately $4,000 to $10,000, depending on the vehicle. While experts argue that these costs will likely be transferred to consumers, Trump has stated he “couldn’t care less” if prices rise, believing this move will encourage Americans to buy domestically made cars.

Alcoholic Beverages: Beer, Whiskey, and Tequila

Popular Mexican beer brands like Modelo and Corona may become more expensive for American consumers if importers pass on the additional costs.

Modelo and other foreign beer brands will also be affected by the expanded aluminum tariff, which will now apply to canned beer starting April 4. The Beer Institute reports that 64.1% of beer consumed in the US comes from cans.

In a joint statement, representatives from the American, Canadian, and Mexican spirits industries highlighted that beverages such as bourbon, Tennessee whiskey, tequila, and Canadian whisky “can only be produced in their designated countries.”

Since these alcoholic beverages must be made in specific regions, supply shortages could drive up prices.

Trump has also suggested imposing a 200% tariff on European alcohol imports, which could increase the price of Spanish wine, French champagne, and German beer in the US. However, it remains unclear whether this proposal will be enacted.

Housing Costs

A significant portion of the softwood lumber used in US home construction—about one-third—is imported from Canada.

Trump has downplayed concerns, stating that the US has “more lumber than we ever use.”

However, the National Association of Home Builders (NAHB) has voiced serious concerns about how tariffs on lumber could raise home-building costs. Given that most American homes are built using wood, higher lumber prices may deter new construction.

“Consumers end up paying for the tariffs in the form of higher home prices,” the NAHB warned.

Imports from other countries may also be impacted.

On March 1, Trump initiated an investigation into whether additional tariffs should be placed on lumber and timber imports from all nations or whether the US should incentivize domestic production. A report on the findings is expected by late 2025.

Maple Syrup

Canada dominates the global maple syrup market, accounting for 75% of worldwide production.

Around 90% of the syrup is produced in Quebec, which has maintained a strategic reserve for over two decades.

“That maple syrup is going to become more expensive. And that’s a direct price increase that households will face,” said Thomas Sampson of the London School of Economics.

“If I buy goods that are domestically produced in the US, but [which use] inputs from Canada, the price of those goods is also going to go up,” he added.

Fuel Prices

Canada is the largest foreign supplier of crude oil to the US.

Between January and November 2024, 61% of imported oil came from Canada, according to the latest trade data.

Although most imported goods from Canada are subject to a 25% tariff, Canadian energy products face a lower rate of 10%.

While the US has ample oil reserves, its refineries are optimized for processing heavier crude oil, which is primarily sourced from Canada and, to a lesser extent, Mexico.

“Many refineries need heavier crude oil to maximize flexibility of gasoline, diesel and jet fuel production,” the American Fuel and Petrochemical Manufacturers stated.

If Canada retaliates by reducing crude oil exports to the US, fuel prices could rise.

Avocados

Mexico provides nearly 90% of the avocados consumed in the US.

The US Department of Agriculture has warned that tariffs on Mexican fruits and vegetables could drive up the cost of avocados, potentially making dishes like guacamole more expensive.

Spring Elections Signal Challenges for Trump and Republicans

A trio of spring elections delivered early warning signs for both President Donald Trump and the Republican Party on Tuesday, as Democrats mobilized against his efforts to shrink the federal government and the significant role played by billionaire Elon Musk in the early days of Trump’s new administration.

In the high-profile Wisconsin Supreme Court race, the conservative candidate, backed by Trump and Musk with $21 million in support, suffered a 10-point defeat in a state Trump had won in November. Additionally, while Republicans managed to hold two of the most pro-Trump House districts in Florida, both GOP candidates failed to match Trump’s performance from the presidential election.

These elections—marking the first major contests since Trump reassumed office—were widely viewed as an initial gauge of voter sentiment. Trump has moved swiftly to reshape the federal government, frequently clashing with the courts while pushing the limits of executive power and seeking retribution against opponents.

Historically, the party that loses the presidency in November tends to gain seats in the subsequent midterm elections. Tuesday’s results offered a glimmer of hope for Democrats, who have been grappling with both internal divisions and external criticism regarding their response to Trump’s administration, that they could follow this historical trend.

Republican Strategist Highlights Voter Turnout Problem

Charlie Kirk, a prominent conservative activist and podcaster whose organization collaborated with Musk to support conservative Brad Schimel in Wisconsin, acknowledged that Tuesday’s Supreme Court loss underscored a major challenge for Republicans—particularly in elections where Trump himself is not on the ballot.

“We did a lot in Wisconsin, but we fell short. We must realize and appreciate that we are the LOW PROP party now,” Kirk posted on X, referencing low-propensity voters who do not consistently participate in elections. “The party has been remade. Special elections and off-cycle elections will continue to be a problem without a change of strategy.”

Wisconsin Shifts Left in Key Contest

Trump had secured Wisconsin in November by a narrow margin of 0.8 percentage points, translating to fewer than 30,000 votes. However, the first significant election since he assumed office in January indicated a notable shift toward Democrats, and not just in traditional liberal strongholds.

Sauk County, located northwest of Madison, serves as a political bellwether for the state. Trump had won the county in November by 626 votes, yet in this election, it swung 16 percentage points in favor of Judge Susan Crawford, the liberal candidate backed by national Democratic leaders and billionaire donors like George Soros.

Crawford’s victory was driven not only by robust Democratic turnout but also by improved performance in suburban Milwaukee counties, where Republicans typically count on strong margins.

She secured wins in Kenosha and Racine counties, both of which had supported Trump over Democratic candidate Kamala Harris in November. In these areas, she led by about 10 percentage points.

Voter participation was just under 50%, a significant increase of 10 percentage points from the previous record turnout for a Wisconsin Supreme Court election, which had been set only two years prior.

Voters Express Opposition to Trump and Musk

In conversations with voters across the state—including more than 20 in Waunakee, a politically mixed town north of Madison—many Democrats indicated that their votes were not just about the state Supreme Court’s future but also a referendum on Trump’s early months in office.

“This is our chance to say no,” said Linda Grassl, a retired OB-GYN registered nurse, after casting her ballot at the Waunakee Public Library.

Theresa Peer, a 49-year-old business owner from Milwaukee, echoed this sentiment, calling the election a “fight for our democracy.” She expressed hope that Crawford’s victory would be seen as a “symbol of opposition” to Trump’s policies, particularly regarding reproductive rights and cuts to education funding.

Some voters also voiced concern over Musk’s substantial involvement in the race.

“I don’t like Elon Musk spending money for an election he should have no involvement in,” said Antonio Gray, a 38-year-old security guard from Milwaukee. “They should let the voters vote for who they want to vote for instead of inserting themselves like they have.”

Schumer Calls Results a Political Warning

Senate Democratic Leader Chuck Schumer interpreted the results as a rebuke of Trump’s leadership.

“This is a political warning shot from the American people,” Schumer said in a floor speech Wednesday, adding that the results demonstrated “Democrats’ message is resonating.”

“Just 70 days into Trump 2.0, Americans are tired of the chaos. They are tired of Elon Musk attacking Social Security, Medicaid, Medicare,” he stated.

Republican Leaders Caution Against Overinterpretation

Former Wisconsin Governor Scott Walker acknowledged that one of the GOP’s challenges in the race was making the contest about Trump—a difficult task in a judicial election. He speculated that the outcome might have been different had Trump visited the state rather than merely participating in a telephone town hall.

“If you’re somebody who showed up for Trump because you feel forgotten, you don’t typically show up to vote in” these types of elections, Walker explained, suggesting that many Republican voters may have questioned, “What does this have to do with Trump?”

Despite the outcome, Walker advised against drawing broad national conclusions from the results.

“I’d be a little bit careful about reading too much into what happens nationally,” he cautioned.

Florida Republicans Hold Seats but Underperform

Trump had more success in Florida, where Republican Randy Fine secured victory in the 6th Congressional District to replace Mike Waltz, who had resigned to serve as Trump’s national security adviser. However, Fine’s margin of victory was 14 percentage points lower than Waltz’s, who had won the district by 33 points just five months earlier.

“This is the functional equivalent of Republicans running a competitive race in the district that is represented by Representative Alexandria Ocasio-Cortez,” said House Democratic Leader Hakeem Jeffries before the election, referencing the progressive New York congresswoman whom Trump frequently criticizes. “Kamala Harris won that district by 30 points. Do you think a Republican would even be competitive in that district in New York, currently held by Alex? Of course, not.”

Additionally, Florida’s Chief Financial Officer Jimmy Patronis fended off a challenge from Democrat Gay Valimont to retain the northwest Florida seat vacated by Matt Gaetz. However, Patronis also failed to match Gaetz’s previous margin of victory.

The two Republican wins expanded the party’s House majority to 220-213, a factor that had previously raised concerns within the GOP about maintaining control. Those concerns had influenced Trump’s decision to withdraw the nomination of New York Representative Elise Stefanik for the position of U.S. ambassador to the United Nations.

Trump Remains the Central Draw for Republican Voters

For many voters in these Florida districts, their primary motivation was Trump himself.

Teresa Horton, 72, admitted she was unfamiliar with the candidates on her ballot but voted Republican without hesitation.

“I don’t even know these people that are on there,” she said. “I just went with my ticket.”

Brenda Ray, 75, a retired nurse, shared a similar perspective, stating that she didn’t know much about Patronis but supported him because she believed he would “vote with our president.”

“That’s all we’re looking for,” she added.

Despite being significantly outspent by their Democratic challengers, both Fine and Patronis managed to secure victories. Michael Whatley, chairman of the Republican National Committee, framed this as a testament to the party’s resilience rather than a cause for concern.

“The American people sent a clear message tonight: they want elected officials who will advance President Trump’s America First agenda, and their votes can’t be bought by national Democrats,” Whatley said in a statement.

GOPIO International Convention 2025 Highlights Diaspora’s Role in Shaping Future Technologies

The Global Organization of People of Indian Origin (GOPIO International) successfully held Convention 2025 from March 28 to 30 at the Brisbane Marriott in Australia. It marked a significant milestone for GOPIO. Among the distinguished attendees were the Hon David Crisfulli MP – Premier of Queensland, the Rt Hon Lord Mayor of Brisbane – Adrian Schrinner, the first full Consul General of India in Queensland – Hon Ms. Neetu Bhagotia, Queensland Senator Paul Scarr, and University of Queensland Chancellor Peter Varghese, all of whom contributed to the event’s vibrant spirit and success.

IMG 20250402 WA0022
Ceremonial Lighting of the Lamp to begin the convention, dignitaries with GOPIO officials

Special mention must be made of key figures such as GOPIO Founder and current Chairman Dr. Thomas Abraham, GOPIO International President Mr Prakash Shah, Convention Convenor Mr Umesh Chandra OAM (GOPIO International Executive Vice President and Editor-in-chief of GOPIO News, GOPIO Vice President Kewal Kanda, Secretary Siddharth Jain, several GOPIO chapter presidents, along with influential leaders like entrepreneur and Springfield City Founder Dr Maha Sinnathamby and former honorary Consul of I dis Mrs Archana Singh. The event also welcomed countless professors, researchers, tech entrepreneurs, visionaries, and changemakers from around the globe, creating a rich tapestry of knowledge and experience.

The convention’s theme, “The Diaspora Role in Shaping Future Technologies,” was timely and pertinent, reflecting the increasing influence of the Indian diaspora in global technological advancements. The program featured a diverse range of sessions, beginning with a Welcome Reception that set the tone for the event, followed by a series of engaging conferences on March 29.

Convention officials with GOPIO International team.
Convention officials with GOPIO International team.

Welcoming remarks from Umesh Chandra OAM, the Convention Convener, and an inspiring address by Dr. Thomas Abraham marked the inaugural session. The chief guest, Lord Mayor Adrian Schrinner, provided insights into local governance and community engagement while concluding remarks by Mr Prakash Shah encapsulated the spirit of collaboration that defined the convention.

IMG 20250402 WA0023
Women’s session at the GOPIO Convention 2025 with participation of younger generation as panelists.

One of the key tracks, titled “Diaspora Role in Shaping Future Technologies,” featured sessions that explored groundbreaking topics such as artificial intelligence in healthcare, nanotechnology, and biomedical innovations. Notable speakers included Professor Rajendra Acharya, who discussed the application of AI in healthcare, and Dr. Ajay Pandey, who presented on integrated photonic systems. The discussions highlighted how these technologies can bridge gaps in patient care and enhance healthcare delivery.

In another impactful session, participants delved into the roles of NRIs (Non-Resident Indians) and PIOs (Persons of Indian Origin) in achieving common goals. This session facilitated a dialogue on how these two groups, despite their diverse backgrounds and experiences, can work together to address issues like discrimination, civil rights, and economic opportunities. The panel was moderated by Professor Rajasekhar Vangapaty and featured voices from various backgrounds, including Rohit Vyas, Kewal Kanda, and Professor Mohan Thite

 

IMG 20250402 WA0024
GOPIO Youth panel with GOPIO officials

The convention also spotlighted the invaluable contributions of diaspora women, who play vital roles as cultural bridge-builders while navigating the complexities of their identities in new environments. This session was moderated by Nandini Sen Mehra and brought together successful women from across the globe to share their experiences and strategies for balancing family, culture, and professional ambitions.

Youth engagement was another critical focus of the convention, with a session dedicated to the role of diaspora youth in the global movement. Under the guidance of Vasu Pawar, the session showcased young achievers who are leveraging modern communication tools and social media to create positive change. Speakers included promising young talents who shared their journeys and the impact they aspire to make within their communities.

IMG 20250402 WA0026
Photo: GOPIO Conference Co- Chair Prof. Prasad Yarlagadda hosting a fireside chat with Springdale City Founder and Chairman Maha Sinnathamby at the Finale GOPIO Awards Banquet.

On March 30, the GOPIO held its General Body Meeting in person as per the bylaws. During this meeting, Dr. Thomas Abraham was reelected as the Chairman of GOPIO International, reaffirming his leadership and vision for the organization.

Throughout the convention, the spirit of networking was palpable, as attendees exchanged ideas and forged connections that will undoubtedly lead to future collaborations. The event concluded with a session on the GOPIO Chamber of Commerce and Industry, emphasizing the importance of global networking for diaspora businesses and SMEs in India.

Overall, the GOPIO International Convention 2025 was a resounding success, celebrating the achievements of the Indian diaspora and exploring the collective potential to shape future technologies. It provided an enriching platform for dialogue, collaboration, and understanding, leaving participants inspired and motivated to contribute further to their communities and beyond.

Following the convention, GOPIO leaders are visiting Fiji, New Zealand and Sydney meeting GOPIO leaders and launching Its Chamber of Comnerce and Industry (GCCI).

IMG 20250402 WA0027
Participants at the GOPIO General body Meeting on Sunday, March 30th.

World’s Billionaire Count Hits Record High as Wealth Concentrates Further

The global billionaire class has reached unprecedented levels of power and influence, particularly in the United States, where Donald Trump was sworn in again as president in January. His second term has given billionaires more sway over the government than ever before. His closest advisor is the world’s richest person, his administration includes at least ten billionaires and billionaire spouses, and prominent executives—such as Meta’s Mark Zuckerberg and French luxury magnate Bernard Arnault—are backing him.

The billionaire boom is not limited to the U.S. A record 3,028 individuals have made Forbes’ annual World’s Billionaires list this year, 247 more than in 2024. This marks the first time the global billionaire count has exceeded 3,000. Collectively, they hold a record $16.1 trillion, an increase of $2 trillion from last year—surpassing the GDP of every nation except the U.S. and China. The average billionaire’s fortune has climbed to $5.3 billion, up $200 million from 2024.

For the first time, three individuals have amassed fortunes exceeding $200 billion, joining a record 15-member $100 Billion Club. This elite group, whose wealth spans 12 digits, now holds a combined net worth of $2.4 trillion—more than the bottom 1,500 billionaires combined.

At the top of the list is Elon Musk, with an estimated net worth of $342 billion. Despite his growing role in DOGE, Trump’s cost-cutting operation, Musk’s fortune surged by $147 billion over the past year, driven by SpaceX’s success and the rise of his AI firm xAI, which recently merged with his social media platform X. Even Tesla, despite protests and a market downturn, is trading higher than a year ago. This wealth boost has allowed Musk to reclaim the title of the world’s richest person, surpassing Arnault.

Following Musk is Mark Zuckerberg, now the world’s second-richest individual with an estimated net worth of $216 billion. Jeff Bezos ($215 billion) ranks third, followed by Oracle’s Larry Ellison ($192 billion). Arnault has dropped to fifth place, with his fortune declining to $178 billion due to a slump in LVMH’s stock, marking his lowest position since 2017. Forbes calculated this year’s rankings using stock prices and exchange rates from March 7, 2025.

The U.S. remains home to the most billionaires, with a record 902. China, including Hong Kong, follows with 516, while India holds third place with 205. More than half of all billionaires hail from these three nations. However, a total of 76 countries and two semi-autonomous territories now have at least one billionaire, including Albania, which made its first appearance on the list. Saudi Arabia has also rejoined, with 15 billionaires returning after being excluded in 2018 due to a government crackdown.

This year, 288 new names have been added to the Billionaires ranking, including celebrities such as musician Bruce Springsteen ($1.2 billion), actor Arnold Schwarzenegger ($1.1 billion), and comedian Jerry Seinfeld ($1.1 billion). Other notable newcomers include crypto entrepreneur Justin Sun ($8.5 billion), AI industry leaders from firms like Anthropic, CoreWeave, and DeepSeek, as well as executives behind fast-food chains like Cava, Chipotle, Jersey Mike’s, and Zaxby’s.

The wealthiest new entrant is Marilyn Simons ($31 billion), the widow of hedge fund titan Jim Simons, who passed away in May 2024. He was among 32 billionaires who died over the past year. Another, Israeli industrialist Stef Wertheimer, passed away in late March but was included in the rankings due to the cutoff date.

Women remain underrepresented on the list, with just 406 female billionaires—only 13.4% of the total, a slight increase from 13.3% last year. Nearly three-quarters of them inherited their fortunes, including Walmart heiress Alice Walton ($101 billion), now the world’s richest woman, surpassing L’Oréal heir Françoise Bettencourt Meyers ($81.6 billion). Among the 113 self-made women on the list, the wealthiest is Swiss shipping magnate Rafaela Aponte-Diamant ($37.7 billion), whose company partnered with BlackRock to acquire 43 ports, including two in Panama.

Overall, self-made billionaires make up 67% of the list, up from 66% in 2024. The youngest self-made billionaire is Scale AI co-founder and CEO Alexandr Wang ($2 billion), aged 28. Among the 21 billionaires aged 30 or younger, the youngest is 19-year-old Johannes von Baumbach ($5.4 billion), an heir to a German pharmaceutical fortune. Meanwhile, the oldest billionaire is 103-year-old U.S. insurance mogul George Joseph ($1.9 billion), one of four centenarians on the list. The average billionaire is 66 years old.

Few billionaires have had a more lucrative year than Donald Trump. His fortune has more than doubled—from $2.3 billion to $5.1 billion—not just due to his return to the presidency but also because of a profitable venture into cryptocurrency. Additionally, his media company, Trump Media & Technology Group, went public shortly after Forbes finalized last year’s rankings, further boosting his wealth.

Not every billionaire saw gains. A total of 107 individuals from the 2024 ranking failed to make the cut this year. Among them are Lisa Su, CEO of semiconductor giant Advanced Micro Devices (AMD); Sara Liu, co-founder of struggling server manufacturer Supermicro; and Nicholas Puech, an heir to the Hermès luxury empire who claims to have lost his fortune.

Forbes’ World’s Billionaires list ranks individuals with a net worth of $1 billion or more as of March 7, 2025. Some billionaires’ fortunes have fluctuated since then; in fact, three additional billionaires were discovered shortly after finalizing the list, and more are likely to emerge. Given the volatility of global markets, particularly in light of anticipated tariffs, Forbes provides real-time updates on its website.

To compile the rankings, Forbes conducted extensive research, including interviews with billionaires, their associates, financial advisors, competitors, and industry experts. The methodology included analyzing regulatory filings, court records, real estate holdings, private and public company valuations, and asset portfolios—including art, yachts, aircraft, and car collections. Known liabilities and charitable contributions were factored in as well. While family wealth is excluded, the rankings do consider the fortunes of immediate family members when linked to a founder or heir, marked as “& family” in the listing.

Goldman Sachs Slashes U.S. Economic Outlook as Trump’s Tariffs Stoke Recession Fears

Goldman Sachs has taken a significantly more negative stance on the U.S. economy and stock market due to President Donald Trump’s tariff policies. The firm now joins a growing number of economists warning that the ongoing trade war could push the U.S. into a recession and cause further trouble for stock market investors.

Goldman Sachs economists, led by Ronnie Walker, have adjusted their forecast to anticipate a 15% average tariff rate on all goods this year. This revision came in a Sunday note to clients and reflects Trump’s latest aggressive stance ahead of his scheduled “Liberation Day” tariff announcement on Wednesday. The president has indicated that he intends to impose even steeper tariffs than originally planned.

As a result, Goldman’s economic outlook has become more bearish. The firm has raised its probability of a U.S. recession within the next year from 20% to 35%. Additionally, Goldman economists have revised several key projections. Their end-of-2025 inflation estimate has been increased to 3.5%, up from 2.8% just last month. Their unemployment forecast now stands at 4.5%, which would be the highest since October 2021. Meanwhile, the firm expects gross domestic product (GDP) growth to slow to 1%, the lowest level since 2020.

Stock market expectations have also been downgraded in response to these economic concerns. Goldman strategists, led by David Kostin, warned clients that they expect the S&P 500 index to decline by 5% over the next three months. They have set a price target of 5,300 for the index in that time frame. Over the next year, they project the S&P 500 will rise by only 6%, setting a new year-ahead target of 5,900. This marks a substantial downward revision from Goldman’s previous forecast of 6,500, which was issued as recently as February 28. The nearly 10% cut in expectations reflects the increasing uncertainty surrounding Trump’s trade policies.

Big Number

6.3%—That is how much the S&P 500 declined in March through Friday’s close, putting it on track for its worst month since September 2022. This figure does not even account for an additional drop of more than 1% in premarket trading on Monday.

Key Background

On Sunday, Trump announced that he plans to impose “substantial” import taxes on “all countries” through his new reciprocal tariff policy. This marks a shift from his position just a week earlier, when he suggested that the upcoming tariffs would be “more lenient.”

Trump’s top economic official, Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent, has acknowledged that a recession is possible but has argued that any downturn would be due to unsustainable economic growth fueled by excessive government spending and imbalanced trade relationships. However, some economists have cautioned that Trump’s policies could push the U.S. into an avoidable recession. UCLA Anderson School of Management economist Clement Bohr issued a stark warning to Trump earlier this month: “If all your wishes come true, you could very well be the author of a deep recession.”

The financial markets are particularly concerned about the potential inflationary effects of tariffs. Higher tariffs typically lead to higher prices for imported goods, which could drive overall inflation upward. Persistent inflation, in turn, might force the Federal Reserve to reconsider its plans for further interest rate cuts. If the Fed decides to keep rates high to combat inflation, borrowing costs would remain elevated, potentially hurting corporate profit margins and weakening consumer demand.

Trump’s trade policies have been a point of contention among economists and investors alike. While he has long argued that tariffs will protect American industries and create jobs, critics say that the economic consequences—including higher costs for businesses and consumers—outweigh any potential benefits. Goldman’s latest forecast suggests that these concerns are becoming more widely accepted on Wall Street.

The uncertainty surrounding Trump’s tariff policy has already taken a toll on the stock market. The S&P 500’s steep decline in March suggests that investors are increasingly worried about the economic outlook. Should Trump move forward with his plans for aggressive tariffs, market volatility could continue in the coming months.

Goldman Sachs is not alone in its pessimism. Other major financial institutions have also sounded alarms about the potential economic impact of Trump’s trade policies. Many analysts believe that if tariffs remain in place or are expanded further, the risks of a prolonged economic slowdown will increase.

While the White House has maintained that tariffs will ultimately benefit the economy by reducing reliance on foreign goods, the short-term consequences appear to be negative. Businesses that rely on imported materials are already facing higher costs, and many have signaled that they will pass these costs on to consumers. This could exacerbate inflationary pressures at a time when the Federal Reserve is trying to bring inflation under control.

The bond market has also reacted to these developments, with yields on long-term U.S. Treasury bonds rising in response to inflation concerns. Higher bond yields can lead to tighter financial conditions, further slowing economic growth.

As uncertainty looms, investors will be closely watching Trump’s official announcement on Wednesday to see if his latest tariff proposals will be as severe as he has suggested. If the tariffs are implemented as planned, further market turbulence could follow.

For now, Goldman Sachs’ downgrade serves as a stark reminder of the risks facing the U.S. economy. The firm’s decision to cut its stock market targets and raise its recession probability reflects growing concerns that Trump’s trade policies could have unintended economic consequences. With inflation, unemployment, and GDP growth all expected to worsen, the outlook for the economy remains uncertain.

In the weeks ahead, economic data and corporate earnings reports will provide further insight into how businesses and consumers are responding to these policy changes. If inflation continues to rise and economic growth slows further, the Fed may have to reconsider its monetary policy stance, which could add another layer of complexity to an already volatile market environment.

Ultimately, the extent to which Trump’s tariffs impact the economy will depend on how businesses, consumers, and policymakers respond. If companies find ways to absorb higher costs without passing them on to consumers, the inflationary impact could be limited. However, if prices rise significantly, the Fed may have no choice but to keep interest rates high, potentially leading to a broader economic slowdown.

In the meantime, investors should brace for continued uncertainty. Goldman Sachs’ revised forecast suggests that market conditions could remain challenging in the near term. While long-term economic fundamentals remain strong, the immediate risks posed by Trump’s trade policies cannot be ignored.

With the S&P 500 already experiencing its worst month since 2022, the coming weeks will be critical in determining whether the market can stabilize or if further declines are ahead. The outcome of Trump’s tariff policy will likely play a key role in shaping economic and market trends for the remainder of the year.

As always, market participants will be watching closely to see how the administration’s policies evolve and whether additional economic measures are introduced to counteract potential negative effects. For now, Goldman Sachs’ latest predictions underscore the uncertainty and risks facing the U.S. economy in 2025.

Trump to Unveil ‘Reciprocal Tariff’ Plan; Experts to Debate Its Impact

President Donald Trump and his economic advisers are set to outline his “reciprocal tariff” strategy on Wednesday, April 2. As Trump announced on social media, “I have decided, for purposes of Fairness, that I will charge a RECIPROCAL Tariff meaning, whatever Countries charge the United States of America, we will charge them – No more, no less!” However, many trade experts remain skeptical of this approach.

Brookings Panel to Discuss Trade Policy

On Thursday, April 3, the Economic Studies program at the Brookings Institution will host a panel discussion analyzing Trump’s latest trade and tariff policies. The panel will feature:

  • Sarah Bianchi, former deputy U.S. trade representative
  • Mary Lovely, Anthony M. Solomon senior fellow at the Peterson Institute for International Economics
  • Kelly Ann Shaw, deputy assistant to the president for international economic affairs in Trump’s first administration

The discussion will be moderated by Ana Swanson of The New York Times, with an audience Q&A session following the panel.

The event is expected to provide insight into the potential economic consequences of the reciprocal tariff strategy and whether it could escalate trade tensions or benefit American industries.

RSS-Affiliated Organiser Targets Prithviraj Sukumaran Over ‘Empuraan’ Controversy

After previously criticizing Mohanlal, the RSS-affiliated publication Organiser has now taken aim at actor-director Prithviraj Sukumaran over his highly anticipated film Empuraan.

Allegations of ‘Anti-National’ Leanings

In a fresh article, Organiser has accused Prithviraj of aligning with “anti-national” voices, citing his involvement in the Save Lakshadweep campaign, which opposed certain policies of the Union government in the islands.

The publication also called out his “double standards,” alleging that while he actively criticizes the Citizenship Amendment Act (CAA), he has remained silent on local issues like the Munambam case, where Christian families allegedly face eviction by the Waqf Board. Additionally, the article claims he has ignored the persecution of Hindus in Bangladesh.

Criticism Over Film’s Portrayal of 2002 Godhra Incident

The controversy extends to Empuraan’s storyline, with Organiser accusing the film of depicting the 2002 Godhra train incident in a biased manner. Another point of contention is the film’s antagonist, named Bajrangbali—a title traditionally associated with Lord Hanuman—who is portrayed as the Union Home Minister.

Filmmakers Rush to Modify Scenes

Amid the backlash, the Empuraan team has opted for last-minute changes. According to industry sources, a revised version of the film, expected to be released by Monday evening or Tuesday, will remove a controversial three-minute sequence showing an attack on a pregnant woman. Additionally, the antagonist’s name may either be altered or muted in dialogue.

These edits are being processed by Qube Cinema, which will distribute the updated digital version to theatres nationwide.

Silence from Scriptwriter Raises Questions

Meanwhile, Empuraan’s scriptwriter Murali Gopy has remained silent on the issue, sparking speculation that he is deeply affected by the controversy.

A Kerala minister, speaking anonymously to IANS, expressed concern over the growing intolerance towards criticism of certain political parties and leaders. “We are reaching a point where even voicing dissent is becoming impossible. This is not a healthy sign for democracy,” he remarked.

Prithviraj’s Mother Defends Him

Veteran actressMallika Sukumaran, Prithviraj’s mother, has come to his defense, asserting that she raised her sons with strong values. “He would never do anything to hurt anyone,” she said, while also commenting on Mohanlal’s response to a previous controversy, suggesting he could have reacted sooner.

“I also wonder if vested interests are fueling this issue,” she added.

Audience Support Remains Strong

Despite the ongoing controversy, Empuraan continues to draw massive crowds. Theatres across Kerala are reporting houseful shows, signaling that the backlash has not dampened public enthusiasm for the film.

Elon Musk to Step Down from Trump Administration After $1 Trillion Deficit Cut

Tech billionaire Elon Musk announced on Thursday that he will step down from his position in the Donald Trump administration at the end of May after overseeing a $1 trillion reduction in the U.S. deficit. Musk, who was appointed as a “special government employee” for a 130-day term, has led cost-cutting initiatives as the head of the Department of Government Efficiency (DOGE).

Musk Calls It a ‘Revolution in Government’

In an interview with Fox News, Musk described his tenure as a historic transformation in federal spending.

“This is a revolution, possibly the biggest in government since the original revolution,” Musk said. “In the end, America will be in a much stronger position, with a fantastic future ahead.”

Musk, 53, who also heads Tesla and SpaceX and owns social media platform X, has received both praise and criticism for his aggressive cost-cutting strategies. Under DOGE, an agency composed of engineers and entrepreneurs, tens of thousands of federal employees have been laid off, and funding for multiple programs has been slashed.

Musk Confirms 130-Day Term Limit

When asked if he would extend his tenure, Musk stated that he believes his objectives will be largely completed by then.

“I think we will have accomplished the majority of what’s needed to cut the deficit by $1 trillion within that timeframe,” he said.

According to DOGE’s website, as of March 27, the agency has saved American taxpayers approximately $130 billion, equating to about $807 per person.

Eliminating Waste and Fraud: A 15% Cut is ‘Achievable’

Musk and his seven-member DOGE team—including Steve Davis, Joe Gebbia, Aram Moghaddassi, Brad Smith, Anthony Armstrong, Tom Krause, and Tyler Hassen—have focused on reducing government inefficiencies.

“Our goal is to cut spending by eliminating waste and fraud, aiming for a 15% reduction, which seems entirely realistic,” Musk told Fox News’ Bret Baier.

“The government operates inefficiently, with significant waste and fraud. We are confident that a 15% cut can be achieved without impacting critical services.”

Federal Credit Card Oversight: ‘This Doesn’t Make Sense’

A key area of DOGE’s focus has been federal credit card usage. DOGE member Steve Davis pointed out that there are around 4.6 million government-issued credit cards for an estimated 2.3 to 2.4 million employees.

“This doesn’t add up,” Davis said. “We’ve asked agencies whether they actually need all these cards, if they are being used, and if they can physically account for them.”

Musk called the situation absurd.

“There shouldn’t be more government credit cards than there are employees,” he said.

Criticism Over Lack of Oversight

Despite the administration’s claims of efficiency, critics argue that DOGE wields too much authority with insufficient oversight. Opponents allege that Musk’s team has unilaterally canceled federal contracts and implemented budget cuts without congressional approval.

Musk dismissed these concerns, insisting that his team takes a meticulous approach to decision-making.

“Some may say we’re making impulsive cuts, but that’s far from the truth,” Musk said. “We double-check, even triple-check, before making a decision.”

He also acknowledged that mistakes can happen.

“That’s not to say we don’t make errors. Expecting a flawless approach is like demanding a baseball player to bat a thousand—it’s impossible. When we make mistakes, we correct them quickly and move forward.”

India and US Begin Bilateral Trade Talks Amid Tariff Concerns

India and the United States have commenced bilateral trade negotiations in Delhi, which will continue until Saturday.

A U.S. delegation, led by Assistant Trade Representative for South and Central Asia Brendan Lynch, arrived in the Indian capital on Tuesday for discussions aimed at strengthening trade relations.

“This visit reflects the United States’ continued commitment to advancing a productive and balanced trade relationship with India,” the U.S. Embassy stated.

The talks come ahead of U.S. President Donald Trump’s April 2 deadline to impose “reciprocal” tariffs on several countries, including India. Trump has long advocated for tit-for-tat tariffs, arguing that the U.S. should impose the same duties on foreign goods that its trading partners levy on American exports.

India’s junior commerce minister Jitin Prasada informed parliament on Tuesday that both nations were negotiating a “multi-sector bilateral trade agreement” to expand market access and address “tariff and non-tariff barriers.”

Trade discussions between the two countries have been ongoing since Trump assumed office. In March, Trade Minister Piyush Goyal made an unscheduled visit to the U.S. following Indian Prime Minister Narendra Modi’s February trip to Washington.

Until recently, the U.S. was India’s largest trading partner, with bilateral trade reaching $190 billion. Trump and Modi had set an ambitious target to more than double this figure to $500 billion (£400 billion). The two nations have also committed to finalizing the first phase of a trade deal by autumn 2025.

Despite these commitments, past tensions have characterized U.S.-India trade relations. The Trump administration has previously criticized India as a “tariff king” and a “big abuser” of trade agreements.

In response to U.S. concerns, India recently lowered tariffs on select American goods, including Bourbon whiskey and motorcycles. However, trade imbalances persist, with India maintaining a $45 billion surplus. India’s average tariff rate of approximately 12% remains significantly higher than the U.S. rate of 2%.

While officials have not disclosed details of the ongoing talks, a Reuters report suggests that India might reduce tariffs on over half of U.S. imports worth $23 billion in the first phase of a trade deal. This move could be an attempt to prevent retaliatory action from Washington.

Although Trump has pushed for strict tariff reciprocity, he hinted on Monday that his administration might take a more lenient approach.

“We may take less than what they’re charging, because they’ve charged us so much, I don’t think they could take it,” Trump said, suggesting that some countries might receive exemptions from the new measures.

As negotiations progress, both nations aim to strike a deal that balances market access with their respective economic priorities.

US-India Strategic Partnership Forum Hosts Capitol Hill Briefing on Strengthening Bilateral Ties

The US-India Strategic Partnership Forum (USISPF), in collaboration with the Congressional Caucus on India and Indian Americans, hosted a briefing on the U.S.-India strategic partnership. The discussion focused on strengthening cooperation across defense, trade, and technology.

Held on March 26 at Capitol Hill, the event was attended by 11 Members of Congress, including Co-Chairs Congressmen Rich McCormick (GA-07) and Ro Khanna (CA-17), along with Co-Vice Chair Marc Veasey (TX-33). Other attendees included Representatives Jim Costa (CA-21), Glenn Grothman (WI-6), Raja Krishnamoorthi (IL-8), Ed Case (HI-1), Kim Schrier (WA-8), Janelle Bynum (OR-5), Derek Tran (CA-45), and Herb Conaway (NJ-3).

Key Remarks

Speaking at the event, USISPF President and CEO Dr. Mukesh Aghi highlighted the bipartisan nature of U.S.-India relations. “The strategic partnership between our two democracies has been defined by past presidents as the most important strategic partnership of the 21st century. Our event with Members of Congress reflects both the bipartisan nature and strategic heft that the relationship with New Delhi has been given, especially in these venerated halls of Congress and in policy-making discourse,” said Dr. Aghi. He emphasized the continuity of Indo-Pacific cooperation through frameworks such as the Quad, I2U2, and IMEC.

Indian Ambassador to the U.S., Vinay Mohan Kwatra, also participated in the briefing. He underlined the strong foundations of the India-U.S. partnership and its bipartisan support in Congress. “We have set an ambitious agenda across defense, trade, technology, science, education, and people-to-people ties. We are committed to growing and expanding this relationship into new territories and new areas, including $500 billion in trade in the coming years,” Ambassador Kwatra stated.

Congressman Rich McCormick stressed India’s importance as a key ally. “As the largest democracy in South Asia, India is a critical ally of ours both in trade and defense, and our bipartisan discussions today emphasize the need to continue this relationship. I’m committed to building mutual cooperation between our two nations while advocating for the Indian-American diaspora here at home,” he said.

Congressman Ro Khanna described the U.S.-India partnership as a defining relationship of the 21st century. “We had a meaningful discussion on the importance of this strategic alliance and reaffirmed our shared commitment to advancing national security, economic prosperity, and technological innovation,” he said.

Future Engagements

USISPF announced plans to continue hosting similar discussions with congressional members and staff throughout 2025. A U.S.-India Trade Staff briefing is scheduled for April 22 on Capitol Hill.

Uncertain Times for Immigrants in the US Amid Heightened Enforcement

The current climate in the United States has left many immigrants uncertain about their status and security. Reports have surfaced of visa and green card holders, as well as tourists, being detained and deported. However, the Trump administration does not appear to be indiscriminately targeting all legal immigrants who have authorization to remain in the country on a large scale.

Some of those affected seem to have been singled out due to their political activism. One such case involved a Brown University professor and doctor with a green card who was deported after officials discovered photos of former Hezbollah leader Hassan Nasrallah and Iran’s supreme leader on her phone. Another case saw immigration authorities detain a former Columbia student and green card holder involved in campus protests over the war in Gaza, citing a Trump executive order prohibiting antisemitism.

In other instances, the administration has not provided clear reasons for detaining individuals. A German citizen with a green card was interrogated by border officials in Boston and detained without access to his anxiety medication. It remains unclear whether he has been charged with any crime. Similarly, as of Tuesday, no official explanation had been given for the detention of a Turkish doctoral student.

Notably, US citizens have also been affected. One individual reported being arrested by immigration agents while walking in Chicago. His identification was confiscated, and he was held for ten hours before being released.

While such cases are relatively limited in number, they have gone viral, sparking fear within immigrant communities.

According to immigration attorneys, it is difficult to gauge the level of concern legal immigrants living and working in the US should have.

“After practicing for 40 years, it’s really difficult to divine what a measured response is right now,” said Kathleen Campbell Walker, former president of the American Immigration Lawyers Association.

Although cases of detained or deported visa and green card holders appear to be rare, legal experts recommend that immigrants—as well as US citizens—take certain precautions in this uncertain environment.

Carry Identification Documents

Legal non-citizen immigrants have long been required by law to carry their immigration papers at all times. However, under Trump, the penalties for failing to do so are increasing.

In April, the administration is set to raise the fine for not carrying required documents from $100 to $5,000, Campbell Walker said. While failing to possess documentation has always been a misdemeanor, it can now lead to detention and deportation proceedings. Trump has revoked Biden-era immigration enforcement priorities, making even those charged with nonviolent, minor crimes subject to deportation.

Additionally, beginning next month, the administration will require all noncitizens to register with the federal government. Those who fail to do so will be designated as priorities for immigration enforcement. Many noncitizens who have previously interacted with federal agencies—such as those who applied for immigration benefits or received notices to appear in court—are already considered registered under this policy.

Campbell Walker also advised US citizens to carry proof of nationality, such as a passport card or birth certificate, given reports of Americans being mistakenly detained by immigration agents. Concerns have been raised that some agents are racially or ethnically profiling individuals during enforcement actions.

“Carrying documents on your person, making sure that people who are not citizens or naturalized or acquired citizens have one place in your home where you have all your important documentation together and making sure that you have copies—those are all reasonable and important steps to be taking in a moment like this, when we see the administration attacking free speech rights and attacking the basic norms of due process,” said Heidi Altman, vice president of policy at the National Immigration Law Center.

Reconsider International Travel

Legal experts are also advising immigrants to exercise caution when traveling abroad.

After the deportation of a professor, Brown University recommended that green card holders delay personal travel outside the US “out of an abundance of caution.” The university warned that upcoming changes to reentry requirements, along with a potential travel ban targeting 43 countries—expected to take effect as early as this week—could impact students and staff.

“I believe that a lot of green card holders are making the decision to consult with an attorney before traveling, and I think that’s a reasonable consideration,” Altman said.

Immigrants should consider whether their country of origin or travel destination might be affected by these potential bans. They should also evaluate their personal history of activism, as it could make them a target for additional scrutiny upon reentry.

“We know that this administration is engaging in retaliatory actions against people who have engaged in constitutionally protected activism and speech,” Altman said. “And so I think people may want to think about their own history and imagine and explore if it might put them at high interest for retaliatory targeting and talk to an attorney about precautionary steps that can be taken before travel.”

Protect Privacy on Social Media and Electronic Devices

For those who must travel, legal experts advise taking precautions with electronic devices. Border officials have recently begun requesting access to immigrants’ personal devices, including their cellphones.

Refusing to provide access may lead officials to deny entry based on insufficient information to determine admissibility. However, Campbell Walker expressed concern that officers may lack the training necessary to interpret digital content accurately.

According to reports from attorneys in the American Immigration Lawyers Association, border officials have started reviewing social media activity on travelers’ phones as a basis for determining entry eligibility.

“I’m not asking anyone to lie. I’m not trying to obstruct justice,” Campbell Walker said. “But if somebody who may not have sufficient training is going to rip through a cellphone and jump to conclusions and potentially remove me or prevent me from entering the US, I don’t think it’s advisable to have a bunch of social media or photographs on the phone you travel with. I don’t think it’s very wise to be traveling with your [personal] laptop.”

Vance Reassures U.S. Won’t Use Military Force in Greenland Amid Trump’s Push for Control

Vice President J.D. Vance stated on Friday that the United States is unlikely to use military force in President Donald Trump’s pursuit of acquiring Greenland. Speaking from Pituffik Space Base, a key American military installation in northwestern Greenland, Vance emphasized that the U.S. respects the island’s sovereignty despite Trump’s repeated assertions that the territory should belong to the United States.

“We do not think military force is ever going to be necessary,” Vance said in response to a question about potential military plans to take control of Greenland. “What we think is going to happen is that the Greenlanders are going to choose, through self-determination, to become independent of Denmark, and then we’re going to have conversations with the people of Greenland from there.”

The comments come as Trump continues to argue that Greenland is crucial to U.S. security interests. His concerns range from Russia’s access to the Arctic to China’s increasing influence in the region.

“We need Greenland for international security. We have to have Greenland,” Trump said in remarks from the White House on Friday.

Vance, however, shifted some of the focus to Denmark’s role in securing Greenland, claiming that the Danish government has failed to adequately protect the strategically important territory.

“The Danes have not done their job in keeping this area safe,” Vance said.

Greenland, an autonomous territory within the Kingdom of Denmark, has firmly resisted Trump’s interest in acquiring it. The Danish government has repeatedly stated that Greenland is not for sale, and officials in Copenhagen strongly criticized Vance’s visit.

Vance clarified that the U.S. has no plans to expand its military presence on the island and suggested that any changes in security arrangements would be coordinated with Nuuk, Greenland’s capital.

“We hope that they choose to partner with the United States because we’re the only nation on Earth that will respect their sovereignty and respect their security,” he said.

Greenland’s Political Landscape

Greenland’s recent elections reflect little appetite for a quick break from Denmark. The Demokraatit party, which advocates a long-term path toward independence rather than an abrupt split, won the March election.

Public sentiment in Greenland appears largely against Trump’s proposal, and attitudes toward the U.S. among the island’s 57,000 residents have reached a low point.

This growing tension led to the White House canceling a planned “heritage” tour of Greenland. The visit, originally set for Second Lady Usha Vance, National Security Adviser Mike Waltz, and Energy Secretary Chris Wright, was scrapped after officials in Nuuk and Copenhagen pushed back strongly. Greenlandic officials also showed little enthusiasm for hosting the American delegation.

Danish Foreign Minister Lars Løkke Rasmussen welcomed the White House’s decision to cancel the heritage tour, calling it a “positive” move that respected Greenlandic sentiment. However, he noted there was no objection to American officials visiting the Pituffik base, which has long been a U.S. military outpost.

U.S. Presence in Greenland

Vance’s visit to northern Greenland provided a rare opportunity to highlight the American military’s presence in one of the world’s harshest environments. Pituffik Space Base, located 750 miles north of the Arctic Circle, serves as a key front line in missile defense, early-warning systems, and space surveillance.

The vice president received an extensive briefing on Arctic security from military personnel stationed at the base. The extreme conditions became apparent upon his arrival, as temperatures hovered at minus 3 degrees Fahrenheit.

“It’s cold as s‑‑‑ here. Nobody told me,” Vance remarked after joining U.S. Space Force Guardians for lunch.

In addition to serious discussions on security, Vance was introduced to some of the unusual traditions upheld by service members at the base. One such tradition is the polar plunge, where participants dive into the frigid Arctic waters. Those who complete the challenge receive a certificate acknowledging their bravery—or as some jokingly call it, a “certificate for stupidity.”

Vance took the opportunity to share a lighthearted moment with the troops, joking about the challenge.

“And let it be known that this task of questionable sanity was accomplished despite near-freezing temperatures, the threat of collapsing icebergs, and lusty seals,” he quipped.

The Signal Chat Controversy

Vance’s trip to Greenland also took place against the backdrop of a controversy surrounding his involvement in a sensitive text chain. The vice president has come under scrutiny for participating in a Signal group chat in which officials discussed classified details about a planned military strike in Yemen.

The chat became a major scandal after it was revealed that a journalist had inadvertently been included in the group. Critics argue that the discussion may have put classified military information at risk.

Vance attempted to downplay the controversy, assuring reporters that an internal investigation is underway. However, he made it clear that no one would face termination over the incident.

“President Trump has said on Monday, on Tuesday, on Wednesday, on Thursday, and I’m the vice president saying it here on Friday, we are standing behind our entire national security team,” Vance stated.

The investigation’s findings are expected to be released “soon,” according to the vice president.

Tensions Over U.S.-Greenland Relations

The Trump administration’s push to establish greater U.S. influence in Greenland has generated friction with Denmark, which has historically controlled the island. In recent years, Washington has increased its diplomatic and economic outreach to Greenland, viewing it as a critical asset in Arctic geopolitics.

Despite these efforts, Greenlanders remain skeptical of Trump’s ambitions. Greenland’s economy and governance remain deeply tied to Denmark, and there is little indication that its population supports closer ties with the U.S. at the expense of its autonomy.

Trump’s repeated declarations that Greenland should be part of the United States have only fueled further resentment. His administration has previously floated ideas such as investing in infrastructure and economic development projects on the island, but these proposals have been met with mixed reactions.

With tensions between Copenhagen, Nuuk, and Washington continuing to simmer, Vance’s trip to Greenland was seen as a diplomatic attempt to balance Trump’s aggressive rhetoric with a more measured approach. However, his visit did little to quell the controversy surrounding the U.S. administration’s stance on Greenland’s future.

As Trump and his allies continue to push for greater U.S. influence in the Arctic, it remains to be seen how Greenland’s leadership and its people will respond. For now, Denmark remains firmly in control, and Greenlanders show little interest in Trump’s vision for the island’s future.

Global Religious Switching Trends: Christianity and Buddhism See Significant Losses as More People Become Unaffiliated

A significant portion of adults worldwide—up to a fifth or more in some countries—have left the religious traditions in which they were raised, with Christianity and Buddhism experiencing substantial losses due to religious switching. Meanwhile, the number of people identifying as religiously unaffiliated has been rising, according to Pew Research Center surveys conducted across 36 countries, involving nearly 80,000 respondents.

Understanding Religious Switching

Religious switching, as defined in this report, refers to a shift from the religious group in which a person was raised during childhood to their current religious identity in adulthood. The term “religious switching” is used instead of “conversion” since these changes occur in multiple directions, including from a religious identity to being unaffiliated.

The study considers transitions between major religious categories—such as from Buddhist to Christian or Hindu to unaffiliated—but does not track changes within a single religion, such as switching from one Christian denomination to another.

Global Variations in Religious Switching

The frequency of religious switching varies significantly by region. In some countries, changes in religious identity are rare. In India, Israel, Nigeria, and Thailand, at least 95% of adults still identify with the religious group they were raised in.

Conversely, religious switching is more prevalent in East Asia, Western Europe, North America, and South America. For instance, 50% of adults in South Korea, 36% in the Netherlands, 28% in the United States, and 21% in Brazil have left their childhood religion.

Religious Affiliations Gained Through Switching

Most religious switching has resulted in people joining the religiously unaffiliated category, which includes those identifying as atheists, agnostics, or “nothing in particular.” This pattern suggests that religious disaffiliation—people leaving their childhood faith and no longer identifying with any religion—is the dominant trend.

Many of those who disaffiliate were raised as Christians. For example, 29% of adults in Sweden were raised as Christians but now identify as atheists, agnostics, or religiously unaffiliated.

Buddhism has also seen losses due to disaffiliation. In Japan, 23% of adults who were raised Buddhist no longer identify with any religion, while in South Korea, this figure stands at 13%.

However, not all religious switching leads to disaffiliation. Some people move in the opposite direction. South Korea has the highest share of individuals (9%) who were raised without a religion but have since adopted one, with 6% of all South Korean adults saying they were raised unaffiliated but are now Christians.

In addition, about one in ten or more adults in Singapore (13%), South Africa (12%), and South Korea (11%) have switched between two religions.

Major Religious Trends by Country

Christianity, the world’s largest and most widespread religion, has historically been the predominant faith in 25 of the surveyed countries.

Islam, the second-largest religion globally, is predominant in six surveyed countries: Bangladesh, Indonesia, Malaysia, Nigeria, Tunisia, and Turkey. Nigeria is considered a religiously divided country, with both Christianity and Islam playing dominant roles.

Buddhism has historically been predominant in five countries surveyed: Japan, Singapore, Sri Lanka, South Korea, and Thailand. South Korea is unique in that both Buddhism and Christianity have had significant influence.

Hinduism is predominant in India, while Judaism is predominant in Israel.

Religious Groups Experiencing the Largest Losses

A key metric in analyzing religious switching is the net gain or loss of adherents, measured by comparing the number of people who have left a religion to those who have joined.

In most surveyed countries, Christianity has the highest ratio of people leaving versus joining, indicating the largest net losses. In Germany, for example, for every one person who has converted to Christianity, nearly 20 Germans have left the faith (a ratio of 19.7 to 1.0).

However, in some countries, Christianity has seen net gains. In Singapore, for every one person who has left Christianity, about three others have joined (a ratio of 1.0 to 3.2). In Nigeria, Christianity’s ratio of leaving to joining is balanced at 1.0 to 1.0.

Buddhism is also experiencing net losses due to disaffiliation in countries like Japan, Singapore, and South Korea, although not as severely as Christianity. In Japan, where Buddhism has experienced the greatest loss, the ratio of leaving to joining is 11.7 to 1.0.

The Biggest Gainer: The Religiously Unaffiliated

The religiously unaffiliated category has seen the most significant net gains from switching. In countries where a substantial portion of the population identifies as unaffiliated, far more people have left religion than have joined one.

For example, in Italy, the ratio of people leaving religion to those joining one is 1.0 to 28.7. This means that for every one person raised without a religion who later adopts one, nearly 29 people raised in a religion now identify as unaffiliated.

However, not all countries follow this trend. In Hungary, for every person who has become unaffiliated, nearly two others were raised without a religion but have since adopted one (a ratio of 1.9 to 1.0), with most of them becoming Christians.

Demographic Differences in Religious Switching

Age Differences

In most surveyed countries, younger and older adults have switched religions at similar rates. In Singapore, for instance, 29% of both younger adults (ages 18–34) and older adults (ages 50 and older) have switched religions.

However, in 13 countries—particularly in Latin America, Europe, and North America—younger adults are more likely than older adults to have switched religions. In Spain, 48% of adults aged 18–34 have changed their religious identity since childhood, compared to 36% of those aged 50 and older. Similarly, in Colombia, 34% of young adults have switched religions, compared to only 14% of the oldest adults.

In contrast, Australia presents a different trend, with younger adults being slightly less likely to switch religions than older adults (32% vs. 37%).

Regardless of age, most switching results in disaffiliation, with many younger people leaving Christianity. In Colombia, 26% of adults aged 18–34 who were raised Christian no longer identify with any religion, compared to just 9% of those aged 50 and older.

Some of these patterns may indicate long-term secularization trends, particularly in countries like Spain, Canada, Italy, and the U.S. However, it is also possible that some older adults who are now religious switched in and out of religion earlier in life.

Education and Religious Switching

In most countries, religious switching rates do not differ significantly based on education level. However, in 12 of the surveyed countries, people with higher levels of education are more likely to have switched religions.

The Netherlands shows the largest disparity: 42% of highly educated Dutch adults (those with a postsecondary degree) have changed religions, compared to 29% of those with lower levels of education.

Gender Differences

In most surveyed countries, men and women switch religions at similar rates. In South Korea, for example, 51% of women and 50% of men have changed their religious identity.

However, in six countries, men are significantly more likely than women to have switched religions. As with age and education differences, much of this switching involves disaffiliation, with people leaving Christianity or, in Japan, Buddhism.

Key Takeaways

  • Most people who currently identify as Christian were raised Christian, though Christianity has seen significant losses due to switching.
  • The religiously unaffiliated category has grown the most, largely due to people leaving Christianity or Buddhism.
  • Buddhism has seen declines in some countries but has remained stable in others.
  • Religious switching into and out of Islam is relatively low in most surveyed countries.
  • Judaism has high retention rates in both Israel and the U.S.
  • Nearly all people raised Hindu in India and Bangladesh still identify as Hindu.

These trends highlight ongoing religious shifts across the globe, with secularization playing a major role in many regions.

Uncertainty Looms Over Russia-Ukraine Black Sea Cease-Fire Deal

Russia and Ukraine have signaled their commitment to halting hostilities in the Black Sea, but it remains uncertain whether an agreement will take effect soon—if at all.

Moscow attached a significant condition to the deal, stating it would comply only if restrictions on its agricultural exports were lifted. The penalties, imposed by the United States and the European Union, would require a complex negotiation process to reverse.

Additionally, Kyiv and Moscow appear to have differing interpretations of the U.S.-brokered agreement announced on Tuesday. While Russia views the deal as a means to revive a 2022 U.N.-backed accord granting it control over commercial shipping in the Black Sea, Ukraine has insisted it will not allow the Russian Navy back into the western Black Sea, its primary maritime trade route.

Violations and Mistrust Persist

The deep-seated mistrust between the two nations was evident on Wednesday as both sides accused each other of breaching the truce. Ukraine reported an attack on its port city of Mykolaiv, while Moscow claimed to have shot down two Ukrainian drones over the Black Sea.

Russia’s demands indicate that it is in no rush to end the conflict. With a sympathetic administration in the White House and the upper hand on the battlefield, Moscow appears determined to extract maximum concessions before considering a cease-fire.

Russia’s Conditions for Compliance

The Kremlin has made clear that it will not agree to the cease-fire unless its state agriculture bank and other financial institutions involved in food and fertilizer trade are reconnected to the international payment system, Swift.

Given that Swift is headquartered in Belgium, the U.S. would have to convince European regulators to approve such a move. The White House has stated that it will “help restore Russia’s access to the world market for agricultural and fertilizer exports.”

Moscow is also demanding that Western companies resume deliveries of agricultural equipment to Russia and that sanctions on its food and fertilizer companies, shipping vessels, and insurers be lifted.

Despite sanctions, Russia’s agricultural exports remain strong. The country’s grain and fertilizer trade reached $45 billion in 2023, and it continues to export record-high volumes, according to Andrei Sizov, director of the Russian consultancy SovEcon.

Some experts warn that lifting sanctions on a Russian state bank could allow the Kremlin to bypass broader financial restrictions. “The minute you have a sanctions-free bank, you can use it for whatever you want,” said Aleksandr Kolyandr, a Russia analyst at the Center for European Policy Analysis. “It can be an instrument to crack the sanctions regime, but it is much easier to monitor just one bank.”

Ukraine’s Skepticism

While Kyiv has agreed to the maritime cease-fire, it remains wary of Moscow’s intentions.

President Volodymyr Zelensky criticized Russia’s demand for sanctions relief, stating it was “already trying to distort agreements.” He also expressed concerns that the U.S. commitment to facilitating Russian agricultural exports represented “a weakening of positions and a weakening of sanctions.”

With Russia’s demands and the conflicting interpretations of the deal, experts question what Ukraine stands to gain. Notably, the White House has not clarified whether the agreement would protect Ukrainian ports from Russian attacks or lead to the reopening of the ports of Mykolaiv and Kherson—key objectives for Ukraine during negotiations.

Kyiv also has little interest in reviving the 2022 U.N.-backed grain deal that Russia favors. That agreement allowed Ukraine to export grain through a designated Black Sea corridor but also granted Russia the authority to inspect commercial vessels for weapons.

Andrii Klymenko, head of the Black Sea Institute of Strategic Studies, noted that these inspections significantly delayed exports, making the route unprofitable. Since Russia withdrew from the deal, Ukraine has established its own shipping corridor, pushing the Russian Navy out of the western Black Sea and restoring grain exports to near prewar levels.

A Fragile Path Forward

Last week, Russian President Vladimir Putin agreed in a phone conversation with former U.S. President Donald Trump to halt attacks on Ukrainian energy infrastructure for 30 days. Ukraine, which has advocated for a broader cease-fire, followed suit. Both nations have reaffirmed their commitment to the temporary moratorium on energy strikes.

On Tuesday, the Kremlin outlined which facilities would be protected under the agreement, including refineries, pipelines, storage sites, nuclear plants, hydroelectric dams, and energy transmission infrastructure. However, Russia excluded gas and oil extraction sites—facilities that Ukraine claims have been frequent targets of Russian attacks and that Kyiv had included in its own cease-fire proposal.

The situation underscores Moscow’s strategy of appearing open to negotiations while making minimal concessions.

Ukraine’s Defense Minister Rustem Umerov acknowledged the complexities of the deal, stating on Tuesday that “additional technical consultations” were necessary to effectively implement the energy and maritime cease-fires.

With key details unresolved and both sides skeptical of each other’s commitments, the viability of the cease-fire remains uncertain.

Trump Announces 25% Tariff on Imported Cars and Parts, Sparking Industry Concerns

President Donald Trump has announced a 25% import tax on cars and car parts entering the U.S., a move he claims will drive job growth and investment in domestic manufacturing. The tariffs are set to take effect on April 2, with taxes on vehicle imports beginning the following day. Tariffs on parts will be implemented in May or later.

Trump described the measure as essential to revitalizing the American auto industry. “If you build your car in the United States, there is no tariff,” he stated. However, analysts warn that the policy could disrupt supply chains, increase vehicle prices, and strain trade relations with key allies.

Impact on Global Trade and Supply Chains

The U.S. imports roughly eight million cars annually, amounting to $240 billion in trade and nearly half of all vehicles sold domestically. Mexico is the largest supplier of cars to the U.S., followed by South Korea, Japan, Canada, and Germany. Many American car companies operate manufacturing facilities in Mexico and Canada under long-standing free trade agreements.

While tariffs on car parts from Canada and Mexico will be temporarily exempt while U.S. Customs and Border Protection sets up a system to assess duties, trade flows between these neighboring countries and the U.S. are expected to be significantly impacted. Goods worth billions of dollars cross these borders daily.

Market Reaction and Industry Concerns

Following Trump’s announcement, major automotive stocks declined. General Motors shares fell by approximately 3%, while Stellantis, the parent company of Jeep and Chrysler, saw a 3.6% drop. Tesla CEO Elon Musk acknowledged the policy’s impact, posting on X that “the tariff impact on Tesla is still significant.”

Auto manufacturers and industry leaders have raised concerns about the cost burden. The Anderson Economic Group estimates that tariffs on parts from Canada and Mexico alone could raise vehicle costs by $4,000 to $10,000, depending on the model.

The Role of Tariffs in Trump’s Economic Strategy

Trump’s new car tariffs are part of his broader agenda to protect American industries and encourage domestic production. Tariffs function as taxes on imported goods, which foreign companies must pay when bringing their products into the U.S. While this can benefit domestic manufacturers by making foreign competition more expensive, it also raises costs for businesses relying on imported materials and parts.

The Trump administration has argued that these measures are necessary to push companies to manufacture within the U.S. White House officials stated that they aim to have U.S. workers produce more parts rather than merely assembling imported components.

Despite the industry’s concerns, Trump hailed Hyundai’s recent $21 billion investment in the U.S. and its plans to build a steel plant in Louisiana as proof that tariffs work. “This is a clear demonstration that tariffs very strongly work,” he said.

International Reactions and Potential Retaliation

Trump’s tariff announcement has sparked criticism from U.S. trade partners. Japan, the world’s second-largest car exporter, vowed to consider “all options” in response. Shares of major Japanese automakers, including Toyota, Nissan, and Honda, fell sharply following the news.

In the U.K., Chancellor Rachel Reeves called the new tariffs “bad for the UK and bad for the US,” emphasizing ongoing negotiations to prevent the tariffs from applying to British exports. The U.S. is the U.K.’s second-largest car export market after the European Union.

Mike Hawes, CEO of the Society of Motor Manufacturers and Traders (SMMT), urged both governments to “come together immediately and strike a deal that works for all.”

Canadian Prime Minister Mark Carney condemned the decision as a “direct attack” on Canada’s automotive sector. Meanwhile, European Commission President Ursula von der Leyen said the EU would carefully review the new measures before formulating a response.

Adding to the tension, Trump threatened “far larger” tariffs against the EU and Canada if they coordinated economic measures against the U.S.

Broader Implications for the Auto Industry

The auto sector is already dealing with existing tariffs on steel and aluminum, which have increased production costs. Ford, General Motors, and other major automakers have urged the Trump administration to exclude the industry from additional tariffs to avoid further financial strain.

A 2024 study by the U.S. International Trade Commission estimated that a 25% tariff on car imports could reduce foreign vehicle sales in the U.S. by nearly 75% while raising average domestic car prices by approximately 5%.

Despite these concerns, United Auto Workers (UAW) union leader Shawn Fain, who had opposed Trump in the election, expressed cautious optimism. “The president is stepping up to end the free trade disaster that has devastated working-class communities for decades,” he said.

Meanwhile, Matt Blunt, head of the American Automotive Policy Council, reaffirmed the industry’s commitment to increasing U.S. production but warned that tariffs must be structured to prevent excessive price hikes for consumers.

Uncertain Future for U.S. Auto Manufacturing

With major trading partners preparing potential retaliatory measures and automakers reassessing supply chains, the long-term impact of Trump’s tariffs remains uncertain. While the administration argues that the policy will lead to more domestic jobs and investment, the auto industry fears it could bring higher costs, production disruptions, and strained international relationships.

As April 2 approaches, businesses, consumers, and policymakers alike will be watching closely to see how the tariffs reshape the U.S. automotive market and global trade dynamics.

U.S. Religious Freedom Panel Flags Deteriorating Minority Rights in India, Recommends Sanctions on RAW

A U.S. panel on religious freedom has raised concerns over the worsening treatment of minorities in India and has recommended sanctions against India’s external intelligence agency, the Research and Analysis Wing (RAW), over its alleged involvement in assassination plots targeting Sikh separatists.

The U.S. Commission on International Religious Freedom (USCIRF) also highlighted increased restrictions on religious activities in Vietnam, recommending that the communist-ruled nation be designated a “country of particular concern.”

Rising Concerns Over Religious Freedom in India

The commission’s annual report, released on Tuesday, stated that “religious freedom conditions in India continued to deteriorate in 2024, as attacks and discrimination against religious minorities continued to rise.”

It specifically criticized Hindu nationalist Prime Minister Narendra Modi and the Bharatiya Janata Party (BJP) for allegedly spreading “hateful rhetoric and disinformation against Muslims and other religious minorities” during the 2023 election campaign.

The Indian government dismissed the report on Wednesday, calling it part of a pattern of “biased and politically motivated assessments.” Foreign Ministry spokesperson Randhir Jaiswal stated, “The USCIRF’s persistent attempts to misrepresent isolated incidents and cast aspersions on India’s vibrant multicultural society reflect a deliberate agenda rather than a genuine concern for religious freedom.”

Washington has been seeking closer ties with both India and Vietnam due to shared concerns over China’s growing influence in Asia. Analysts suggest that this strategic partnership has led the U.S. to overlook human rights issues in both countries.

U.S.-India Tensions Over Sikh Separatist Allegations

Since 2023, U.S.-India relations have been strained by allegations that India has targeted Sikh separatists abroad. The issue gained international attention when the U.S. charged former Indian intelligence officer Vikash Yadav in connection with a foiled plot against a Sikh activist. India considers Sikh separatists as security threats and has denied any involvement in such operations.

Modi, who has been in power since 2014, denies allegations of religious discrimination, insisting that his government’s initiatives, such as electrification and subsidy schemes, benefit all communities.

However, rights groups have pointed to a rise in hate speech, the implementation of anti-conversion laws, and the revocation of Kashmir’s special status as examples of policies that disproportionately affect minorities. The U.N. has described India’s citizenship law as “fundamentally discriminatory.”

USCIRF Recommends Sanctions, But Implementation Unlikely

The USCIRF has urged the U.S. government to classify India as a “country of particular concern” due to religious freedom violations and to impose targeted sanctions against Yadav and RAW.

Despite these recommendations, it is unlikely that the U.S. will sanction RAW, as the panel’s suggestions are not binding. The commission is an independent, bipartisan advisory body that monitors religious freedom and provides policy recommendations to the U.S. government.

Religious Restrictions in Vietnam Also Criticized

The USCIRF report also criticized Vietnam’s new decree, issued earlier this month, which grants authorities increased power to demand financial records from religious organizations and suspend religious activities for vaguely defined “serious violations.”

As of December, the commission’s Freedom of Religion or Belief Victims List included over 80 individuals imprisoned in Vietnam for practicing their faith or advocating for religious freedom.

The Vietnamese embassy has not yet responded to the report.

Strategic Interests vs. Human Rights Concerns

While the USCIRF continues to call for stronger actions against India and Vietnam over religious freedom concerns, U.S. foreign policy has largely prioritized strategic partnerships with both countries. Given Washington’s focus on countering China’s influence in the region, analysts believe that human rights concerns may continue to take a backseat to geopolitical interests.

USCIRF Report Highlights Global Religious Freedom Violations, Urges TrumpAdministration Action

The U.S. Commission on International Religious Freedom (USCIRF) has released its annual report, identifying the world’s worst violators of religious liberty and urging the new Trump administration to appoint an ambassador-at-large for international religious freedom.

Published on March 25, the 2025 report largely mirrors the findings of the previous year, reflecting continued or worsening conditions in many nations.

“The administration of President Donald J. Trump faces a complex international environment in which to build on its previous success of centering religious freedom as a cornerstone of foreign policy and global leadership,” the report states. “Confirming this commitment to advancing freedom of religion or belief will require calibration and joint action with like-minded governments.”

Calls for Congressional Action

USCIRF’s eight commissioners have urged Congress to prohibit visits from representatives of governments deemed egregious violators of religious freedom.

“Lobbyists paid to represent the interests of governments that kill, torture, imprison, or otherwise persecute their populations because of what religion they practice or what beliefs they hold should not be welcome in the halls of Capitol Hill,” the commission stated.

The report also calls for a successor to Rashad Hussain, whose tenure as ambassador-at-large for international religious freedom ended with the Biden administration. Hussain was recently named a distinguished senior fellow at the Institute for Global Engagement, a think tank promoting religious freedom.

USCIRF Chair Stephen Schneck emphasized the need for a high-level appointee. “I think what’s critical here is an ambassador who has access, not only to Secretary (of State Marco) Rubio, but has access to the White House directly,” Schneck told RNS in an interview. “It needs to be somebody, I think, of that level, given the big uptick in violations of freedom of religion or belief around the world that we’re seeing right now.”

Countries of Particular Concern

USCIRF, an independent bipartisan body reauthorized through September 2026, annually recommends countries for the State Department’s designation as “of particular concern” (CPCs) for committing “systematic, egregious, and ongoing” violations of religious freedom.

The 2025 report calls for the redesignation of 12 countries:

  • Burma
  • China
  • Cuba
  • Eritrea
  • Iran
  • Nicaragua
  • North Korea
  • Pakistan
  • Russia
  • Saudi Arabia
  • Tajikistan
  • Turkmenistan

Additionally, USCIRF recommends adding four more nations to the CPC list:

  • Afghanistan
  • India
  • Nigeria
  • Vietnam

Last year, USCIRF sought similar redesignations and also recommended Azerbaijan’s inclusion. This year, it urges Azerbaijan to remain on the State Department’s special watch list, alongside Algeria.

Further, USCIRF seeks to add several countries to the special watch list, including:

  • Egypt
  • Indonesia
  • Iraq
  • Kazakhstan
  • Kyrgyzstan
  • Malaysia
  • Sri Lanka
  • Syria
  • Turkey
  • Uzbekistan

Rising Concerns Over Religious Liberty

Schneck, who was appointed by President Joe Biden, underscored the lack of progress in improving religious freedom worldwide.

“It’s become much worse in several places, including Iran, Nicaragua, and, frankly, Russia,” he said, attributing the trend to authoritarian regimes and religious nationalism in countries such as Myanmar, India, and Turkey. “We’re not seeing progress. In fact, in most of the countries on this list, we’re seeing regress.”

For the second consecutive year, USCIRF also called for appointing a special envoy for Nigeria and the Lake Chad region, where religious violence has escalated.

Concerns Over Policy Shifts Under Trump

Schneck expressed disappointment that the State Department had not issued its latest designations of religious freedom violators before the Biden administration ended or since Trump returned to office.

While the report acknowledges the Biden administration’s funding of hundreds of millions of dollars in humanitarian aid through USAID—supporting persecuted religious groups like Muslim Rohingya refugees and Syrians—Schneck pointed to a halt in funding under the new administration.

“As I understand, all of the freezes are still in place that affect those USAID programs,” Schneck said. “We’re very hopeful that the new administration will act quickly to resolve some of these situations so that some really needed programs to protect religious freedom on the ground in different parts of the world can be funded appropriately.”

Schneck also raised concerns about refugee protections, warning that recent policy changes could jeopardize asylum seekers fleeing religious persecution.

“We are concerned about anything that makes it more difficult for refugees to flee from religious persecution to find safe haven,” he said.

Push for Legislative Action

USCIRF’s report calls for permanent reauthorization of the commission itself and continued support for the bipartisan Lautenberg Amendment, which facilitates resettlement of religious minorities from Iran and former Soviet states.

Resilience Amid Persecution

The report highlights individuals who have maintained their religious beliefs despite facing discrimination, antisemitism, Islamophobia, and other hostilities.

“One of the most heartening things that we see around the world is the resilience of people to stand up for their faith or their lack of faith, for that matter, their principles,” Schneck said. He praised young Iranians and churchgoers in authoritarian nations but stressed that the broader global situation remains troubling.

“The larger picture doesn’t change,” he said. “We are concerned about what looks like a decaying picture for freedom of religion.”

Elon Musk’s Role in Global Politics Highlights India’s Evolving Economic Model

In April 2024, Elon Musk was scheduled to visit India to meet Prime Minister Narendra Modi and announce a multibillion-dollar Tesla factory investment. However, at the last moment, he canceled the trip and instead flew to China. This abrupt change of plans triggered a wave of critical headlines in the Indian media. Even before Musk’s rising influence in a potential second Donald Trump administration, this incident underscored his unique role as a key player in engaging with Asia’s emerging industrial giants.

Musk represents much of what India seeks in its relationship with the United States—significant investment, technological advancements, and now, a direct link to the White House. Conversely, India’s economic structure, where billionaire industrialists maintain close ties with political leaders, provides insight into a shifting U.S. economic landscape. Increasingly, tycoons like Musk serve not just as facilitators of industrial policy but also as intermediaries of political influence.

Over the past few decades, India’s political leadership and its business moguls have formed increasingly strong alliances. Prominent billionaires like Mukesh Ambani and Gautam Adani lead massive corporate empires with influence extending across nearly every sector of Indian life. Their business dominance has been highly profitable, with both ranking among Asia’s wealthiest individuals. As of mid-March, Ambani and Adani were listed on Forbes’ real-time billionaire rankings with net worths of $92 billion and $57 billion, respectively.

In this environment, accusations of crony capitalism—where business elites and political figures collaborate for mutual benefit—are common. The country’s main opposition leader, Rahul Gandhi, made this a focal point of his campaign in last year’s general election, which Modi won decisively.

However, the nature of government-business relationships in India has evolved since Modi’s rise to power in 2014. In The Billionaire Raj, I detail the period of the 2000s and early 2010s, which was marked by rampant corruption and cronyism. During this time, India had a weak yet personally upright prime minister, Manmohan Singh, who presided over what became known as the “season of scams.” The era was riddled with corruption scandals involving billions of dollars, with allegations spanning various sectors, including telecommunications, coal, and iron ore.

Even then, corruption in India was not a matter of simple bribes in envelopes or suitcases—it was far more sophisticated. Nonetheless, many viewed the situation as spiraling out of control. “Every cabinet minister was a sovereign enterprise,” an observer of Indian business once told me, only slightly exaggerating the extent to which political leaders were implicated in financial scandals.

Under Modi, this dynamic has changed. Like Singh, Modi is known for his personal integrity. Although corruption has not vanished, large-scale scandals have significantly declined. Today, few government ministers would risk embezzlement, fearing repercussions from India’s politically dominant prime minister.

India’s economic model is now increasingly resembling the structured crony capitalism seen in East and Southeast Asia in past decades. For example, Malaysia under Prime Minister Mahathir Mohamad in the 1980s and South Korea during President Park Chung-hee’s rule in the 1970s followed a similar pattern. These systems saw select business magnates forging close relationships with political leaders in exchange for constructing crucial infrastructure like airports, telecommunications networks, and buildings.

Under Modi, the role of India’s ultra-rich has become more strategically aligned with political objectives. Politicians collaborate with these billionaires because they can execute large-scale projects swiftly. If these business figures then receive financial or regulatory advantages in other areas as a result of their government connections—much like during India’s previous corruption scandals—that is seen as a justifiable compromise.

Musk’s role in Trump’s administration is unprecedented, spanning high-level politics, industrial policy, and even global diplomacy. No Indian industrialist enjoys Musk’s level of global recognition and influence. However, in a broader sense, the United States and India appear to be converging in their economic models. India’s crony capitalism has become more structured and efficient under Modi, while in the U.S., Trump’s administration is moving in the opposite direction. America’s historical system of open markets and fair competition is being replaced by one in which business leaders aligned with Trump receive special advantages. This shift marks a departure from a rules-based economic framework.

The long-term risks of this billionaire-politician nexus, despite its short-term benefits—such as increased investment and improved infrastructure—are substantial. One major concern is the potential for instability. Trump’s economic approach, which relies on deals with select business leaders, is fragile because it collapses if conflicts arise between him and his favored tycoons. An economic system dependent on seamless cooperation between industrialists and politicians is inherently vulnerable to disagreements and power struggles.

While billionaire entrepreneurs are often portrayed as independent visionaries in the public imagination—akin to characters from an Ayn Rand novel—the reality in autocratic-leaning states tells a different story. Across countries like India, China, and Russia, and increasingly in Trump’s America, business magnates function more as dependents than as power wielders. Despite their wealth, Adani and Ambani remain cautious in their dealings with Modi, much like Jack Ma in China with President Xi Jinping or Russian oligarchs with President Vladimir Putin. Even Musk has been noticeably deferential to Trump in recent interviews, seemingly aware that his privileged position is not guaranteed. Ultimately, in a system where industrialists and political leaders are closely linked, it is the politicians who hold real power.

India’s economic trajectory, however, does offer some reasons for optimism. While its initial phase of crony capitalism was marked by chaos and self-interest, it has gradually shifted toward a more streamlined and less overtly corrupt system. There is hope that a more rules-based economic order may eventually emerge.

Conversely, the United States appears to be moving toward a system rife with favoritism and financial misconduct. Under Trump and Musk, the nation is approaching what could be described as a new era of kleptocracy. The concern is that America’s own “season of scams” may not be far off.

Mayor Eric Adams Engages with Indian Community Leaders in Roundtable Discussion

On Thursday, March 20, 2025, New York City Mayor Eric Adams participated in a roundtable discussion with Indian community leaders to engage in direct dialogue with them and senior members of his administration. The meeting provided a platform for addressing concerns raised by the Indian American community.

The event was attended by representatives from various city agencies, including the Community Affairs Unit, Department of Buildings, Department of Small Business Services, New York City Police Department, Mayor’s Office of Food Policy, Mayor’s Office of Nonprofit Services, Mayor’s Office of Minority and Women-Owned Business Enterprises, and the Mayor’s Office of International Affairs.

The primary focus of the meeting was to discuss pressing issues affecting the Indian American community, which has been vocal about its concerns regarding the current administration’s policies and actions.

Addressing the gathering of more than 50 representatives from Indian American organizations, Adams acknowledged the significant contributions of the Indian diaspora in New York City. He recognized that over 220,000 Indians play a vital role in various sectors, strengthening the city’s economy and cultural fabric.

Adams reassured the leaders that his administration was committed to addressing their concerns and fulfilling their requests. “Our administration is laser-focused on not only listening to your concerns on issues like public safety and inclusive food options, but making concrete steps to address them,” he stated.

Community Affairs Unit Commissioner Fred Kreizman facilitated introductions between the community leaders and key figures within the city’s administration. Dilip Chauhan, Deputy Commissioner for Trade, Investment, and Innovation at the Mayor’s Office of International Affairs, affirmed Adams’ dedication to the Indian American community and underscored the importance of collaboration in addressing their issues.

Welcoming everyone to the discussion, Adams expressed gratitude for the ongoing support from the Indian community. He then handed over the floor to Chauhan to continue the conversation.

A community leader who attended the meeting but chose to remain anonymous noted that while attendees were given the opportunity to voice their concerns, the one-hour duration of the meeting was not sufficient for everyone to be heard. The most frequently raised concerns included securing dedicated spaces for community organizations and addressing parking shortages. Additionally, discussions covered the need for vegetarian meal options in hospitals, an issue that has been a longstanding concern for many within the community.

Other topics brought up during the discussion included the availability of community spaces, expansion of the mayor’s Breaking Bread, Building Bonds program, the rise in shoplifting and theft affecting small businesses, the impact of repeat offenders on crime rates, mental health resources, the promotion of religious and cultural harmony, and increasing cultural competency within city agencies.

Community leaders acknowledged Adams’ initiatives to improve public safety and expressed appreciation for his efforts in supporting the Indian American community. They specifically thanked him for declaring Diwali a public school holiday, backing plant-based meal programs, and promoting Indian culture through city-led initiatives.

In response, Adams reassured the leaders of his administration’s dedication to fostering a more inclusive environment for the Indian American community. He emphasized his commitment to working with community partners to secure spaces for Indian organizations, enhancing cultural awareness of Hinduism, Sikhism, and Jainism, and supporting key faith-based events.

“We heard from Indian small business owners, nonprofit founders, and cultural leaders, all of whom work each day to improve our city and strengthen our communities. We are committed to working with them to ensure New York City is the best place to raise a family and thrive,” Adams said.

Senior members of the mayor’s administration provided updates on ongoing initiatives, including expanding the availability of religiously inclusive, plant-based meals in New York City hospitals and increasing support for minority- and women-owned businesses. Adams also assigned specific concerns raised during the meeting to senior officials in his administration, ensuring follow-up and action on the issues discussed.

Beena Kothari Assumes Charge as President of The Association of Indians in America – New York Chapter (AIA-NY)

Beena Kothari, a veteran community leader along with the Executive Committee assumed charge on March 20, 2025 as the President of the Association of Indians in America – New York Chapter (AIA-NY), during a solemn inauguration ceremony. The event was attended by over 150 distinguished guests, including elected officials, AIA founding members, Board of Trustees, past AIA Presidents, community leaders, members, and media partners.

image (8)The oath ceremony commenced with the singing of the American and Indian national anthems by Bina Sabapthy, Jyoti Gupta, and Roopam Maini, followed by a graceful Ganesh Vandana performance by Hamsaasya School of Dance. Harsh Vyas and Jasbir Jay Singh served as emcees for the evening.

President Beena Kothari and other dignitaries delivered inspiring speeches, emphasizing the importance of preserving Indian heritage and culture in the USA while promoting integration with mainstream America.

AIA-NY Executive Committee consists of: President: Beena Kothari; Vice Presidents: Anita Thakkar, Dr. Tarunimage (3) Wasil, Harsh Vyas, Nilima Madaan; Treasurer: Dr. Bal K. Gilja; Secretary: Dr. Sharad Kothari; Members-at-Large: Anju Sharma, Bhavana Sharma, Deepak Bansal, Deepika Modi, Dr. Narendra Lodha, Dr. Sumita Sengupta, Dr. Usha Bansal, Gobind Bathija, Jay Jasbir Singh, Jyoti Gupta, Kiran Reddy, Parvathala, Narinder Kapoor, Navneet Agarwal, Nick Garg, Nutan Roongta, Roopam Maini, Sanju Sharma, Surin Manaktala, Swati Vaishnav, and, Satnam Singh Parhar.

In her inspiring address, President Kothari highlighted the significance of cultural preservation and community engagement. “We represent not only ourselves but also our rich cultural heritage, values, and aspirations. We are the bridge between our Indian roots and our American dreams. Together, let us strive to take AIA to new heights and continue to serve our community with pride and purpose.”

image (4)She also emphasized the importance of youth involvement in AIA activities and fostering young leadership, saying, “We will encourage and induct young leaders who have grown up with our motto of ‘Indian Heritage and American Commitment’ and have great potential to shape the future of AIA.”

AIA- NY Chapter has planned several new initiatives, including, Holi Celebration – March 26th in collaboration with CUNY Asian American Student Board; National AIA Medical Council Awards Gala – May 3rd, at Cipriani 42nd Street, Manhattan; Annual Fundraising Gala for Deepavali – June 1st; Desi Next Youth Programs – (TBD); Fundraiser Dinner for AIA’s Project India – July 20th; and, AIA-NY Iconic Deepavali Festival – October 2025.

Beena Kothari expressed her heartfelt gratitude to past presidents, volunteers, sponsors, and supporters who haveimage (6) played a pivotal role in AIA-NY’s success. The evening concluded with a thank-you note from Treasurer Dr. Bal K. Gilja and Secretary Dr. Sharad Kothari, followed by a celebratory dinner. A special plaque was presented to the outgoing President of AIA-NY, Dr. Jagdish Gupta, in recognition of his service and dedication.

Beena Kothari is a distinguished community leader with a profound impact on the Indian-American community. She has previously served as President of IALI (Indian Association of Long Island), GOPIO-NY, and India Day Parade in Long Island. Through her extensive associations, charitable initiatives, and collaborative relationships, Beena has demonstrated image (2)an unwavering commitment to fostering connections, promoting cultural understanding, and supporting community well-being.

A seasoned professional, Beena has over 20 years of experience in real estate, with a distinguished career at Fortune 500 companies, including JP Morgan Chase, IBM, Sony, and Time Warner, where she served as a Global IT Team Manager.

Embracing the inclusive spirit of Vasudhaiva Kutumbakam (The World is One Family), Beena strives to break down barriers and build bridges. She is deeply committed to empowering youth and women, believing in their potential to drive positive change and become future leaders.”My ultimate goal is to contribute meaningfully to the community, spreading love, kindness, and compassion, and making the world a better place for all,” she said.

Amazon MGM Studios Announces Amy Pascal and David Heyman as Producers for Next James Bond Film

Amazon MGM Studios has announced that veteran producers Amy Pascal and David Heyman will lead production on the next James Bond film—the first under Amazon’s creative control since acquiring the franchise’s parent studio in 2022.

Pascal, known for producing the latest Spider-Man films starring Tom Holland, and Heyman, who produced all eight Harry Potter movies, bring extensive blockbuster experience to the Bond series. Courtenay Valenti, head of film at Amazon MGM Studios, praised the duo in a statement Tuesday, calling them “two of the most accomplished, experienced, and respected film producers in our industry.”

In a joint statement, Pascal and Heyman described 007 as “one of the most iconic characters in the history of cinema,” adding, “We are humbled to follow in the footsteps of Barbara Broccoli and Michael Wilson, who made so many extraordinary films, and we are honoured and excited to keep the spirit of Bond very much alive as he embarks on his next adventure.”

The transition marks a major shift in the Bond franchise, which has been overseen by Broccoli and Wilson since the 1990s. Their departure, announced in February, ended decades of family stewardship that began with Albert “Cubby” Broccoli, who launched the first Bond film in 1962.

Next Bond Actor Still Undecided

The new producing team and Amazon now face the critical decision of choosing the next actor to play James Bond following Daniel Craig’s departure after No Time to Die (2021). Speculation has been rampant, with actors James Norton, Aaron Taylor-Johnson, and Theo James among the bookmakers’ favorites. However, there is no confirmed timeline for the next film’s release or casting decisions.

Amazon founder Jeff Bezos fueled speculation last month by asking his followers on X, “Who’d you pick as the next Bond?”

While preparing for Bond’s next chapter, Pascal and Heyman remain busy with other major projects. Pascal recently produced Challengers, starring Zendaya, and was behind the Spider-Verse film series. Heyman, meanwhile, is working on the Harry Potter television reboot and Taika Waititi’s adaptation of Klara and the Sun, starring Jenna Ortega and Amy Adams.

Despite the uncertainty surrounding Bond’s next iteration, Valenti expressed confidence in the new team, stating, “We are honored to be working with them on James Bond’s next chapter and are excited to deliver to global audiences storytelling that upholds the impeccable legacy of this beloved character.”

The Future of Western Security: Can Europe Step Up as the U.S. Steps Back?

The security landscape of the Western world faces its gravest challenge since the end of World War II, and this shift is likely to be long-term. As one expert notes, “Trumpism will outlast his presidency.” With the U.S. taking a step back, the pressing question is which nations are prepared to assume a leadership role.

In February 1947, at 9:00 AM, Lord Inverchapel, the British ambassador to Washington, entered the U.S. State Department with two critical diplomatic messages printed on blue paper—one concerning Greece and the other Turkey. Britain, financially drained and deeply indebted to the U.S., declared it could no longer support Greek government forces battling a Communist insurgency. Simultaneously, Britain was withdrawing from Palestine and India and reducing its presence in Egypt.

Recognizing the threat of Soviet influence expanding into Greece and potentially Turkey, the U.S. swiftly responded. President Harry Truman proclaimed, “It must be a policy of the United States to support free peoples who are resisting attempted subjugation by armed minorities or by outside pressure.” This policy, known as the Truman Doctrine, cemented the idea that defending democracy abroad aligned with U.S. national interests.

Following this shift, the U.S. launched the Marshall Plan to rebuild European economies and helped establish NATO in 1949 to counter Soviet expansion. This period marked the definitive transfer of Western leadership from Britain to the United States. With its vast economic and military power, the U.S. emerged as the dominant force shaping the post-war world.

For decades, the U.S. played a central role in maintaining global security, but now, the fundamental assumptions behind its foreign policy are being questioned. Donald Trump is the first post-World War II president to challenge America’s global commitments. His stance has created uncertainty about the existing world order and left many wondering what the new one will look like.

A Challenge to the Truman Legacy

Trump’s skepticism of America’s international obligations is not new. Nearly 40 years ago, he placed full-page ads in U.S. newspapers criticizing the country’s military commitments. In 1987, he wrote, “For decades, Japan and other nations have been taking advantage of the United States. Why are these nations not paying the United States for the human lives and billions of dollars we are losing to protect their interests? The world is laughing at America’s politicians as we protect ships we don’t own, carrying oil we don’t need, destined for allies who won’t help.”

This sentiment has persisted into his second term. Recently leaked messages on airstrikes against Yemen’s Houthis revealed administration officials expressing frustration over European reliance on U.S. military action. A message attributed to Vice President J.D. Vance read, “I just hate bailing Europe out again.” In response, another, reportedly from Defense Secretary Pete Hegseth, stated, “VP: I fully share your loathing of European free-loading. It’s PATHETIC.”

Trump has gone further by embracing Russian President Vladimir Putin. Early in his second term, he informed Russia that Ukraine would not be allowed NATO membership and that he did not expect Ukraine to regain lost territories. Many critics saw this as a strategic blunder, surrendering leverage without securing anything in return.

Some Trump supporters view Putin as an ally in the ideological battle against liberal values, reinforcing the notion that U.S. foreign policy is increasingly shaped by domestic culture wars. Ed Arnold, a senior research fellow at the Royal United Services Institute, warns, “The US is becoming divorced from European values. That’s difficult [for Europeans] to swallow because it means that it’s structural, cultural, and potentially long-term. I think the current trajectory of the US will outlast Trump, as a person. I think Trumpism will outlast his presidency.”

NATO’s Article 5 “On Life Support”

Trump’s administration has signaled that the U.S. will no longer be the primary guarantor of European security, insisting that European nations must take responsibility for their own defense. Earlier this month, Trump stated, “If [NATO countries] don’t pay, I’m not going to defend them. No, I’m not going to defend them.”

For nearly 80 years, NATO’s Article 5—stating that an attack on one member is an attack on all—has been the bedrock of European security. While UK Prime Minister Sir Keir Starmer expressed confidence in the U.S. commitment to NATO, others remain skeptical.

Ben Wallace, former UK defense secretary, warned, “I think Article 5 is on life support. If Europe, including the United Kingdom, doesn’t step up to the plate, invest a lot on defense, and take it seriously, it’s potentially the end of the NATO that we know and it’ll be the end of Article 5. Right now, I wouldn’t bet my house that Article 5 would be able to be triggered in the event of a Russian attack… I certainly wouldn’t take for granted that the United States would ride to the rescue.”

Public perception reflects this shift. A French poll by Institut Elabe found that nearly three-quarters of respondents do not consider the U.S. an ally of France. Majorities in traditionally pro-American nations like the UK and Denmark also hold unfavorable views of the U.S. Robert Kagan, a senior fellow at the Brookings Institute, argues, “The damage Trump has done to NATO is probably irreparable. The alliance relied on an American guarantee that is no longer reliable, to say the least.”

Is the West Fragmenting?

For Russian President Putin, these developments play into his strategy of destabilizing Europe. After Ukrainian President Volodymyr Zelensky’s unsuccessful meeting with Trump, a Kremlin spokesperson declared, “The fragmentation of the West has begun.”

Armida van Rij of Chatham House echoes this concern: “Russia’s objectives are to destabilize Europe. It is to weaken NATO and get the Americans to withdraw their troops from here. And at the moment, you could go ‘tick, tick, and almost tick.'”

Meanwhile, European defense spending has dwindled. The UK, for example, has cut its military budget by nearly 70% since the Cold War peak. Wallace laments, “We had a big budget [during the Cold War] and we took a peace dividend… The problem is we went from a peace dividend to corporate raiding. [Defense] just became the go-to department to take money from. And that is where we just forgot the lessons of our history.”

Germany’s Chancellor-in-waiting, Friedrich Merz, has called for a Europe independent of the U.S. But building an autonomous European military-industrial complex remains a complex challenge. Ian Bond of the Centre for European Reform notes, “The further west you go, the more problematic it becomes until you get to Spain and Italy.”

A New World Order?

Historian Timothy Garton Ash identifies key military assets that only the U.S. currently provides: “The satellites, the intelligence, the Patriot air defense batteries, which are the only ones that can take down Russian ballistic missiles.” He argues that within five years, Europe should develop its own capabilities to replace U.S. support.

Van Rij acknowledges that while European defense autonomy is necessary, “what’s really difficult are the divisions within Europe on how to actually do this and whether to actually do this.”

Trump’s vision appears to favor a world where major powers dictate terms to weaker nations, akin to the spheres of influence system of the Cold War era. The uncertainty surrounding U.S. commitments has left Europe facing a pivotal decision: unite, invest in defense, and maintain independence—or risk becoming subordinate to larger global powers.

India to Welcome Three New Airlines in 2025: Air Kerala, Alhind Air, and Shankh Air Set for Takeoff

India’s aviation industry is set for a major shift in 2025 with the launch of three new airlines: Air Kerala, Alhind Air, and Shankh Air. This expansion will mark the end of Akasa Air’s reign as the youngest airline in India, having launched in December 2021.

New Airlines Poised to Transform Indian Aviation

Despite India having 12 active passenger airlines, the market is dominated by just two major carriers, which account for over 90% of passenger traffic. The arrival of these three new airlines aims to bring greater competition and accessibility to Indian travelers.

All three airlines were founded in 2024 and have received no objection certificates (NOCs) from the Ministry of Civil Aviation. They are now awaiting their air operator certificates (AOCs) from the Director General of Civil Aviation (DGCA) before officially launching operations.

Shankh Air: Uttar Pradesh’s First Full-Service Airline

Among the three, Shankh Air will become Uttar Pradesh’s first scheduled full-service airline. It will operate from the soon-to-be-inaugurated Noida Jewar International Airport.

  • Initial funding: $50 million
  • Additional pledge: $200 million from its parent company
  • Aircraft acquisition: Leasing its first narrow-body aircraft by March-end

Shankh Air plans to initially connect major cities within Uttar Pradesh and key metro destinations across India. The airline has also set its sights on international expansion by 2027.

Air Kerala: India’s First Ultra-Low-Cost Carrier

Air Kerala is set to become India’s first ultra-low-cost carrier (ULCC), offering affordable travel options.

  • Focus: Connecting Kerala’s smaller cities with major hubs before expanding internationally in 2026
  • Fleet: Three ATR 72-600aircraft
  • Ownership: Initially conceived by the Kerala government in 2005, but now being launched by UAE-based entrepreneurs under Zettfly Aviation Pvt. Ltd.

Alhind Air: A Regional Commuter Airline from Kerala

Alhind Air, founded by the Calicut-based Alhind Group, will operate as a regional commuter airline.

  • Base:Cochin International Airport
  • Fleet:ATR 72-600aircraft
  • Expansion Plans: Aiming for international routes, especially to Gulf countries, within two years of launch

A Competitive Boost for Indian Aviation

The entry of these three airlines is expected to enhance competition, increase connectivity, and bring more affordable travel options for passengers. As they prepare for takeoff, they are likely to reshape the Indian aviation landscape and challenge the dominance of existing major carriers.

GOPIO International will Recognize Eight at its 36th Anniversary Convention in Brisbane Australia 

The Global Organization of People of Indian Origin (GOPIO) will recognize five individuals in professional and business achievement and three individuals for community service. at its Convention 2025 celebrating its 36th Anniversary on March 28th to 30th at Brisbane Marriott in Brisbane, Queensland, Australia. They will be honored at the Finale Awards Banquet of the convention on March 29th.

Dignitaries at the conference inauguration include Queensland Premier David Crisafulli, Lord Mayor Adrian Schrinner of Brisbane, India’s Consul General Neetu M. Bhagotia. They will be welcomed at the event by GOPIO Chairman Dr. Thomas Abraham, President Prakash Shah, Executive Vice President Umesh Chandra who also serves as the Convener of the Convention and Vice President Kewal Kanda.

Dignitaries and Senior GOPIO Officials to be at the Convention
Dignitaries and Senior GOPIO officials to be present at the convention, from l. to r. Premier David Crisafulli, Lord Mayor Adrian Schrinner, Consul General Neetu M. Bhagotia, Dr. Thomas Abraham, Prakash ?Shah, Umnesh Chandra and Kewal Kanda

The awardees in the professional categories are Queensland University Chancellor Peter Varghese who earlier served as Australian High Commissioner to India and Malaysia in Public Service; Springfield City Group (Brisbane, Australia) Founder and Chairman Maha Sinnathamby for Achievement in Entrepreneurship; Sabinsa Corp. (East Windsor, New Jersey, USA) Global CEO  Shaheen Majeed for Achievement in Business; Prof. Prasad KDV Yarlagadda, Dean (Academic) of School of Engineering, University of Southern Queensland (Brisbane, Australia) for Engineering and Applied Sciences; Rohit Vyas, International Broadcast Journalist and Documentary Filmmaker (New Jersey, USA) for Media Achievement

GOPIO's Professional Achievement Awardees 2025
GOPIO’s Professional Achievement Awardees 2025, from l. to r.: Peter Varghese, Maha Sinnathamby, Shaheen Majeed, Prof. Prasad Yarlagadda and Rohi Vyas

Three individuals are also recognized for their service to the Diaspora community. They are Mrs. Archana Singh, Former Honorary Consul of India (Brisbane, Australia); Prof. Rajasekhar Vangapaty, Advisor to Fashion Institute of Technology (New York, USA) who serves as GOPIO-Manhattan Executive Vice President and as official of India Home and several other charitable organizations in the USA and India; and Mr. Harmohan Singh Walia (Sydney, Australia);  Founder of GOPIO-Sydney Northwest, served as President and in other capacities, former International Coordinator for GOOPIO Oceania Region.

GOPIO's Community Service Awardees 2025
GOPIO Community Service Awardees, from l. to r.: Archana Singh, Prof. Raj Vangapaty and Harmohan Singh Walia

The Convention theme is “The Indian Diaspora’s Role in Shaping Future Technologies.” The convention will start with a welcome reception/dinner inauguration on Friday, March 28th. There are eight conference sessions on Saturday March 29th. Discussion topics are Artificial Intelligence (AI), Quantum Computing and Internet of Things (IoT); Nanotechnology, Advanced Materials and Electronic/Photonic Devices; Pharmaceutical, Food Supplements and Biomedical Innovations; and Energy Generation and Storage Devices.

A second track of conference sessions will cover NRIs and PIOs Working Closer to Achieve Common Goals; Diaspora Women and their Growing Contributions in Various Sectors; and Diaspora Youth & Young Achievers: The role they can play in the Diaspora Movement. The last session will be plenary session “GOPIO Chamber of Commerce and Industry and the Worldwide Networking of the Diaspora Businesses and SMEs in India.’

There will be entertainment after the welcome dinner on Friday and again after the Award Ceremony on Saturday evening.

.Founded in 1989, GOPIO is a non-partisan, not-for-profit, secular organization with Individual Life Members and chapter delegates from over 100 chapters in 36 countries. GOPIO’s volunteers are committed to enhancing cooperation and communication between NRIs/PIOs and the local communities, building networks, bonds, friendships, alliances, and the camaraderie of citizens and colleagues alike. GOPIO volunteers believe that when they help network the global Indian community, they facilitate making tomorrow a better world for the Indian Diaspora, the countries they live in and India.

GOPIO logo is a trademark registered under the US Patent and Trademark Office.

PROFESSIONAL ACHIEVEMENT AWARDEES FOR 2024

Public Service – Peter Varghese, Chancellor Queensland University and former Australian Ambassador to Malaysia and India, Brisbane, Australia

image005 (1)Mr. Peter Varghese has served as Chancellor of The University of Queensland since 2016. A distinguished public servant, he has served as Secretary of the Department of Foreign Affairs and Trade, High Commissioner to India and Malaysia, and Director-General of the Office of National Assessments, Australia’s peak intelligence agency. He is also the author of the 2018 India Economic Strategy to 2035, commissioned by the then Australian Prime Minister. Mr. Varghese received an Honorary Doctorate of Letters in 2013 from The University of Queensland. He sits on the boards of CARE Australia and North Queensland Airports, chairs Asialink’s advisory council, and sits on the governing board of the Rajaratnam School of International Studies.

Achievement in Entrepreneurship – Maha Sinnathambi, Founder and Chairman, Springfield City Group, Brisbane, Australia

Mr. Maha Sinnathamby, Chairman, Springfield City Group is the visionary founder of Greater Springfield,image006 (1) Australia’s fastest emerging new city.  In 2010 he was recognized as the World’s Best Master Community Planner by the International Real Estate Federation. An iconic entrepreneur, he was declared as one of Queensland, Australia’s 50 greatest thinkers of all time, by Newscorp in 2014. Maha, supported by three levels of Government and private capital, has invested nearly $12 billion dollars in Greater Springfield’s infrastructure and construction. His city-building project grows by $600 million annually, while contributing social and economic value to the Queensland and Australian economies.

Achievement in Business – Shaheen Majeed, Global CEO & Managing Director, Sabinsa Corp., Est Windsor, New Jersey, USA

image007Mr. Shaheen Majeed, Shaheen has held diverse roles, including sales, supply chain management, manufacturing, regulatory compliance, and global marketing. His innovative global strategies have expanded the company’s reach across multiple continents. For three decades, he has shaped Sabinsa into a global leader in healthcare ingredients. Some achievements include ensuring the company’s adherence to quality manufacturing and regulatory standards, guiding numerous clinical studies, and launching products that are category leaders. He holds 75 US & International patents and has authored over 40 peer-reviewed publications, showcasing his dedication to advancing scientific research and product innovation.

Engineering and Applied Sciences – Prof. Prasad KDV Yarlagadda, Dean (Academic) of School of Engineering, University of Southern Queensland, Brisbane, Australia

Prof. Prasad KDV Yarlagadda worked in industry and university over 40 years in number of countries.  He isimage008 (1) currently Dean, Engineering at University of Southern Queensland.  He is an outstanding researcher with global recognition in the field of Bio-Manufacturing.  His track record of 700 publications, 62 Ph.D successful supervisions,  $20M research funding and number of awards including Order of Australia Medal (OAM) and Researcher of the Year in 2020 are true reflection of  his accomplishments.  In addition to number of Presidential roles in various community organisations, he served as Chairperson, Science and Technology Council, GOPIO International for a decade.

Media Achievement – Rohit Vyas, International Broadcast Journalist and Documentary Filmmaker, New Jersey, USA

image009Mr. Rohit Vyas is currently the longest serving broadcast and print journalist of Indian origin in the United States. His nearly five decades long career has focused on the Indian Diaspora community worldwide as well as international affairs and global diplomacy. Most recently he was the News Director, Principal News Anchor and Senior Vice President of TV ASIA (USA).  He is now also an acclaimed documentary filmmaker.

 

GOPIO COMMUNITY SERVICE AWARDEES FOR 2024

Mrs. Archana Singh, Former Honorary Consul of India, Brisbane, Australia

Mrs Archana Singh, former Honorary Consul of India in Queensland (2011-2024) to be conferred with thearchana singh GOPIO Community Service Award, 2025. She has served the Indian Diaspora and the Indian High Commission with commitment and passion, winning the trust and confidence of the community and building strong connections with government and non-government stakeholders.

 

Prof. Rajasekhar Vangapaty, GOPIO-Manhattan Executive VP and official of India Home and several other charitable and service organizations in the USA and India

Prof. Rajasekhar R. Vangapaty, an academic advisor and professor at the Fashion Institute of Technology,image011 SUNY, has over four decades of global higher education experience at various universities and colleges, focusing on domestic and international student success, mentorship, and community empowerment. As Executive Vice President of GOPIO Manhattan, he leads community service programs in the U.S. and India, supporting Indian students in the US and training hundreds of teachers and women in leadership, technology, spoken English, and fashion design skills.

Harmohan Singh Walia, Founder and Former President, GOPIO-Sydney Northwest, and Former Intl. Coordinator for GOPIO Oceania Region

image012Harmohan Singh Walia is an engineer, politician, radio news-reader, poet, author, community leader, Olympic torch-bearer and now voluntary community photographer, who bring smile on people’s faces. Has covered over 5000 community events in the last 15 years with free photography. Served the Indian Diaspora community as Founder and President of GOPIO-Sydney Northwest Chapter and GOPIO International Coordinator for Oceania Region.

 

image013

White House Criticizes India’s 150% Tariff on American Alcohol, Calls for Fair Trade

The White House on Tuesday addressed the tariffs imposed by various countries on U.S. goods, specifically highlighting India’s 150% tariff on American alcohol and 100% tariff on agricultural products.

White House press secretary Karoline Leavitt emphasized that U.S. President Donald Trump is committed to fair trade and reciprocity. She also criticized Canada, accusing the country of “ripping off” the U.S. for decades.

“The president is again responding to the fact that Canada has been ripping off the United States of America and hardworking Americans for decades,” Leavitt said during a press briefing. “If you look at the rates of tariffs across the board that Canadians have been imposing on the American people and our workers here, it is egregious.”

Leavitt also pointed to high tariffs imposed by India and Japan on U.S. goods, underscoring Trump’s commitment to protecting American businesses and workers.

“In fact, I have a handy dandy chart here that shows not just Canada but the rate of tariffs across the board. If you look at Canada—nearly 300% tariff on American cheese and butter. You look at India—150% tariff on American alcohol. Do you think that’s helping Kentucky bourbon be exported into India? I don’t think so. 100% tariff on agricultural products from India,” she stated.

Trump has frequently expressed concerns about international trade practices, recently suggesting the possibility of increasing tariffs on Mexico and Canada. He has cited border control and fentanyl trafficking as additional reasons for imposing tariffs on these countries.

On March 7, Trump temporarily delayed certain tariffs on Mexico and Canada before their scheduled implementation on April 2, following discussions with Mexico’s President Claudia Sheinbaum. However, he maintained his criticism of Canada’s tariff policies.

Regarding India, Trump has previously complained about difficulties in trading with the country due to its high tariff rates. He recently stated that India has agreed to lower tariffs, attributing this to increased scrutiny of its trade policies.

Indian American Community Bids Farewell to Deputy Consul General Dr. Varun Jeph

The Indian American community of the tri-state area gathered on the evening of March 20 to bid farewell to Dr. Varun Jeph, Deputy Consul General of India in New York, as he concluded his diplomatic tenure. The farewell reception, held at the Moghul Ballroom in Edison, New Jersey, saw the participation of over 200 members of the Indian American community.

Honoring Dr. Jeph’s Contributions

The evening’s program began with a viewing of Indian Prime Minister Narendra Modi’s podcast interview with Lex Fridman, which continued even after Dr. Jeph’s arrival.

During the formal farewell ceremony, speakers highlighted Dr. Jeph’s achievements and milestones, particularly his adept handling of complex diplomatic situations and his deep engagement with the Indian diaspora.

Ankur Vaidya, Chairman of the Federation of Indian Associations (FIA), praised Dr. Jeph’s deep understanding of the community.

“He is our man who knows the community like the back of his hand. His experience in navigating complex situations has been invaluable,” Vaidya remarked, emphasizing his role in strengthening the India-diaspora relationship.

FIA President Saurin Parikh commended Dr. Jeph’s management skills, attention to detail, and ability to unify Indian American organizations. He noted that Dr. Jeph had played a significant role in fostering cohesion among various community groups.

Several prominent community leaders, including Anil Dosa, Kenny Desai, Sreekanth Akkapalli, Dr. Sudhir Parikh, and Mohammad Farooqi, also extended their best wishes.

Dr. Parikh described Dr. Jeph as approachable, trustworthy, and deeply knowledgeable about Indian culture and tradition.

A Night of Memories and Reflections

A special tribute video honoring Dr. Jeph’s service was played during the event.

In his farewell speech, Dr. Jeph reminisced about his arrival in New York during Cyclone Ida, which had left the city flooded. He described his tenure as “remarkable”, expressing the privilege of serving the largest Indian American diaspora community.

He recalled memorable moments, including how community members gathered at 2-3 AM to listen to PM Modi’s “Mann Ki Baat” addresses and cultural celebrations like “Dance Pe Chance.”

Dr. Jeph thanked FIA and other organizations for showcasingunity away from home, which, he said, made his diplomatic work more effective. He also shared fond memories of events like the India Day Parade and the Unity March organized by Kenny Desai.

Before concluding, Dr. Jeph made a heartfelt appeal to support the approximately 300,000 Indian students in the U.S., underscoring the consulate’s commitment to assisting every Indian. He assured the community of his continued availability for anyone visiting Delhi and expressed gratitude to his wife and various organizations for their support throughout his tenure.

Community Organizations in Attendance

The farewell was attended by representatives from numerousIndian American organizations, including:

  • TAK Group
  • Bansal Foundation
  • TV9
  • Parikh Worldwide Media
  • TV Asia
  • Print Early
  • BJANA
  • Siddhivinayak Temple
  • MOCCAPI
  • Brahman Samaj of USA
  • Namaste Global
  • Maheshwari Mahasabha of North America
  • SKN Foundation
  • Rajasthani Organisation of American Residents (ROAR)

Also in attendance were Pallavi Jeph, Vishal J. Harsh, and Priti Ray-Patel, who delivered the vote of thanks, bringing the memorable evening to a close.

U.S. Happiness Declines to Record Low, Driven by Young Adults’ Well-Being Crisis

The United States has hit a new low in the World Happiness Report’s annual ranking, dropping to No. 24, the worst position in the report’s 13-year history. Last year, the U.S. fell out of the top 20 for the first time, sliding from No. 15 to No. 23. The ranking, based on how residents across more than 140 countries rate their quality of life, highlights a troubling trend: a significant decline in well-being among young Americans.

“That gradual decline in well-being in the United States is, if you start digging into it, especially driven by people that are below 30,” says Jan-Emmanuel De Neve, a professor of economics at the University of Oxford and editor of the World Happiness Report. “Life satisfaction of young people in the U.S. has declined.”

If only Americans under 30 were assessed, the U.S. would not even rank in the top 60 happiest countries, the report finds. This demographic trend has played a major role in the country’s consistent drop in rankings.

The Growing Happiness Gap

The U.S.’s overall decline is largely explained by increasing inequality, especially in comparison to the Nordic nations that continue to dominate the rankings. Finland remains the world’s happiest country at No. 1, followed by Denmark (No. 2) and Iceland (No. 3).

“In these Nordic Scandinavian countries, a rising tide lifts all boats, so the levels of economic inequality are much less, and that reflects in well-being as well,” De Neve explains. “In Finland, most people will rate their happiness as a seven or an eight. But in the U.S., there are a lot of 10s and a lot of ones—a much wider gap.”

Loneliness and Declining Social Support

One of the key findings of this year’s report is the strength of social support and how much people trust others, both critical predictors of happiness. In 2023, nearly one in five young adults in the U.S. reported having no one they could count on for support.

Another indicator of rising social isolation is the 53% increase in people dining alone since 2003. This year’s report included data on shared meals across a week, which researchers found correlated with higher well-being.

“You see an extraordinary increase in dining alone over the past two decades in the U.S.,” says De Neve, noting how this deepens social mistrust. “People are increasingly on their own, isolated. Their political thinking, their theories around life and society, are no longer tested by others … In our echo chambers, we develop these notions that others are to be distrusted.”

Mistrust and Social Fragmentation

The researchers also tracked trust levels by asking participants whether they believed a lost wallet would be returned. Compared to Nordic countries, Americans were far more likely to assume it would not be.

“It requires that strangers are to be trusted, that they will go beyond the call of duty and be kind,” says De Neve. “That single item of the wallet drop is very powerful.”

The Future of Happiness in the U.S.

The continuous decline in the U.S.’s happiness ranking, particularly among young people, suggests a deepening crisis of social isolation, inequality, and mistrust. Experts stress the importance of social connections and community engagement in reversing this trend.

With the U.S. slipping further down the rankings, researchers warn that without intervention, the country may continue to fall behind in global happiness.

Greenland Condemns U.S. Visits Amid Trump’s Takeover Talk

Greenland’s political leaders have strongly criticized upcoming high-profile U.S. visits following President Donald Trump’s renewed remarks about taking over the island.

Second Lady Usha Vance is set to visit Greenland this week for a cultural tour, while National Security Adviser Mike Waltz is also expected to travel there with Energy Secretary Chris Wright. However, outgoing Greenlandic Prime Minister Mute Egede has described the visits as aggressive and noted that neither official was invited for meetings. Jens-Frederik Nielsen, the likely next leader of Greenland, accused the U.S. of showing disrespect toward the island’s population.

U.S. Interest in Greenland

Greenland, the world’s largest island, has been under Danish control for about 300 years. While it manages its domestic affairs, foreign and defense policies remain under Copenhagen’s authority. The U.S. has long maintained a strategic interest in Greenland and has operated a military base on the island since World War II. Trump has also expressed interest in Greenland’s rare earth minerals, and his son, Donald Trump Jr., visited the island before his father’s inauguration in January.

Announcing Vance’s visit, the White House stated that she would attend Greenland’s national dogsled race, the Avannaata Qimussersu, and visit historical sites to “celebrate Greenlandic culture and unity.” Meanwhile, Waltz’s trip was confirmed by a source speaking to CBS News, with reports suggesting he would arrive before Vance.

Egede viewed Waltz’s visit as a deliberate provocation. “What is the security adviser doing in Greenland? The only purpose is to show a demonstration of power to us,” he told Greenlandic newspaper Sermitsiaq. Nielsen echoed these concerns, saying the visits demonstrated a lack of respect for Greenlanders.

Trump’s Push for U.S. Control

The tensions follow Trump’s recent remarks about Greenland’s future. In a conversation with NATO Secretary-General Mark Rutte earlier this month, Trump implied that he might pursue U.S. control over Greenland with NATO’s backing. “You know, Mark, we need that for international security… we have a lot of our favorite players cruising around the coast, and we have to be careful,” he said. “We’ll be talking to you.” When asked about the possibility of annexation, Trump responded, “I think that will happen.”

Greenland’s political parties swiftly condemned Trump’s statements, calling them “unacceptable behavior.” The issue became central to Greenland’s recent elections, in which Egede’s governing Inuit Ataqatigiit party lost unexpectedly to Nielsen’s Democratic party, which advocates for gradual independence from Denmark.

In a speech to the U.S. Congress earlier this month, Trump claimed he supported Greenland’s right to self-determination, stating, “If you choose, we welcome you into the United States of America.” However, polls show that while nearly 80% of Greenlanders favor independence from Denmark, an even larger majority opposes becoming part of the U.S.

Kanneganti Brahmanandam: India’s Richest Comedian with a ₹500 Crore Net Worth

When discussing India’s most popular comedians, names like Johnny Lever, Vir Das, Kapil Sharma, Bharti Singh, and Zakir Khan often come to mind. Over the years, comedy has evolved into a highly lucrative industry in India, with stand-up comics, television stars, and film comedians earning in crores. Shows like The Great Indian Kapil Show and Comicstaan have propelled many comedians to national fame.

But who holds the title of India’s richest comedian?

India’s Wealthiest Comedian

According to reports, the richest comedian in India is Kanneganti Brahmanandam, best known for his extensive work in Telugu cinema. News24 states that Brahmanandam’s estimated net worth is a staggering ₹505 crore ($60 million), while India.com and Siasat estimate it to be around ₹490 crore. This places him well ahead of other top comedians like Kapil Sharma and Johnny Lever.

Early Life and Education

Brahmanandam was born on February 1, 1956, in the Guntur district of Andhra Pradesh, India. A native of Muppala village near Sattenapalli, he pursued a Master’s degree in Telugu (MA) before embarking on his film career. Prior to entering the entertainment industry, he worked as a Lecturer in Telugu, IMDb reports.

Career Breakthrough and Rise to Fame

Brahmanandam’s journey into films began when renowned filmmaker Jandhyala introduced him to the silver screen with a role in Chantabbai (1986). However, his major breakthrough came in 1987 with D. Rama Naidu’s film Aha Naa Pellanta, which cemented his status as a leading comedian in Telugu cinema.

His career has since spanned over three decades, with more than 1,000 films to his name. Recognized as one of the greatest comedians in Indian cinema, he has received prestigious honors, including the Padma Shri, one of India’s highest civilian awards.

Guinness World Record Holder

Brahmanandam’s contributions to cinema have been widely recognized. In 2010, he won the Guinness World Record for the “Most screen credits for a living actor,” having appeared in an unparalleled number of films.

Recent Work

Even after decades in the industry, Brahmanandam remains active in Telugu cinema. His recent role in “Kalki 2898 AD” continues to showcase his comedic brilliance.

With a net worth surpassing ₹500 crore, Brahmanandam stands as India’s wealthiest comedian, proving that comedy is not just an art but also an immensely profitable profession in Indian entertainment.

Mohanlal’s “L2: Empuraan” Becomes First Malayalam Film to Release in IMAX

Malayalam superstar Mohanlal has announced that his highly anticipated action film “L2: Empuraan” will be the first-ever Malayalam film to release in IMAX.

Sharing the film’s poster on Instagram, the actor expressed his excitement, stating,

“It gives us immense pride to announce that #L2E #Empuraan will be the first ever film from the Malayalam cinema industry to release on IMAX. We hope this is the beginning of a long and illustrious association between IMAX and Malayalam Cinema. Watch the spectacle unfold on IMAX screens across the world in selected markets from 27/03/2025! Malayalam | Tamil | Hindi | Telugu | Kannada #March27.”

Mohanlal has been actively promoting the film on social media, sharing behind-the-scenes glimpses, updates, and posters, further building anticipation for its release.

Rajinikanth First to Watch the Trailer

On March 18, director Prithviraj Sukumaran revealed that Tamil superstar Rajinikanth was the first to watch the trailer of “L2: Empuraan.” In a heartfelt post on X (formerly Twitter), he shared a picture with Rajinikanth and wrote,

“The very first person to watch the trailer of #L2E #EMPURAAN. I will forever cherish what you said after watching it, Sir! This meant the world to me! Fanboy forever! @rajinikanth #OGSuperstar.”

Censor Board Clearance and Release Date

The Censor Board has officially cleared “L2: Empuraan” for release with a UA 16+ rating. The film’s certified length is 179.52 meters.

The film is a highly anticipatedsequel to “Lucifer,” which was a blockbuster hit. The political action thriller will also see Prithviraj reprising his role as Zayed Masood, a mercenary commando who leads the notorious Kureshi-Ab’ram nexus, continuing his impactful character from the first film.

“L2: Empuraan” is set to hit screens worldwide on March 27, 2025.

UN Reports Record 9,000 Migrant Deaths in 2024 Amid Rising Border Crossings

Nearly 9,000 people died last year attempting to cross borders, marking the highest toll recorded in five consecutive years, according to the United Nations agency for migration. The International Organization for Migration (IOM) reported 8,938 migrant deaths in 2024, a figure likely underestimated due to unreported cases.

“The rise of deaths is terrible in and of itself, but the fact that thousands remained unidentified each year is even more tragic,” said Julia Black, coordinator of the IOM’s Missing Migrants Project.

The IOM’s deputy director general for operations, Ugochi Daniels, emphasized the need for a global approach to prevent further tragedies. “Behind every number is a human being, someone for whom the loss is devastating,” he said.

Asia recorded the highest number of migrant deaths at 2,788, followed by the Mediterranean Sea (2,452) and Africa (2,242). In the Americas, at least 1,233 fatalities were documented, including 341 in the Caribbean. Europe reported 233 migrant deaths, while the dangerous Darien Gap between Colombia and Panama set a new record with 174 fatalities.

The grim milestone comes as the IOM faces severe funding shortages. The agency recently announced cuts to essential migrant aid programs due to reductions in U.S. assistance, affecting millions of displaced people worldwide.

Indie Film Festival Awards Announces Nominations for Best Films of 2024

The Indie Film Festival Awards (IFFA), a non-profit organization, has announced its nominations for the best films of 2024 from both Hollywood and Bollywood. The festival, set to take place from June 2-5, 2025, at Quad Cinema in New York City, aims to celebrate the brilliance and creativity of independent filmmakers worldwide, according to a press release on March 19.

More than 100 films are participating in the festival, which also serves as a global platform for filmmakers through its streaming service, Indie Films World.

Hollywood Nominations

The Hollywood category highlights extraordinary performances and cinematic achievements:

Best Actor – Male

  • Dennis Quaid – The Substance
  • Andrew Garfield – We Live in Time
  • Chris Hemsworth – Furiosa: A Mad Max Saga
  • Mo Chara – Kneecap
  • Besir Zeciri – The Girl with the Needle

Best Actor – Female

  • Demi Moore – The Substance
  • Anya Taylor-Joy – Furiosa: A Mad Max Saga
  • Vic Carmen Sonne – The Girl with the Needle
  • Florence Pugh – We Live in Time
  • Nell Tiger Free – The First Omen

Best Film

  • Dune: Part Two
  • The Brutalist
  • Furiosa: A Mad Max Saga
  • The Substance
  • Torn

Best Director

  • George Miller – Furiosa: A Mad Max Saga
  • Coralie Fargeat – The Substance
  • Luca Guadagnino – Challengers
  • Rich Peppiatt – Kneecap
  • Arkasha Stevenson – The First Omen

Bollywood Nominations

The Bollywood category showcasesIndia’s diverse and evolving independent film industry:

Best Actor – Male

  • Akshay Kumar – Sarfira
  • Ajay Devgn – Maidan
  • Kartik Aaryan – Chandu Champion
  • Rajkumar Rao – Srikanth
  • Vikrant Massey – The Sabarmati Exp

Best Actor – Female

  • Alia Bhatt – Jigra
  • Janhvi Kapoor – & Mrs. Mahi
  • Katrina Kaif – Merry Christmas
  • Sharvari Wagh – Vedaa
  • Yami Gautam – Article 370

Best Film

  • Article 370
  • Binny and Family
  • Chandu Champion
  • Laapata Ladies
  • Stree 2

Best Director

  • Aditya Jambhale – Article 370
  • Amar Kaushik – Stree 2
  • Kabir Khan – Chandu Champion
  • Kiran Rao – Laapata Ladies
  • Siddharth Anand – Fighter

Best Debutante

  • Abhay Verma – Munjya
  • Anjini Dhawan – Binny and Family
  • Lakshya – Kill
  • Nitanshi Goel – Laapata Ladies
  • Sparsh Srivastav – Laapata Ladies

OTT – Special Mention

  • Anupam Kher – Vijay 69
  • Bhumi Pednekar – Bhakshak
  • Imtiaz Ali – Chamkila
  • Panchayat – Amazon Prime Video
  • The Great Indian Kapil Show – Netflix

IFFA’s Mission to Support Independent Filmmakers

Beyond awards, IFFA also provides education, resources, and support to independent filmmakers at various stages of their careers. Through its streaming platform, Indie Films World, the festival offers a distribution network to help filmmakers reach a global audience.

The June 2025 festival in New York City promises to be a celebration of innovative storytelling and cinematic excellence from around the world.

Trump Demands Supreme Court Halt Nationwide Injunctions Against His Policies

President Donald Trump has intensified his criticism of federal judges who have blocked his administration’s policies, portraying them as threats to the nation and urging the Supreme Court to intervene.

In a Truth Social post on Thursday, Trump lashed out at judges who issued nationwide injunctions against his executive actions, calling them “radical left judges” and “lunatics” attempting to “assume the Powers of the Presidency, without having to attain 80 Million Votes.” (Trump won the 2024 election with 77 million votes, and federal judges are appointed, not elected.)

“STOP NATIONWIDE INJUNCTIONS NOW, BEFORE IT IS TOO LATE,” Trump wrote, directly appealing to Chief Justice John Roberts. “If Justice Roberts and the United States Supreme Court do not fix this toxic and unprecedented situation IMMEDIATELY, our Country is in very serious trouble!”

The following morning, Trump reiterated his claims on Truth Social, again accusing federal judges of trying to take over presidential duties.

Trump’s administration has faced more than 100 lawsuits challenging his policies, with the former president arguing that nationwide injunctions have been unfairly used to block his agenda. White House press secretary Karoline Leavitt accused these judges of acting as “partisan activists” in remarks to reporters on Wednesday.

“They are trying to dictate policy from the president of the United States,” Leavitt said. “They are trying to clearly slow-walk this administration’s agenda, and it’s unacceptable.”

Both Republican and Democratic administrations have encountered nationwide injunctions, but Trump and his supporters claim that he has faced an unprecedented number. According to the Harvard Law Review, Trump’s first term saw 64 nationwide injunctions—far more than any president since 2001.

However, Trump has exercised executive power in ways that previous presidents have not, and in his second term, he has aggressively pushed to expand the scope of his authority. As political analyst Steve Benen noted, Trump and his allies are framing judicial opposition as part of a broad conspiracy rather than acknowledging that his actions may be legally questionable.

Trump and billionaire Elon Musk have also called for judges who rule against the administration to be impeached. This prompted a rare public response from Chief Justice Roberts, who stated, “Impeachment is not an appropriate response to disagreement concerning a judicial decision.”

The Justice Department is currently awaiting a Supreme Court ruling on its request to narrow the reach of several judicial orders blocking Trump’s birthright citizenship executive order. However, as The Associated Press noted, the court does not appear to be rushing its decision.

Priyanka Chopra Becomes India’s Highest-Paid Actress with ₹30 Crore Payday

While Indian cinema actors’ fees remain closely guarded, occasional reports reveal the staggering amounts charged per film. Male superstars now command over ₹100 crore per movie, and female stars are quickly catching up. The title of India’s highest-paid actress recently changed hands, as one star secured a massive ₹30 crore for her comeback film.

India’s Highest-Paid Actress

Priyanka Chopra is set to return to Indian cinema after nearly six years with SS Rajamouli’s upcoming film starring Mahesh Babu. This project also marks her return to South Indian films after more than two decades. According to Bollywood Hungama, Priyanka has signed the film for ₹30 crore, making her the highest-paid Indian actress for a single film.

“This is why they took so long to announce her participation in the project. She was not willing to budge over her fee, and why should she? Why should only male actors get double-digit salaries in our films?” a source told the portal.

Interestingly, Priyanka had previously charged a higher amount—$5 million (over ₹41 crore) for her Amazon Prime Video series Citadel. However, given that the show had a six-hour runtime, the amount was justified. Her ₹30 crore paycheck for SSMB29 (as Mahesh Babu and Rajamouli’s film is tentatively called) is the highest for a female lead in any Indian film.

Who Priyanka Chopra Beat

Before Priyanka’s record-breaking deal, Deepika Padukone held the title of India’s highest-paid actress, reportedly charging ₹20 crore for Kalki 2898 AD. Alia Bhatt follows with a fee of up to ₹15 crore per film, while Kareena Kapoor, Katrina Kaif, Kiara Advani, Nayanthara, and Samantha Ruth Prabhu all command ₹10 crore or more per project.

Priyanka Chopra’s ‘Comeback’ to Indian Cinema

Since relocating to the U.S. in 2015, Priyanka Chopra has made limited appearances in Indian films. After Jai Gangaajal (2016), her only Indian movie was The Sky Is Pink (2019). Her much-anticipated road-trip film Jee Le Zaraa, alongside Alia Bhatt and Katrina Kaif, remains indefinitely delayed.

Despite her absence from Indian cinema, Priyanka has stayed busy with international projects like Citadel, The White Tiger, The Matrix Resurrections, and Love Again. She also has Heads of State, co-starring Idris Elba and John Cena, lined up for release this year. However, SSMB29 will mark her true comeback to Indian films.

Scientists Detect Possible Shift in Dark Energy, Challenging Einstein’s Theory

Scientists have found possible evidence that Dark Energy, the mysterious force driving the expansion of the Universe, may be changing over time—posing a challenge to established theories of time and space.

Some experts believe they could be on the brink of a groundbreaking discovery—one that might require a fundamental reassessment of our understanding of the cosmos.

This early-stage finding contradicts the prevailing theory, which was partly developed by Albert Einstein. While additional data is needed for confirmation, even highly respected researchers involved in the study, such as Professor Ofer Lahav of University College London, acknowledge the significance of the mounting evidence.

“It is a dramatic moment,” Lahav told BBC News. “We may be witnessing a paradigm shift in our understanding of the Universe.”

A Force That Defied Expectations

The discovery of Dark Energy in 1998 was itself a revelation. Until then, scientists believed that the expansion of the Universe—initiated by the Big Bang—would eventually decelerate under the force of gravity.

However, observations made by US and Australian researchers showed that the Universe was actually expanding at an accelerating rate. They could not identify the force responsible, so they termed it Dark Energy to reflect its unknown nature.

Although the exact nature of Dark Energy remains a mystery, astronomers can measure its effects by analyzing how galaxies move away from each other at different points in the Universe’s history.

To deepen their understanding, researchers developed specialized experiments, including the Dark Energy Spectroscopic Instrument (DESI), located at the Kitt Peak National Observatory in Arizona. This instrument consists of 5,000 robotically controlled optical fibers that rapidly scan galaxies to track cosmic expansion.

Unexpected Findings Gain Strength

Last year, DESI researchers detected hints that Dark Energy’s force might have varied over time. Initially, many scientists dismissed this as a statistical anomaly that would disappear with further data.

However, rather than fading, the anomaly has become more pronounced.

“The evidence is stronger now than it was,” said Professor Seshadri Nadathur of the University of Portsmouth.

“We’ve also performed many additional tests compared to the first year, and they’re making us confident that the results aren’t driven by some unknown effect in the data that we haven’t accounted for,” he added.

“Dark Energy Is Even Weirder Than We Thought”

The findings have yet to reach the threshold of an official scientific discovery, but they have sparked intrigue among leading astronomers.

“Dark Energy appears to be even weirder than we thought,” said Scotland’s Astronomer Royal, Professor Catherine Heymans of Edinburgh University, in an interview with BBC News.

“In 2024, the data was quite new, no one was quite sure of it, and people thought more work needed to be done,” Heymans said. “But now, there’s more data and a lot of scrutiny by the scientific community. So, while there is still a chance that the ‘blip’ may go away, there’s also a possibility that we might be edging toward a really big discovery.”

The source of the apparent variation remains unknown.

“No one knows!” Lahav admitted. “If this new result is correct, then we need to find the mechanism that causes the variation, and that might mean a brand-new theory—which makes this so exciting.”

The Search for More Evidence

DESI will continue collecting data over the next two years, with the goal of analyzing roughly 50 million galaxies and other luminous objects. The aim is to determine whether the observations are undeniably accurate.

“We’re in the business of letting the Universe tell us how it works,” said Andrei Cuceu, a postdoctoral researcher at the Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory in California. “And maybe it is telling us it’s more complicated than we thought it was.”

Further insights into Dark Energy are expected from the European Space Agency’s (ESA) Euclid mission, a space telescope designed to probe deeper into the Universe with even greater precision. Launched in 2023, Euclid has already begun delivering highly detailed images, which were released by ESA today.

The DESI collaboration includes more than 900 scientists from over 70 institutions worldwide, with notable contributions from researchers at Durham University, University College London, and the University of Portsmouth in the UK.

MEA Urges Indian Students in US to Follow Local Laws Amid Visa Issues

The Ministry of External Affairs (MEA) has emphasized that Indian students in the United States must comply with American laws, following the detention of a postdoctoral fellow at Georgetown University and the self-deportation of another student to Canada.

External Affairs Ministry spokesperson Randhir Jaiswal stated on Friday that neither individual sought assistance from Indian missions in the US.

Visa Revocations and Deportation Cases

Badar Khan Suri, a postdoctoral fellow at Georgetown University in Washington, D.C., was detained by the Department of Homeland Security (DHS) on Monday night over allegations of “actively spreading Hamas propaganda.” However, a US federal judge has blocked his deportation.

This incident follows the case of Ranjani Srinivasan, an Indian student at Columbia University, who self-deported to Canada after her visa was revoked. She was accused of “advocating for violence and terrorism” and participating in activities supporting Hamas.

MEA’s Response

Addressing media inquiries, Jaiswal reiterated that visa and immigration policies fall under the sovereign jurisdiction of respective nations and must be adhered to.

“When it comes to visa and immigration policy, it is something that lies within the sovereign functions of a country,” Jaiswal said. “Just as we expect foreign nationals in India to follow our laws, Indian nationals abroad must also comply with local regulations.”

On Suri’s detention, Jaiswal noted that the Indian government has only learned about the situation through media reports. “Neither the US government nor this individual has approached us or the embassy,” he said.

Regarding Srinivasan’s case, Jaiswal stated that Indian authorities were not contacted for assistance. “We only came to know of her departure from the US from media reports… We understand that she has gone to Canada,” he added.

US Authorities’ Claims

According to the Department of Homeland Security, Srinivasan, who was enrolled as a doctoral student in Urban Planning at Columbia University under an F-1 visa, was allegedly “involved in activities supporting” Hamas.

Her visa was revoked by the Department of State on March 5, and DHS reportedly obtained video evidence of her using the Customs and Border Protection (CBP) Home App to self-deport on March 11.

India-US Educational Ties

Despite these incidents, Jaiswal reaffirmed India’s commitment to strengthening educational ties with the US, noting that a significant number of Indian students pursue higher education in American institutions.

“The knowledge partnership and participation of our students in US universities is an important element of our relationship, and we want to foster these ties further,” he said.

Heathrow Airport Faces Shutdown After Fire at Electrical Substation, Power Restoration Underway

A fire at an electrical substation near Heathrow Airport forced the shutdown of Europe’s busiest airport, leaving thousands of passengers stranded. According to a National Grid source, power is expected to return within hours.

The London Fire Brigade reports that the fire is still burning, affecting not only Heathrow’s Terminals 2 and 4 but also leaving 5,000 nearby homes without electricity. Despite counter-terrorism police leading the investigation, the Metropolitan Police have stated there is no current indication of foul play.

Heathrow officials have confirmed that no flights will take off or land today, warning of prolonged disruptions. A source at the airport revealed that back-up generators were activated but were insufficient to power the entire facility. The failure raises “serious questions” about the airport’s emergency preparedness, according to an industry executive.

Nearby hotels and pubs are filled with stranded travelers, many of whom are anxiously waiting for updates. BBC correspondent Rich Preston described the scene, noting the growing frustration among passengers.

Partial Power Restoration at Heathrow

Reports indicate that power has returned to some areas of the airport, specifically Terminal 4. According to PA news agency, an “interim solution” has been implemented by National Grid, allowing affected customers to regain access to electricity.

Despite this partial restoration, Heathrow will remain closed until at least 23:59 GMT today.

British Airways Cancels All Short-Haul Flights

As a result of the disruption, British Airways has announced the cancellation of all short-haul flights at Heathrow for today.

“Our teams are currently working hard to review our long-haul schedule,” the airline stated, adding that they are also evaluating potential impacts on flights scheduled for tomorrow and beyond.

‘Extremely Damaging’ to the UK’s Reputation

Travel journalist Simon Calder expressed concerns about the long-term consequences of the incident, noting that even if power is fully restored, normal operations are unlikely to resume immediately.

“Tomorrow will still be far from a normal day,” he said, warning that disruptions could extend into next week.

“Ultimately, it’s extremely damaging to the UK economically, reputationally, and causes immense distress to people. All those people have been let down,” he added.

Student Criticizes Heathrow’s Lack of Backup Plan

Maz Cooper, an 18-year-old psychology student from Hampshire, was among those affected. She had been scheduled to travel to Poland for a college trip, with a planned visit to Auschwitz as the main focus.

Speaking to reporters, she expressed frustration over the lack of preparedness at Heathrow.

“It’s ridiculous that a substation fire could shut down such a large airport,” she said.

She described the uncertainty she and her classmates faced.

“We came to college this morning completely unsure if we’d be going. We waited until 12, when our teachers unfortunately broke the news that we couldn’t go.”

Cooper also highlighted the stress this caused for the trip’s organizers.

“I want to emphasize the stress and panic the teachers organizing this had to go through due to the lack of resilience from Heathrow Airport, let alone the students who were left in limbo until it was confirmed the trip was canceled.”

While she acknowledged the complexity of the situation, she criticized Heathrow’s apparent lack of contingency measures.

“The fact that there’s no back-up plan for problems like this is, frankly, ridiculous,” she said.

Smoke Continues to Rise from Substation

Even after 14 hours, smoke is still visible at the substation where the fire started. Emergency crews continue efforts to control the situation while authorities investigate.

National Grid’s Interim Solution

The National Grid has provided an update, stating that they have implemented “an interim solution” to restore power to affected customers, including Heathrow Airport.

According to their statement, engineers successfully reconfigured the network from the North Hyde substation, allowing reconnections to previously impacted areas. This includes parts of Heathrow that were affected by the outage.

However, the National Grid emphasized that this is only a temporary fix.

Reports from Heathrow Indicate Partial Restoration

PA news agency reporters on-site at Heathrow have observed signs of power returning to certain areas.

They report that lights are back on in Terminal 4’s main building, and the lifts in the multi-story car park are operational again.

Massive Travel Disruptions Expected

While some power has been restored, major disruptions are expected to continue. The full extent of the knock-on effect on future flights remains uncertain.

Passengers have been advised to check with their airlines for updates on rescheduled flights and alternative arrangements.

Emergency Response and Investigation Continue

Fire crews remain at the scene, working to fully extinguish the blaze and assess structural damage. The counter-terrorism unit continues its investigation, but so far, there is no evidence suggesting foul play.

Airport authorities and government officials are expected to hold briefings to provide further updates on the situation and outline steps to prevent similar incidents in the future.

Unanswered Questions

As of now, passengers and industry experts alike are left with pressing concerns:

  • When will normal airport operations resume?
  • Will airlines be able to accommodate stranded passengers quickly?
  • What caused the fire, and could similar incidents happen again?

For now, Heathrow remains at a standstill, leaving thousands of travelers uncertain about their next steps.

Federal Reserve Holds Interest Rates Steady Amid Uncertainty Over Trump’s Economic Policies

The Federal Reserve opted to keep interest rates unchanged on Wednesday as central bank officials assess the impact of President Donald Trump’s aggressive economic policies.

The decision, announced at the end of the Fed’s two-day monetary policy meeting, indicates that officials are awaiting clear signs that inflation is moving toward their 2% target or that the economy is slowing more than anticipated—two scenarios that could prompt rate cuts.

According to the latest economic projections released Wednesday, officials still anticipate lowering borrowing costs twice this year. However, eight officials now foresee either one or no rate cuts in 2024, compared to only four who held that view in December.

During a post-meeting press conference, Fed Chair Jerome Powell acknowledged the uncertainty facing American businesses and consumers, much of it linked to what he described as the Trump administration’s “turmoil.”

“It remains to be seen how these developments affect future spending and investment,” Powell said.

For now, the Fed’s benchmark borrowing rate remains between 4.25% and 4.5%. Powell noted that holding rates steady allows policymakers to monitor how Trump’s sweeping policy changes—such as tariffs, mass deportations, and a shrinking federal workforce—affect the U.S. economy.

In recent speeches, Fed officials have emphasized their willingness to adjust interest rates in either direction based on economic data.

Wednesday’s decision marks the second consecutive time the central bank has maintained borrowing costs.

Projections released by the Fed suggest the economy will be weaker than previously expected this year, with inflation running higher than anticipated.

As Trump’s administration pursues significant structural changes, Fed officials see the U.S. economy trending toward “stagflation”—a troubling mix of sluggish or negative growth and rising inflation. Whether the country enters a full-blown stagflationary period, last seen in the 1970s, remains uncertain.

All 12 voting Fed officials supported Wednesday’s decision to hold rates steady, though Fed Governor Christopher Waller dissented on the separate decision to slow the pace of reducing the central bank’s balance sheet.

Powell on Trump’s Economic Policies

Trump’s economic policies pose a major challenge for the Fed due to their broad and uncertain effects. During the press conference, Powell faced numerous questions about how the Fed is factoring in the president’s policy shifts.

Trump’s tariffs could fuel inflation and dampen economic growth, while his immigration crackdown may create labor shortages in key industries. His mass layoffs of federal employees could push some local economies into recession, but his deregulation efforts and extension of 2017 tax cuts might spur growth. The overall impact of Trump’s policies on growth, inflation, and the labor market remains unclear.

Powell noted that Trump’s tariffs contributed to the Fed’s higher inflation projections for this year, though he acknowledged the difficulty in determining exactly how much inflation is attributable to the trade war.

Following the Fed’s announcement, Trump urged policymakers to cut interest rates as tariffs take effect.

“The Fed would be MUCH better off CUTTING RATES as U.S. Tariffs start to transition (ease!) their way into the economy,” Trump wrote on Truth Social, referring to April 2—when reciprocal tariffs are set to go into effect—as “Liberation Day in America.”

Earlier this month, Powell reiterated that the Fed would be guided by economic data rather than forecasts. He pointed to signs of a slowdown in consumer spending.

A Strong Labor Market Offsets Economic Concerns

Despite concerns about consumer spending, the labor market remains a pillar of strength for the economy.

In February, the unemployment rate stood at 4.1%, with employers adding 151,000 jobs. Weekly jobless claims, often an early indicator of labor market shifts, remain at historically low levels.

Powell highlighted the labor market’s resilience as a key factor supporting the economy. However, he cautioned that any unexpected deterioration could prompt the Fed to resume rate cuts sooner.

“Labor market conditions are solid,” Powell said.

When asked about the risk of a recession, Powell downplayed concerns, noting that while some economists have raised their odds of an economic downturn, the risk remains moderate.

“Forecasters have generally raised—a number of them have raised—their possibility of a recession somewhat. But still at relatively moderate levels,” Powell said. “If you go back two months, people were saying that the likelihood of a recession was extremely low. So it has moved, but it’s not high.”

America’s Economic Mood and Its Impact on Spending

While economic data remains strong, sentiment surveys indicate a growing pessimism among businesses and consumers—a trend Powell acknowledged during Wednesday’s press conference.

Trump’s policy agenda has already influenced “soft data” measures, such as consumer and business sentiment surveys. However, Powell noted that the relationship between sentiment and actual economic activity is not always clear.

“There are times people are saying very downbeat things about the economy and then going out and buying a new car,” Powell remarked.

Despite the strong labor market, Americans are increasingly concerned about inflation. The University of Michigan’s latest consumer survey showed rising long-term inflation expectations. If these expectations continue to climb, the Fed may be forced to reconsider its stance on interest rates.

During Trump’s first trade war in 2018, inflation expectations were a major factor in the Fed’s decision to consider rate hikes, according to declassified policy documents known as the “teal book.”

Powell, however, suggested that long-term inflation expectations remain stable, citing data from the New York Fed.

The Michigan consumer survey for March recorded the largest month-over-month jump in five-to-ten-year inflation expectations since 1993. Even so, Powell dismissed concerns over the recent spike in short-term inflation expectations.

“You would expect that expectations of inflation over the course of a year would move around because conditions change,” he said. “And in this case, we have tariffs coming in. We don’t know how big. There are so many things we don’t know.”

Looking Ahead

The Fed’s decision to keep rates unchanged reflects a cautious approach amid uncertainty over Trump’s economic policies.

With the economy showing mixed signals—strong employment but slowing consumer spending—central bankers are navigating a complex landscape. Inflation remains a key concern, especially as Trump’s tariffs roll out.

As the year progresses, the Fed will closely monitor economic data to determine whether rate cuts are necessary. The path ahead remains uncertain, with Trump’s policies introducing new variables into an already delicate economic environment.

ITServe Services (ITSS) Offers Unique Services Addressing The Challenges Members Face

“As a subsidiary of ITServe Alliance, ITServe Services (ITSS) is uniquely positioned to design and implement customized solutions that cater directly to the challenges and opportunities ITServe members face,” says, Manohar Kasagani, Managing Director of ITSS.

Providing the background the formation of ITSS, Anju Vallbhaneni, current Presiudent of ITServe says, “ITServe Alliance was initially established to offer financial and professional benefits to its members. However, as the organization expanded, it became evident that certain services and benefits required a dedicated platform beyond ITServe Alliance itself. This realization led to the creation of ITServe Services (ITSS), a specialized initiative aimed at addressing those additional needs.”

ITServe Services operates as an independent Board, overseeing a range of activities aimed at enhancing the experience and benefits for members. A group of highly qualified and experienced ITServe leaders make up ITSS Board of Directors: Manohar Kasagani, Anju Vallabhaneni, Amar Varada, Bala Shan, Gautam Reddy Mallireddy, Arvind Nerella, and Srikant Dasugari.

ITSS Office Bearers are: Manohar Kasagani, ITSS Managing Director; Viswa kandi, ITSS – Secretary; Purna Irukulapati, ITSS – Jt. Secretary; Mahesh Sake, ITSS – Treasurer; and, Ravindran Komatireddy, ITSS – Jt. Treasurer. ITSS Advisors consist of: Gautam Gali and Mahender Musuku.

Services Committees Chairs are: Shree Yerramsett, TP Reddy, Navin Seepana, Ramesh Kalwala, Sarath Chalamcharla, Radhesh Reddy Gurrala, Suresh Mittaplayy, and, Deepak Choudhary. Each of them has come to play an important role in the functioning of ITServe, fulfilling various roles needed to serve its large membership.

According to Amar Varada, ITSS Board of Director, ITSS was founded with the mission of delivering real, measurable benefits to ITServe members.” These include: Group Health Insurance, Business Insurance, ITServe Angels (Entrepreneurial Support Program), Merger & Acquisition Advisory Services, Exclusive Discounts on Payroll Services (ADP), Discounts on Google Workspace & Microsoft Office, Discounted price with Dice. Each of these services is designed to maximize cost savings and operational efficiency for ITServe members.

Bala Shan pointed out” As ITServe continues to expand, ITSS is actively working on introducing additional benefits to provide even more value to its members.” Two major upcoming initiatives include: LinkedIn Discount for ITServe Members, which is designed to help businesses and professionals enhance their networking, recruitment, and marketing efforts at a reduced cost. Exclusive Travel Discounts by top travel providers to offer discounted flight tickets for members. This will significantly reduce travel expenses for business owners and professionals.

“This ensures a more targeted and effective approach to delivering member benefits,” says Gautam Reddy Mallireddy. Currently, ITSS focuses on the following key areas: • Group Health Insurance • Business Insurance • ITServe Angels (a support network for ITServe entrepreneurs) • Mergers & Acquisitions (M&A) Advisory A major emphasis has been placed on group health insurance solutions.

Recently, ITSS partnered with Trucardia, a company specializing in insurance services to develop a Captive Health Insurance Plan for ITServe members. This plan will leverage ITServe’s collective strength to provide competitive, customized health insurance options.

Currently, ITServe has over 2,500 members, but most procure their health insurance individually, missing out on the benefits of collective bargaining. A captive insurance model allows businesses to form their own insurance company dedicated exclusively to covering the health needs of their employees. Key benefits of Captive Health Insurance include, Cost Control, Financial Incentives, Tailored Coverage.

Srikant Dasugari believes that “ITServe members gain the power of community, an invaluable strength in the IT industry and beyond. With exclusive access to member events and resources, active members are more connected to the field as a whole—and each other.”

In addition, ITSS is in discussions with leading financial software providers like QuickBooks to secure exclusive member discounts. ITServe Services is also forming an exclusive partnership with Monster to offer ITServe members special discounts on Monster’s recruitment services, which will help businesses streamline their hiring process, attract top talent, and reduce recruitment costs.

ITSS is committed to “continuously enhance and expand the range of benefits and services available to ITServe members. We are committed to continuously expanding our member benefits and will share further updates as these exciting initiatives roll out,” says Arvind Nerella.

In his capacity as the MD of ITSS, Kasagani and his dedicated Team oversee ITSS operations and ensure strategic execution of member benefits. Kasagani serves as a bridge between ITServe Alliance and ITSS, reporting key developments and initiatives. He and the Team lead initiatives in health benefits, business insurance, M&A, and financial services for members. And, they engage with members to collect feedback and refine ITSS offerings based on their evolving needs.

“ITSS is dedicated to empowering ITServe members with innovative solutions, financial advantages, and strategic resources. With these initiatives, we aim to reinforce ITServe’s position as the premier organization for IT entrepreneurs. Stay tuned for more updates!,” says Kasagani.

ITServe Alliance, the largest association of IT Services organizations, founded in 2010, has rightly become the voice of all prestigious IT companies functioning with similar interests across United States. Through the years, ITServe has evolved as a resourceful and respected platform to collaborate and initiate measures in the direction of protecting common interests and ensuring collective success.

For more information and to join, please visit: Itserve.org

-+=